Home

SimNow User Manual

1. User Manual November 2010 E Instruction Ouen Mnemonic Opcode Description CMOVNZ reg64 reg mem64 0 5 Ze Move if not zero ZF 0 m CMOVNE regl6 reg mem16 0 E Ce Move if not equal ZF 0 v CMOVNE reg32 reg mem32 0 5 E Move if not equal ZF 0 v CMOVNE reg64 reg mem64 0 5 r Move if not equal ZF m CMOVBE regl6 reg mem16 EUR n ca below or equal or ZF v CMOVBE reg32 reg mem32 6 r pc NS below or equal or ZF v CMOVBE reg64 reg mem64 be li if below or equal or ZF v CMOVNA regi6 reg memi 6 r Move if not above CF 1 mv CMOVNA reg32 reg mem32 6 r Move if not above CF 1 mv CMOVNA reg64 reg mem64 6 r Move if not above CF 1 ei CMOVNBE regl6 reg meml Ti x Pide P eld below er equal pw Ore e CMOVNBE reg32 reg mem32 7 r rua SE below or equal 0 or D CMOVNBE reg64 reg mem64 0 TAE 2 oo below ob edial Bids v CMOVA regl 6 reg memi6 0 7 r Move if above CF 1 or ZF 0 m CMOVA reg32 reg mem32 0 7 r Move if above CF 1 or ZF 0 m CMOVA reg64 reg mem64 0 T XE Move if above CF 1 or ZF 0 m CMOVS regl 6 reg memi6 0 8 r Move if sign SF 1 m CMOVS reg32 reg mem32 0 8 r Move if sign SF 1 m CMOVS reg 4 reg mem64 0 8 r Move if sign SF 1 m CMOVNS regl6 reg mem16 0 9 r Move if not sign SF 0 m CMOVNS reg32 reg mem32 0
2. User Manual November 2010 Instruction See Mnemonic Opcode Description e Short jump with the target specified MP ll6off a Sech E ER by a 16 bit signed displacement v Short jump with the target specified MP 1320ff H SE E by a 32 bit signed displacement v Near jump with the target specified JMP reg mem16 FF 4 reg mem16 ef Near jump with the target specified JMP reg mem32 FF 4 reg mem32 D Near jump with the target specified JMP reg mem64 FF 4 reg mem64 e Far jump direct with the target JMP FAR pntrl6 16 EA cd specified by a far pointer contained e in the instruction Far jump direct with the target JMP FAR pntrl6 32 EA cp specified by a far pointer contained e in the instruction JMP FAR memi6 16 FF 5 Far jump indirect with the target d specified by a far pointer in memory JMP FAR mem16 32 FF 5 Far jump indirect with the target v specified by a far pointer in memor Load the SF ZF AF PF and CF flags dd 2E into the AH register v LDS reg16 mem16 16 C5 r Load DS regl6 with a far pointer from v memory LDS reg32 mem16 32 C5 r Load DS reg32 with a far pointer from v memory LES reg16 mem16 16 CA r Load ES regl6 with a far pointer from v memory LES reg32 mem16 32 CA r Load ES reg32 with a far pointer from v memory LFS regl6 memi6 16 OF B4 r Load FS regl6 with a far pointer from v memor
3. CALL reg mem32 FF 2 by r g mem32 e CALL reg mem64 FF 2 ape ee as the target specified Far call direct with the target CALL FAR pntrl6 16 9A cd specified by a far pointer contained v in the instruction Far call direct with the target CALL FAR pntrl6 32 9A cp Specified by a far pointer contained e in the instruction CALL FAR mem or te FE 3 E E o Nec v FALD PAR UH PEY GE EE K WEE v CBW 98 Sign extend AL into AX m CWDE 98 Sign extend AX into EAX v CDQE 98 Sign extend EAX into RAX v CWD 99 Sign extend AX into DX AX v CDQ 99 Sign extend EAX into EDX EAX v CQO 99 Sign extend RAX into RDX RAX v CLC F8 Clear the carry flag CF to zero ei CLD FC Clear the direction flag DF to v zero CFLUSH mem8 OF AE 7 Flush cache line containing meme v CMC F5 Complement the carry flag CF m CMOVO regi6 reg memi6 OF 40 r Move if overflow OF 1 m CMOVO reg32 reg mem32 OF 40 r Move if overflow OF 1 v CMOVO reg 4 reg mem64 OF 40 r Move if overflow OF 1 v CMOVNO regi6 reg memi OF 41 r Move if not overflow OF 0 m CMOVNO reg32 reg mem32 OF 41 r Move if not overflow OF 0 m CMOVNO reg64 reg mem64 OF 41 r Move if not overflow OF 0 v CMOVB regl6 reg mem16 OF 42 r Move if below CF 1 A CMOVB reg32 reg mem32 OF 42 r Move if below CF 1 v CMOVB reg 4 reg mem64 OF 42 r Move if below CF 1 m CMOVC regi6 reg memi6
4. User Manual November 2010 Execution Control Flag Value Description ECF_UNUSED 0x00008000 Unused ECF HALT 0x00010000 We are ina HALT ECF_SHUTDOWN 0x00020000 We are ina SHUTDOWN ECF_FPUHANG 0x00040000 FPU freeze ECF APICHOLD 0x00080000 APIC freeze ECF IGNOREINTR 0x00100000 Ignore INTR for one instruction ECF TRAP 0x00200000 EFlags TF bit ECF EXECBP 0x00400000 User execution breakpoints exist ECF LATCHEDSMI 0x00800000 A latched SMI was seen ECF STACKEDSMI 0x01000000 Alatched SMI from within an SMI ECF LATCHEDNMI 0x02000000 A latched NMI was seen ECF_SMIEDGE 0x04000000 An SMI edge has been detected ECF_NMIEDGE 0x08000000 An NMI edge has been detected ECF APICMSGPENDING 0x10000000 An APIC message is waiting to be handled ECF_APICACTPENDING 0x20000000 Any other APIC activity is pending ECF_DR7CODEBREAKS 0x40000000 DR7 has code breakpoints enabled ECF_LASTWASIO 0x80000000 Set if previous instruction did I O Table 7 8 Internal Execution Control Flags 7 23 4 Limitations e Any line in XTR XML file cannot be greater than 255 characters e Comment start tag lt should start on a new line and end tag gt should be last characters on a line playback environments e Although not needed XTR traces recorded by SimNow might contain data written by the CPU e g IOW 7 23 5 Example XTR XML File lt xml v
5. sess 153 Table 10 3 Debugger AMD V Memory Dump Command Examples 154 Fable d Hee Read Examples c eset us eege 154 Table 10 5 MSR Write Example 45 setis terea eter susndasuusdecevessasadeadasdans 155 Table 10 6 Find Pattern Example 2e ette eio eg redu eR FPE NER EE RU NER ie 155 Table 10 7 Debugger Commands and Definitions eee 158 Table 15 1 Computer Platform Files BS 184 Table 15 2 Product EE 185 Table 15 3 Hard Disk Images sie RA suasad es orsa ce inde i RU deed 186 Table 15 4 Memor v SRD Filesi oci In eo ao t IHR ames er P e Rec tepv i sce ada ld 186 Table 15 5 Supported Guest Operating Systems esseeeeeeeeeeeee 187 Table 15 6 CPUID Standard Feature implementation eere 188 Table 15 7 CPUID Extended Feature implementation eene 189 Table 15 8 General Purpose Instruction Reference 223 Table 15 9 System Instruction Reference etnies ee tti de tie etn ono eddes 225 Table 15 10 3DNow Instruction Reference ossnneeesseessenssessseeeesetesstessersseesseeesseee 227 Table 15 11 Extension to 3DNow Instruction Reference 0 0 00 eeecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeees 227 Table 15 12 Prescott New Instruction Reference eere 228 Table 15 13 CodeGen Command Overview esee 246 Table 15 14 Prefix Sequences keyboard text eene 252 Tables xiii
6. MemLog 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 IO logging Returns enabled if Memory Logging is enabled petal ogous otherwise it returns disabled SmiSciLog 0I1 Enables 1 or disables 0 IO logging m Returns enabled if SMI SCI Logging is enabled piper Donius otherwise it returns disabled Version Displays the binary revision of the RD790 model SetPcilrqMap BasePcilrq 0 3 ChipPcilrq 0 7 Depending on platform configuration it maps base PCIIRQ A B C D 0 3 from PCI bridge to ATI chip internal PCITRQ A B C D E F G H 0 7 GetPcilrgMap BasePcilrq 0 3 Returns the ATI chip internal PCIIRQ A B C D E F G H 0 7 which the specific base PCIIRQZA B C D 0 3 is mapped to GetPcilrqTotal Returns the total number of chip internal PCIIRQs A 7 31 ATI RS480 1 simnow gt rs780 usage Automation Command Description SetRev lt rev gt Sets the internal chip revision number of RS480 device to lt rev gt Displays the internal chip revision number SS of the RS480 device A 7 32 ATI Radeon HD 3870 1 simnow gt rv670 usage Automation Command Description Version Displays the binary revision of the ATI Radeon HD 3870 model LoadEDID DVIO DVI1 FileName Desc Loads EDID information Filename creates a user defined display device Desc and connects it to one of the specificed DVI connectors SetEDID DVIO DVI1 lt DeviceID gt
7. 200 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP JS rel8off 78 cb Jump if sign SF 1 v JS rell6off OF 88 cw Jump if sign SF 1 v JS rel320ff OF 88 cd Jump if sign SF 1 m JNS rel8off 79 cb Jump if not sign SF 0 m JNS rell6 off OF 89 cw Jump if not sign SF 0 v JNS rel32off OF 89 cd Jump if not sign SF 0 v JP rel8off 7A cb Jump if parity PF 1 m JP rell6off OF 8A cw Jump if parity PF 1 m JP rel32off OF 8A cd Jump if parity PF 1 v JPE rel8off 7A cb Jump if parity even PF 1 v JPE rell 6off OF 8A cw Jump if parity even PF 1 m JPE rel32off OF 8A cd Jump if parity even PF 1 v JNP rel8off 7B cb Jump if not parity PF 0 mi JNP rell6off OF 8B cw Jump if not parity PF 0 A JNP rel32off OF 8B cd Jump if not parity PF 0 v JPO rel8off 7B cb Jump if parity odd PF 0 m JPO reli 6off OF 8B cw Jump if parity odd PF 0 v JPO rel320off OF 8B cd Jump if parity odd PF 0 v JL rel8off 7C cb Jump if less SF OF v JL rell6off OF 8C cw Jump if less SF lt gt OF m JL rel32off OF 8C cd Jump if less SF lt gt OF m JNGE rel8off JC cb ns if not greater or equal SF v JNGE rell6off OF 8C cw Ge if not greater or equal SF lt gt v JNGE
8. 206 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction him Mnemonic Opcode Description PP POP DS iF Pop the top of the stack into the DS v register POP ES 07 Pop the top of the stack into the ES v register Pop the top of the stack into the SS BOE SS E register v Pop the top of the stack into the FS POP FS OF Al register e POP GS OF A9 Pop the top of the stack into the GS v register Pop the DI SI BP SP BX DX CX POEA ida and AX registers v Pop the EDI ESI EBP ESP EBX EDX ESEAD im ECX and EAX registers v E Pop a word from the stack into the POP 9D FLAGS register v Pop a doubleword from the stack into POEED 2b the EFLAGS register v 5 Pop a quadword from the stack into PORES zB the RFLAGS register v E o Prefetch processor cache line into Ll PREFETCH mem8 OF OD 0 EE ei e Prefetch processor cache line into Ll ERE EE THM memo OF 0D 1 data cache and mark it modified v a 7 Move data closer to the processor ee meme OE 18 9 using the NTA reference v o Move data closer to the processor PREFETCHTO meme eae using the TO reference v m Move data closer to the processor ge HTI MOME UI De qe using the T1 reference v o Move data closer to the processor Rees MEME E using the T2 reference v Push the contents of a 16 bit PUSH reg mem16
9. 104 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Differences from Real Hardware Clock sensitive functionality like setting bus speeds is not supported The HyperTransport bus protocol is not simulated Chapter 7 Device Configuration 105 User Manual November 2010 7 18 Raid Device Compaq SmartArray 5304 The RAID device uses disk images which are accessed as simulated volumes by the RAID controller Storage devices like ATA HDD and RAID are implemented with concepts like disk block cache journaling file and memory stores This page describes journaling in more detail A simulated volume in the RAID device is represented by an image file and one or more optional journals The combination of an image and zero or more optional journals is used to hold the contents of a simulated volume While creating a volume assign a disk image file to it e g raid image 0 imagefilename One or more additional journals can be added to the image file The image file uses a data block to store the data and the journal files use sparse indexing to hold just the blocks that have been changed Not only does journaling provide an efficient way to access the data blocks in the simulated volume but it also gives the user the flexibility to change the data block size Journals can be created either in memory or as file depending on the use of addjournal command RAID device supports multi level journaling i e
10. Figure 9 1 Message Log The left hand window lists all of the currently loaded modules The user may individually enable or disable logging from a given module by using the checkbox next to the module s name In addition the user may configure module specific logging options by double clicking on the module name The top right window contains three checkboxes which allow the user to control whether messages are displayed in the log window written to a file or logged to the AMD SimNow console The bottom right window is used to display the informational message if the Log to Window option is selected To open the log file the first time a simulation is started check the Log To File box is checked The log file will remain open until one of the following events occurs e The BSD is closed or the simulator program terminates e The simulation is stared with the Log To File box unchecked e The simulation is started with a new log file name specified 144 Chapter 9 Logging User Manual November 2010 9 2 Error Log The simulator provides an interface that loaded modules may use to report critical errors or unexpected conditions The messages are always written to a file and the most recent messages may be displayed in a window The error log may not be disabled The most recent error log entries may be viewed by selecting the View Error Log entry from the Main Window menu shown in Figure 9 2 The error log fil
11. DEC reg mem8 1 Decrement the contents of an 8 bit register or memory location by 1 DEC reg mem16 1 Decrement the contents of a 16 bit register or memory location by 1 DEC reg mem32 1 Decrement the contents of a 32 bit register or memory location by 1 DEC reg mem64 1 Decrement the contents of a 64 bit register or memory location by 1 DEC regl6 TIW Decrement the contents of a 16 bit register by 1 DEC reg32 48 rd Decrement the contents of a 32 bit register by 1 DIV reg mem8 F6 6 Perform unsigned division of AX by the contents of an 8 bit register or memory location and store the quotient in AL and the remainder in AH q VV VCs DIV reg mem16 F7 6 Perform unsigned division of DX AX by the contents of a 16 bit register or memory location and store the quotient in AX and the remainder in DX amp Appendix A 197 User Manual November 2010 Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description Ups Perform unsigned division of EDX EAX by the contents of a 32 bit register DIV reg mem32 F7 6 or memory location and store the ei quotient in EAX and the remainder in EDX Perform unsigned division of RDX RAX by the contents of a 64 bit register DIV reg mem64 F7 6 or memory location and store the e quotient in RA
12. Syntax El E lt DeviceName gt Example disktool e dev hdO This command writes zeros to all sectors on device dev hdo Option N Create a new blank image file that represents a freshly formatted device Syntax NI N lt ImageName gt lt ImageSize gt Example disktool n image hdd 102400 This command creates an image file named image hdd that represents a physical hard disk drive containing 102400 sectors each sector is 512 bytes 13 2 GUI Mode The DiskTool GUI window is shown in Figure 13 2 DiskTool will only display floppy drives and DVD CD and HDD drives that are connected to either the primary or the secondary IDE controller It will not display external USB or firewire drives drives attached to SCSI controllers etc DiskTool displays the names of these devices in the Physical Drives list box using names appropriate for the host operating system When running under Windows the Physical Drives list box will show you the physical drives and in parenthesis the logical drive letters that are associated with the partitions on that drive Selecting any of these physical devices causes DiskTool to display information about that device in the lower Drive Information list box DiskTool also displays information about all identified devices in a shell window The DiskTool shell window is shown in Figure 13 1 164 Chapter 13 DiskTool User Manual November 2010 c C simnow disktool exe Disk
13. gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMO6 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMO7 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMOS Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 j Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMO9 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMM10 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMM11 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMM12 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMM13 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMM14 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMM15 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010010 Data 0000000000160601 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010015 Data 000000000A000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010016 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010017 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010018 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010019 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC001001A Data 0
14. ENEE 9 UN MEE ER 10 3 2 2 Workspace Popup E Eu EE 10 3 22 1 ENEE 10 3 2 2 2 S eeler 12 9 2 2 3 Disconnect Device soi it Be a qtu iibi udi 12 92 24 Ueleg ee eg 12 3 2 3 Example Computer Description essi tne ede Ren sees eo lere 12 3 2 4 Device Window Quick Reference cc ccccccsessccecececeeeesenseaeceeeeeesenenens 14 3 3 eeh 15 3 KEE 15 3 3 2 Concept IDIAST E 16 3 3 3 Working with Device Groups 3 5 d acea eeh 17 3 3 4 Shell Automation Commands for Device Groups ssssssssssssessesssessseeeeseee 18 Boal Device WRC sss ooo oeste tiq tn santas lame dank ay 18 3 3 4 2 Enabled vs Disabled vs Mixed see 19 3 5 9 Device Crroup BXAImples erit oat cei kie ehe EP e i aE itoi 20 3 3 5 1 Example 1GB DDR2 memory sese 20 3 3 5 2 Example Quad Core Node sees 21 3 3 5 3 Example SuperlO device serere 23 3 3 6 Creating a Device Group ED isses ettet sa e edd 23 3 3 7 Creating a Device Group Automation Commande 26 3 3 8 Ungrouping a created device group EE 27 S ETE RAT aTe ON iso eege E TEE 28 3 4 1 SimStats and Diagnostic Porte 28 3 42 CPU Statistics Graphs sr eSI ERR ae EEN NT EDEN SUR RH SER OUS 20 9412 1 Translation RE BEE 29 3 4 2 2 Heal MIPS GUIapli uude e rage eoa e p etie en aes 29 3 1 2 3 invalidation Rate Graph NEE 30 3 4 2 4 Exception Rate Graph yj cities tieniti rent edd gers b peene iens 30 9 1 2 5 PIG Rate ET
15. IR mm IR ETD CF IRE F Pu H Description Return from interrupt The simulator does not support nested task switching using the rFLAGS nested task bit NT and the TSS back link field An interrupt return IRET to the previous task nested task will result in a FeatureNotImplemented exception and the simulation will be stopped Appendix A 221 User Manual November 2010 A 6 4 Virtualization Instruction Reference For more information on Virtualization Technology see AMD Publication 33047 AMD64 Virtualization Technology Instruction SE SEN Mnemonic Opcode Description CLGI OF 01 DD Clear Global Interrupt Flag m Invalidates the TLB mapping for the INVLPGA OF 01 DF virtual page specified in rAX and the n d ASID specified in ECX MOV reg32 CR8 FO 20 r i notation for move from CR8 to A MOV reg64 CR8 FO 20 r eem notation for move register to v MOV CR8 reg32 F0 22 r Rd notation for move from CR8 to v MOV CR8 reg64 F0 22 r nu ues notation for move register to sf SKINIT OF 01 DE Sn uu E and jump with o d STGI OF 01 DC Set Global Interrupt Flag m VMLOAD OF 01 DA Load State from VMCB mv VMCALL OF 01 D9 Call VMM m VMRUN OF 01 D8 Run Virtual Machine m VMSAVE OF 01 DB Save State to VMCB v A 6 5 64 Bit Media Instruction Reference These instructions described in this section operate on data located i
16. Memory Dump Command Examples If the user omits the G or the H specifier the debugger will access memory from the perspective of the attatched CPU s current state 10 1 6 Reading PCI Configuration Registers 1 Stop the simulation as described in Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on page 7 2 Open the Debugger Window View Show Debugger or click on gt The simulation will pause and the Debugger Window will appear 3 Use the debugger s S command to view the PCI configuration register contents for a particular PCI function The S command takes three hex parameters bus device function If the specified bus device and function exist in the simulated system the debugger will display all 256 bytes of configuration data 10 1 7 Reading CPU MSR Contents 1 Stop the simulation as described in Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on pags 7 2 Open the Debugger Window View Show Debugger or click on gt The simulation will pause and the Debugger Window will appear 3 Use the debugger s R command to view the contents of an MSR This can be accomplished by typing R Maddress on the debugger command line In this case address is the 32 bit address in hex of the MSR All leading zeros must be typed in the address Examples of MSR reads are shown in Table 10 4 Command Description R M00000250 Displays the contents of the MSR with an address of 0x0250 Displays the contents of the MSR with an address of 1001 S
17. Use the serial ports SetCommPort command to set the simulated serial port to use a specific COM port For example to set the second serial port in the simulation to use COMA for its communication you would type Serial 1 SetCommPort COM4 57600 The simulator will program the appropriate COM port COM4 in the above example to 57600 baud 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit no flow control All characters transmitted by the simulation through the serial port second serial port in the above example will be sent out to the given COM port COM4 in the above example In the same manner all data received by the simulator through the given COM port COMA in the above example will appear as received data in the simulated COM port To set the simulated serial port COMI to use a named pipe you would type Serial 1 SetCommPort pipe The simulator will program the appropriate COM port COMI in the above example to use the named pipe pipe SimNow Com on the host to transfer data between host and the simulated machine Chapter 11 Debug Interface 157 User Manual November 2010 The pipe is not created until the first go command will be executed This can be achieved by clicking on the go button followed by a click on the stop button This command sequence will setup the named pipe If you try to connect the kernel debugger without setting up the named pipe as described the kernel debugger will return an error me
18. User Manual November 2010 xiv Figures User Manual November 2010 1 Overview The AMD SimNow simulator is an AMD64 technology compatible x86 platform simulator for AMD s family of processors It is designed to provide an accurate model of a computer system from the program OS and programmer s point of view It allows fast simulation of an entire computer system plus standard debugging features such as break pointing memory viewing and single stepping The simulator allows such work as BIOS and OS development memory parameter tuning and multi processor system simulation Section 2 1 System Requirements on page 3 describes supported host Operating Systems Section A 3 Supported Guest Operating Systems on page 186 describes supported guest Operating Systems The simulator has between a 10 1 and 100 1 slowdown rate from the host CPU depending on whether the workload is in the CPU core or accessing simulated devices intensively The simulator is designed to create an accurate model of a system from the program s view Device models contain all the program visible state but the actual functionality is abstracted In many cases only the functionality needed to satisfy the software is implemented Software may be run on the simulator in an unmodified form This includes BIOS drivers O S and applications The simulator has a concept of time but it is not a cycle accurate simulator The basic timing mechani
19. 80x25 Text 720x400 2 m 0x0D VGA Multi plane 4 bpp 320x200 16 r4 0x0E VGA Multi plane 4 bpp 640x200 16 w OxOF VGA Multi plane 1 bpp 640x350 2 r4 0x10 VGA Multi plane 4 bpp 640x350 16 f 0x11 VGA Multi plane 1 bpp 640x480 2 f 0x12 VGA Multi plane 4 bpp 640x480 16 f 0x13 VGA Packed pixel 8 bpp 320x200 256 f 72 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Mode Number Type Organization Resolution No of colors Supported 0x0108 VGA 80x60 Text 640x480 16 X 0x0109 VGA 132x25 Text 1056x400 16 X 0x010A VGA 132x43 Text 1056x350 16 v 0x010B VGA 132x50 Text 1056x400 16 X 0x010C VGA 132x60 Text 1056x480 16 Xx 0x0100 SVGA Packed pixel 8 bpp 640x400 256 f 0x0101 SVGA Packed pixel 8 bpp 640x480 256 f 0x0110 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 640x480 32K w 0x0111 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 640x480 64K r4 0x0112 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 640x480 16M e4 0x0102 SVGA Multi plane 4 bpp 800x600 16 X 0x0103 SVGA Packed pixel 8 bpp 800x600 256 f 0x0113 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 800x600 32K 74 0x0114 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 800x600 64K f 0x0115 SVGA Packed pixel 32 bpp 800x600 16M f 0x0105 SVGA Packed pixel 8 bpp 1024x768 256 A 0x0116 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 1024x768 32K f 0x0117 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 1024x768 64K v 0x0118 SVGA Packed pixel 32 bpp 1024x768 1
20. D Emerald Graphics 9 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging YGA SubDevice Framebuffer and Ac BIOS File Images emerald v0 3 rom LJ VGA Enabled Figure 7 7 Graphics Device VGA Sub Device Properties Dialog In Figure 7 7 the BIOS File option enables you to load different VGA BIOS ROMs into the device The VGA ROM is assumed to be a maximum of 32 Kbytes and is assigned to ISA bus address 0x000C0000 0x000C7FFF which is the industry standard location This file must be a standard binary file with the correct header and checksum information already incorporated The VGA enabled checkbox enables or disables the VGA registers If it is not checked the VGA registers are not updated and the display window will not display from the VGA frame buffer Frame Buffer Sub Device Configuration In Figure 7 8 the Frame Buffer Size Mbytes sets the size of the frame buffer in megabytes The value placed in this option is only read at reset The frame buffer size can not be dynamically modified The Accelerator Enabled checkbox enables or disables the graphics accelerator The accelerator is enabled by default The VESA BIOS Extensions Enabled checkbox enables or disables the VESA BIOS support The VESA BIOS Extensions are enabled by default 64 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 D Emerald Graphics 9 Properties ons l OLogging YGA SubDevice Framebuffer and Accelerator lt IMPORTANT
21. Emerald Graphics allocate map memory BSD Load completed Figure 15 1 Console Window The automation commands are sent to a specific device by starting the command with the name of the device followed by a period For example to send the Modules command to the shell device you would use 1 simnow gt shell modules If more than one device exists in the currently loaded BSD for example most BSDs include two IDE controllers you identify the specific device by following the device name with a colon and then the number of the device you are interested in For example to send the DVDROMStatus command to the second IDE controller you would use 1 simnow ide 1 DVDROMStatus O0 Omitting the colon and the device number causes the simulator to assume device 0 The following two commands are equivalent 226 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 1 simnow gt ide 0 DVDROMStatus 0 1 simnow gt ide DVDROMStatus 0 In addition to the commands supported by the various devices detailed below all devices support the usage and ausage command These commands return a brief description of each of the commands supported by a specific device For example to get a non alphabetic ordered list of the commands supported by the shell you could send the command 1 simnow gt shell usage To get an alphabetic ordered list of the commands supported by the shell please use the ausage command as shown here 1 simnow gt shell ausag
22. Sets EDID lt DeviceID gt and connects it to one of the specified DVI connectors GetEDID DVIO DVI1 Lists all display devices on specified DVI connector DelEDID DVI DVI1 lt DeviceID gt Deletes previously imported user defined display device lt DeviceID gt from specified DVI connector TCache 011 Disables 0 or enables 1 texture cache VCache 011 Disables 0 or enables 1 vertex cache Lt 011 Disables 0 or enables 1 linear transform and color space conversion engine 252 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description Settings Displays enabled and disabled settings DumpVGA lt FileName gt Dumps frame buffer contents to file lt FileName gt A 7 33 ATI RS780 1 simnow rs780 usage Automation Command Description SetRev rev Sets the internal chip revision number of RS780 device to rev GetRev Displays the internal chip revision number of the RS780 device Version Displays the binary revision of the RS780 model A 7 34 ATI RD790 RD780 RX780 1 simnow rd790 usage Automation Command Description SetRev rev Sets the internal chip revision number of RD790 device to rev GetRev Displays the internal chip revision number of the RD790 device Version Displays the binary revision of the RD790 model SetPackageType lt RD790
23. Show Devices or clicking on the a button In this window you can create a simulated computer and modify its properties BIOS images memory characteristics and attached components This section describes the main components of the Device Window and shows how to build up and configure a simulated computer It explains the interface using some of the most often used simulation components Please also see the walkthrough of building a single processor system in Section 6 Create a Simulated Computer on page 49 Represents Message Routing D SimNow Device Window Drag Icons to insert new devices CI Show Deprecated Devices Debugger wn AT24C Device EL Processor Dimm Bank EH Inte Pro 1000 MT Desktop Network Adapter ol Emerald Graphics USB usg JumpDrive m Memory Device wm PCA9548 Device o PCI Bus bu AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge SMB Hub Device SMR ar Winbond W83627HF SIO computer systerMewoddfisndd As a collection of device models that c amp ndgmWnoibstecwith each other by exchanging messages The icons in the workspace represent device models the lines connecting the icons represent message routing You can set up and alter the simulated computer system by using the workspace popup menu shown in Figure 3 3 SIO 5 Memory Device 4 SR USB JumpDrive 15 Device Window AweSimProcessor PCI Bus 10 Controfer 9 PCI Bus 11 PCI Bus 7 Intel R Pro 1000 MT Deskt
24. for a created volume the user can add multiple journals however one cannot add a journal after an in memory journal Conceptually the disk image is equivalent to the image and fixed journal pair Journals grow in size as the volumes associated with them are accessed writes of data blocks which haven t been written before File based journals are preferred over in memory Journaling if a large number of writes are going to be made to the simulated volume The journal architecture is index based consisting of super blocks index blocks and data blocks This provides a hierarchical indexing mechanism in which data blocks are accessed by their LBA logical block address Several performance mechanisms are implemented in the RAID device including Disk Block Cache and Last Sector Hit which can be viewed at any time using the raid status v command AMD tested the RAID device both on SUSE Linux 64 and a 32 bit version of Windows 2003 Enterprise Server using stock drivers to drive this model This model emulates devices at the volume level so that the files used to represent the data correspond to logical volumes not disks This model associates one logical volume with one image file The model does not represent the timing of any real system because data becomes available almost immediately 106 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 19SMB Hub Device The SMB hub device is used to connect
25. i Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description AAA 37 Create an unpacked BCD number m AAD D5 Adjust two BCD digits in AL and AH v AAM D4 oe of unpacked BCD values d mas sr QN NY PED EN ADC AL imm8 14 ib Add imm8 to AL CF A ADC AL imm16 14 iw Add imm16 to AX CF v ADC EAX imm32 15 id Add imm32 to EAX CF ei ADC RAX imm32 15 id Add sign ext imm32 to RAX CF A ADC reg mem8 imm8 80 2 ib Add imm8 to reg mem8 CF A ADC reg mem16 imm16 81 2 iw Add imm16 to reg mem16 CF A ADC reg mem32 imm32 81 2 id Add imm32 to reg mem32 CF m ADC reg mem64 imm32 81 2 id EN Sages AMMI GG egy memes cm Ff ADC reg memi imm8 83 2 ib Add sign ext imm8 to reg memi6 CF v ADC reg mem32 imm8 83 2 ib Add sign ext imm8 to reg mem32 CF v ADC reg mem 4 imm8 83 2 ib Add sign ext imm8 to reg mem 4 CF mv ADC reg mem8 reg8 LO Ze Add reg8 to reg mem8 CF v ADC reg memi6 regi6 D Ze Add regl16 to reg mem16 CF v ADC reg mem32 reg32 Ligue Add reg32 to reg mem32 CF v ADC reg mem 4 reg 4 H e Add reg64 to reg mem 4 CF m ADC reg8 reg mem8 12 gt fe Add reg mem8 to reg8 CF v ADC regl 6 reg memi6 13 Ze Add reg mem16 to regl6 CF v ADC reg32 reg mem32 13 Ze Add reg mem32 to reg32 CF m ADC reg 64 reg mem 4 13 Ze Add reg mem64 to reg64 CF m ADD AL imm8 04 ib Add imm8 to AL v ADD AX imm16 05 iw Add imm16 to AX A ADD EAX imm32 05 id ADD imm32 to EAX v ADD RAX imm64 05 id ADD imm64 to RAX
26. lt HostPathName gt Exports a directory from the jump drive to the host system The image path name ImagePathName can contain wildcards in the last element If the last element of the ImagePathName does not contain wildcards and points to a directory then is assumed The host path name HostPathName must be the name of a directory If it does not exist it will be created Dir lt ImagePathName gt Shows the contents of the directory path given by lt magePathName gt 248 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description Shows the amount of free space on the JumpDrive device This command is identical to the Initialize command only it does not create a FAT32 partition on the drive It simply sets the Size Size in MB physical size of the device Any formatting or initialization will still need to be done presumably by the simulated operating system Free To initialize the JumpDrive and copy data to it 1 simnow jumpdrive initialize 64 This creates a 64 Mbyte FAT32 partition on the JumpDrive The following example copies the file C test bin to the JumpDrive and places it in the tmp directory If the tmp directory does not exits on the JumpDrive it is created automatically 1 simnow gt jumpdrive importfile c test bin tmp test bin 62 99 Mbytes Available 1 simnow gt This copies all files from C Xmp into the root of the JumpD
27. 2048x1536 8M 8M 16M 16M 16M 16M 32M 16M 32M 32M Table 7 5 Supported Resolutions in Power Graphics Mode Chapter 7 Device Configuration 73 User Manual November 2010 Supported Guest Operating Systems Table 7 6 shows all operating systems which are tested and known to work with the Matrox G400 graphics device model Guest Operating System Device Driver Version Known Issues MS DOS N A No known issues Windows 2000 5 93 009 No known issues Windows XP 32 bit 64 bit 5 93 009 1 11 00 114SE No known issues Windows Server 2003 32 bit 64 bit 5 93 009 1 11 00 114SE No known issues Windows Vista 32 bit 64 bit N A VESA only No known issues Linux 32 bit 64 bit RedHat SuSE SuSE Xen Standard MGA Driver No known issues Solaris 10 for AMD64 XF86 MGA Solaris No known issues Table 7 6 Supported Guest Operating Systems Improve Graphics Performance When you run Windows in simulation and you open a menu list box tool tips or other screen element the object may open slowly To disable this option use the following steps 1 Click Start point to Settings and then click Control Panel Double click Display 3 Click Effects clear the Use the following transition effects for menus and tool tips check box click ok and then close Control Panel Or 1 Right click on My Computer and select Properties 2 Click on Advanced Performance and
28. 4 SHL reg mem64 imm8 ee ee specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a signed 8 bit register or SAR reg mem8 1 E memory operand right 1 bit v Shift a signed 8 bit register or SAR reg mem8 CL D2 7 memory operand right the number of ei bits specified in the CL register Shift a signed 8 bit register or memory location right the number of SAR reg mem8 imm8 ER PT a bits specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a signed 16 bit register or SAR Seca at md memory operand right 1 bit v Shift a signed 16 bit register or SAR reg mem16 CL D3 memory operand right the number of ei bits specified in the CL register Shift a signed 16 bit register or memory location right the number of SAR reg mem16 imm8 C1 7 ib bits specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a signed 32 bit register or SAR reg mem32 1 DEI memory location right 1 bit v Shift a signed 32 bit register or SAR reg mem32 CL D3 7 memory operand right the number of n d bits specified in the CL register Shift a signed 32 bit register or i j memory operand right the number of BAR reg mem32 imm8 CD bits specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a signed 64 bit register or SAR reg mem64 1 m memory operand left 1 bit v Shift a signed 64 bit register or SAR reg mem 4 CL D3 7 memory operand right the number of e bits specified in the CL register Shift a signed 64 bit register or j memory operand right the number of SAR reg mem64 imm8 EE bits specifi
29. CPU Item R12 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item R13 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item R14 Data 0000000000000000 gt Chapter 7 Device Configuration 119 User Manual November 2010 Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item R15 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item ModeFlags Data 00000001 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item EFlags Data 0000000000000002 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item ES Data 00000023 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item ESBase Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item ESLimit Data 00000000FFFFFFFF gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item ESFlags Data 00000CF3 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CS Data 00000008 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CSBase Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CSLimit Data 00000000FFFFFFFF gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CSFlags Data 00000C9B gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item SS Data 00000010 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item SSBase Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item SSLimit Data 00000000FFFFFFFF gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item SSFlags Data 00000C93 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DS Data 00000023 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DSB
30. Displays the values set by using the automation command tune A 7 29 XTR 1 simnow gt xtrnb usage Automation Command Description xtrfile lt filename xml gt Sets XTR XML file to use during playback debug 0l1 Enables 1 or Disables 0 extended debug information for XTR Playback xtrlogfile lt filename log gt Sets name of the log file where XTR messages should be logged This is optional and if not used the log is directed to the simulators log status Displays the status of XTR playback 1 simnow gt xtrsvc usage Automation Command Description xtrenable lt 0 1 gt Enables 1 or Disables 0 XTR Record All other values are invalid xtrfile lt filename xml gt Sets the XTR XML file for XTR Record XTRMemBits n Sets number of bits for memory address bits to scan n 16 32 or 48 Default is 32 Xtrstatus Displays the status of XTR Record A 7 30 ATI SB400 SB600 SB700 SB800 1 simnow gt sb600 usage Automation Command Description HtInterrupts 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 HyperTransport interrupts Returns enabled if HyperTransport interrupts are HtIntStatus enabled otherwise it returns disabled IoLog 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 IO logging IoLogStatus Returns enabled if IO Logging is enabled otherwise it Appendix A 251 User Manual November 2010 returns disabled
31. FF 0 ncrement the contents of a 16 bit register or memory location by 1 NC reg mem32 FF 0 ncrement the contents of a 32 bit register or memory location by 1 NC reg mem64 FF 0 ncrement the contents of a 64 bit register or memory location by 1 NC regl6 40 TIW ncrement the contents of a 16 bit register by 1 NC reg32 40 rd ncrement the contents of a 32 bit register by 1 NS mem8 DX 6C nput a byte from the port specified by DX put it into the memory location specified in ES rDI and then increment or decrement rDI INS meml16 DX 6D nput a word from the port specified by DX put it into the memory location specified in ES rDI and then increment or decrement CDI INS mem32 DX 6D nput a doubleword from the port specified by DX put it into the memory location specified in ES rDI and then increment or decrement CDI INSB 6C nput a byte from the port specified by DX put it into the memory location specified in ES rDI and then increment or decrement rDI INSW 6D nput a word from the port specified by DX put it into the memory location specified in ES rDI and then increment or decrement CDI INSD 6D nput a doubleword from the port specified by DX put it into the memory location specified in ES rDI and then increment or decrement CDI INT imm8 CD ib Calls interrupt service routine
32. Loads a 16 bit general purpose register with LSL regl6 reg mem16 OF 03 r the segment limit or a selector specified in Af a 16 bit memory or register operand Loads a 32 bit general purpose register with LSL reg32 reg mem16 OF 03 r the segment limit or a selector specified in ei a 16 bit memory or register operand Loads a 64 bit general purpose register with LSL reg64 reg mem16 OF 03 r the segment limit or a selector specified in e a_16 bit memory or register operand Load the 16 bit segment selector into the LTR reg mem16 OF 00 3 task register and load the TSS descriptor ei from the GDT MOV CRn reg32 OF 22 r dd the contents of a 32 bit register to v MOV CRn reg 4 OF 22 r Se the contents of a 64 bit register to v MOV reg32 CRn OF 20 r Move the contents of CRn to a 32 bit v register e Move the contents of CRn to a 64 bit MOV reg64 CRn OF 20 r register Af E Move the contents of a 32 bit register to MOV DRn reg32 OF 21 r DRn e MOV DRn reg 4 OF 21 r p iin the contents of a 64 bit register to v MOV reg32 DRn OF 23 r Move the contents of DRn to a 32 bit v register MOV reg64 DRn OF 23 r Move the contents of DRn to a 64 bit v register RDMSR OF 32 Copy MSR specified by ECX into EDX EAX v o Copy the performance monitor counter ROI mn specified by ECX into EDX EAX v RDTSC OF 31 Copy the time stamp counter into EDX EAX ef RSM OF AA Resume operation of an interrupted program v SGDT mem16 32 OF 01 0 Store global descriptor
33. MEMfpdis Enabled GETMEMPTR Disabled Fastpath device all i m Enables the IO i or MEM m fastpath for the given device or all devices GetFastpath device all i m Returns enabled or disabled depending on if fastpath is enabled or disabled for the given device or all devices The i option returns the IO fastpath status The m option returns the MEM fastpath status SetVGAQuantum time Sets the quantum value for the VGA signature mechanism If the VGA signature matches with any of the preset golden VGA signatures the simulation stops GetVGAQuantum Returns the quantum value for the VGA signature mechanism GenerateV GASignature index Returns the VGA signature for the present screenshot It is an MD5 sum generated from the contes of the present screen SetGoldenVGASignature index Sets golden signature s needed for comparision by the VGA signature mechanism EnableVGASignature lt 0 1 gt Enables 1 or disables 0 the VGA signature mechansim SetSyncQuantum lt time nanoseconds gt Applies the MP Quantum lt time gt across all machines see also SetMPQuantum GetSyncQuantum Returns the MP Quantum value in nanoseconds set via SetSyncQuantum see also GetMPQuantum A 7 2 IDE 1 simnow gt ide usage Automation Command Description Image masterlslavel0l1 filename Creates a volume f
34. November 2010 User Manual X Recording eie etre 113 XTR emaan TD TRO 112 Sr EE SE NEE TES PAAA a Seri E A SS i 257 Index
35. Shift an 8 bit register or memory SHL reg mem CL D2 4 location left the number of bits Af specified in the CL register Shift an 8 bit register or memory location left the number of bits 4 SHL Re nem imme Qu ge S specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 16 bit register or memory 4 SHU EE md location left 1 bit v Shift a 16 bit register or memory SHL reg mem16 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits n d Specified in the CL register 210 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Ghi Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Shift a 16 bit register or memory e location left the number of bits 4 SHL reg mem16 imm8 Rife ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 32 bit register or memory 4 BHL re g mem32 1 Dic location left 1 bit v Shift a 32 bit register or memory SHL reg mem32 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits e specified in the CL register Shift a 32 bit register or memory location left the number of bits L 4 es i i SHL reg mem32 imm8 EEN specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 64 bit register or memory L 4 SHL reg mem64 1 DL location left 1 bit v Shift a 64 bit register or memory SHL reg mem64 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits ei specified in the CL register Shift a 64 bit register or memory location left the number of bits
36. and rDI Move byte at DS rSI to ES rDI and MOVSB A4 then increment or decrement rSI and Af CDI Move word at DS rSI to ES rDI and MOVSW AS then increment or decrement rSI and ei CDI Move doubleword at DS rSI to ES rDI MOVSD AS and then increment or decrement rSI e and CDI Move quadword at DS rSI to ES rDI MOVSQ A5 and then increment or decrement rSI ef and CDI Move the contents of an 8 bit MOVSX regl6 reg mem8 OF BE r register or memory location to a 16 v bit register with sign extension Move the contents of an 8 bit MOVSX reg32 reg mem8 OF BE r register or memory location to a 32 d bit register with sign extension Move the contents of an 8 bit MOVSX reg 4 reg mem8 OF BE r register or memory location to a 64 e bit register with sign extension Move the contents of a 16 bit v v v 63 Move the contents of a 32 bit E register or memory operand to a 64 bit register with sign extension 204 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction S ted Mnemonic Opcode Description uds Move the contents of an 8 bit MOVZX regl6 reg mem8 OF B6 r register or memory operand to a 16 e bit register with zero extension Move the contents of an 8 bit MOVZX reg32 reg mem8 OF B6 r register or memory operand to a 32 e bit register with zero extension Move the co
37. configuration registers of the selected device To modify a certain byte of a PCI configuration register click on the desired hex value and enter a new hex value To apply the changes click on the Apply Register Modifications button Chapter 8 PCI Configuration Viewer 141 User Manual November 2010 Read only bits cannot be modified using the PCI Config Viewer Modified values appear in red in the PCI configuration register list until you click on the Apply Register Modifications button or close the PCI Config Viewer dialog To change the byte view of the PCI configuration registers to a dword view check the DWORD PCI Access check box 142 Chapter 8 PCI Configuration Viewer User Manual November 2010 9 Logging The simulator provides support for three types of logging e A message log that can provide detailed text data from simulator devices and modules e An error log that provides text messages in response to critical errors or unexpected conditions e I O Logging that provides detailed information about PCI Configuration I O and Memory Space accesses 9 1 Message Log The simulator shell provides an interface that loaded modules devices and extensions may use to report status and events The messages may be displayed in a window written to a file or both The information log may be enabled and disabled on a module specific basis The informational log is controlled via the Message Log
38. r PHYSICALDRIVE1 DI Copy Disk Image To Host Disk PHYSICALDRIVE E Create Blank Disk Image Drive Information Erase Host Dis Floppy Disk A No disk present Figure 4 1 DiskTool Dialogue Window For information about supported options and modes that DiskTool supports please refer to Section 13 DiskTool on page 167 Figure 4 2 shows the DiskTool shell window cx C simnow disktool exe Disk Device found at SCSI Port Bus Target LUN Opening WDC WDi2G BB DAA1 as PHYSICALDRIVEG Cylinders 4589 Heads Secto Bytes Media Type 12 Completed Device has been successfully identified Disk Device found at SCSI Port Bus Target 1 LUN Opening WDC WD1i2G6 BB G DAA1 as PHYSICALDRIVE1 Cylinders 4589 Heads Secto Bytes Media Type 12 Completed Device has been successfully identified Disk Device found at SCSI Port 1 Bus Target 1 LUN Opening IC35L 2QAVER 7 as PHYSICALDRIVE2 Cylinders 561 Heads Secto Bytes Media Type 12 Completed Device has been successfully identified Figure 4 2 DiskTool Shell Window 34 Chapter 4 Disk Images User Manual November 2010 To create a blank disk image click on the Create Blank Disk Image button on the right side of the DiskTool dialog window see Figure 4 1 A Save As dialog will ask you for the location and image filename that will be created Choose the location where yo
39. specified by interrupt vector imm8 amp amp amp amp amp amp amp Appendix A 199 User Manual November 2010 E Instruction EE Mnemonic Opcode Description INTO CE GE ee META if the d JO rel8off 80 cb Jump if overflow OF 1 m JO relil 6off OF 80 cw Jump if overflow OF 1 m JO rel32off OF 80 cd Jump if overflow OF 1 ef JNO rel8off 71 ep Jump if not overflow OF 0 v JNO rell6off OF 81 cw Jump if not overflow OF 0 m JNO rel32off OF 81 cd Jump if not overflow OF 0 m JB rel8off 72 cb Jump if below CF 1 v JB rell6 off OF 82 cw Jump if below CF 1 m JB rel32off OF 82 cd Jump if below CF 1 m JC rel8off 72 ob Jump if carry CF 1 m JC rell 6off OF 82 cw Jump if carry CF 1 ei JC rel32off OF 82 cd Jump if carry CF 1 v JNAE rel8off 72 cb Jump if not above or equal CF m JNAE rell6off OF 82 cw Jump if not above or equal CF Af JNAE rel32off OF 82 cd Jump if not above or equal CF 1 m JNB rel8off 73 cb Jump if not below CF 0 v JNB rell6 off OF 83 cw Jump if not below CF 0 m JNB rel32off OF 83 cd Jump if not below CF 0 m JNC rel8off T3 Cb Jump if not carry CF 0 v JNC rell6off OF 83 cw Jump if not carry CF 0 v JNC rel32off OF 83 cd Jump if
40. the hard disk image in question 94 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Turning off journaling is recommended during the installation process for an operating system S AMD 8111 I O Hub 1 Properties ween VO Logging Logging Device Options Primary HDD Channel gt V Connectable Master Drive Image Filename Aen windows xp professional x64 hd me 7 DVD ROM Eject vn i een sm l C en_windows_xp _professional_x64 iso amass Figure 7 25 HDD Primary Channel Properties Dialog AMD 8111 Southbridge Device Options The AMD 8111 device has specific configuration requirements that relate to device option type and HyperTransport information The Default Base Unit ID is a way of telling the device of the strapping option for ID selection The Generate HT Messages for Interrupts selection specifies whether interrupts go out the HyperTransport port in a HyperTransport format or out the INT IOAPIC bus as a classic interrupt pin Chapter 7 Device Configuration 95 User Manual November 2010 D AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 4 Properties Connections 10 Logging Logging Device Options Primary HDD Chann gt Default Base Unit ID ID Do ID O1 HyperTransport Generate HyperTransport Messages for Interrupts Figure 7 26 Device Options Properties Dialog AMD 8111 chipset Log
41. 1 simnow gt The listmachines command lists all machines that currently exist 44 Chapter 5 Running the Simulator User Manual November 2010 Specifies current Machine ID d Mouse and Keyboard 2 6imnow gt listmachines inputs are enabled SC gui vga d d Mouse and keyboard d guuL wejei rel inputs are disabled 2 simnow gt VGA Window is enabled GUI is enabled console mode See also Section 5 1 Command Line Arguments on page 39 for further information regarding available command line arguments To exit a created simulated machine enter exit as shown in the following example 1 simnow exit 2 simnow gt This example exits the simulated machine Chapter 5 Running the Simulator 45 User Manual November 2010 This page is intentionally blank 46 Chapter 5 Running the Simulator User Manual November 2010 6 Create a Simulated Computer This section describes how to create a simulated computer from scratch We will build a computer identical to the solo bsd computer Figure 6 1 shows the layout of the existing solo bsd Device Window The device position is not important because the connections between devices are completely represented by the lines between devices Debugger 1 AweSim Processor Emerald Graphics Dimm Ban AMD 8th Generation 8151 AGP Integrated Tunnel 2 Northbridge 3 Sen Winbond W83627HF AMD 81 1 1 0 Hu
42. 16 bit destination register Reads the GDT LDT descriptor referenced by LAR reg32 reg meml6 OF 02 r the 16 bit source operand masks the v attributes with 00FFFF00h and saves the result in the 32 bit destination register In 64 bit mode this opcode 0x63 is used for the MOVSXD instruction See Section A 6 3 1 INT Interrupt to Vector on page 225 See Section A 6 3 2 IRET Return from Interrupt on page 225 Appendix A 219 User Manual November 2010 Instruction SupDoricd Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Reads the GDT LDT descriptor referenced by the 16 bit source operand masks the LAR reg 4 reg meml amp OF 02 r attributes with OOFFFFOOh and saves the v result in the 64 bit destination register S e Loads memi16 32 into the global descriptor LGDT meml6 32 0r 01 2 abie eer e i o Loads memi6 64 into the global descriptor LGDT mem16 64 or 01 2 INS register A LIDT memi6 32 OF 01 3 Loads meml6 32 into the interrupt descriptor v table register Loads memi16 64 into the interrupt descriptor LIDT meml6 64 Oe eee register ef Load the 16 bit segment selector into the LLDT reg memi6 OF 00 2 local descriptor table register and load the n d LDT descriptor from the GDT E Loads the lower 4 bits of the source into LMSW reg mem16 r 0l e the lower 4 bits of CRO v
43. 2010 1 simnow gt shell modules secre 8 0 shell 0 Cpu 0 sledgeldt 0 sledgenb 1 sledgenb 0 Cos 1L Cow 8 Z Cpu 3 sledgeldt 1 Cpu 4 Cpu 5 Ciel amp 6 Cous 7 Notice the sne11 modules list is flat but the devices are in a tree structure that allows us to have both a Machine 1 gt 4 core Node 0 gt AweSim Processor 0 and a gt Machine 1 gt 4 core Node 1 gt AweSim Processor 0 Also notice that our default view ignores the tree and just shows us two devices 4 core Node 0 and 4 core Node 41 3 3 4 2 Enabled vs Disabled vs Mixed Shell device commands like shell Location or shell AddDevice have generic meanings regardless of whether the device is a group or library But some are defined from an aggregation of the children For example shell GetFastPath can return Enabled Disabled or Mixed means some children are Enabled and some are Disabled 1 simnow shell GetLogIO 4 core Node 0 gt AweSim Processor 0 BOUE E Disabled TOR Disabled IOfpdis Enabled MEM Disabled 3 e T MEMfpdis Enabled GETMEMPTR Disabled 1 simnow gt shell GetLogIO 4 core Node 0 gt AweSim Processor 1 POTS Disabled TOS Disabled TOTPONSE Disabled MEM Disabled al ES MEMfpdis Disabled GETMEMPTR Disabled 25 In this example all other child devices of 4 core Node 0 are Disabled for all l
44. 2010 The data value e is always one byte two hex digits in width The device will log multiple messages for PCI configuration accesses that are greater than one byte in width For example a dword read of 0x11223344 from PCI configuration register 0x40 of device 7 function 1 on bus 0 would produce the following log messages PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 7 Function 1 Register 40 Data 44 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 7 Function 1 Register 41 Data 33 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 7 Function 1 Register 42 Data 22 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 7 Function 1 Register 43 Data 11 Differences from Real Hardware The Northbridge device differs from the real hardware in that the simulator does not support the debug hardware registers The device also does not support memory interleaving by node though this will change in the near future The device will differ in those things that are of a timing related nature such as setting of bus speeds Full probe transactions are not modeled Registers that deal with items outside of the testing of transfer protocols at the register level are not functional buffer count registers etc They are present and read write able but do not effect the simulation Chapter 7 Device Configuration 91 User Manual November 2010 7 12AMD 8111 Southbridge Devices IO Hubs The Southbridge devices provide the basic I O Southbridge functionality of the system Features include a PIO mode IDE
45. 229430 times CS D 0 LongBit 0 physical addr 00000000000e41de cmp 04f0h aah Jaz 095m This block s execution was the total since the last epoch physical addr 000000000002fd99 eip 00000000000041de 20 431234 percent of eip 000000000000fd99 000000000000 4d99 lodsb ds esi 000000000000 d9b add ah al 000000000000 d9d loop 04h 0000000000000020 This block s execution was 1 968632 percent of Executed 178599 times CS D 0 LongBit 0 00000000000074b2 00000000000074b5 0000000000007409 0000000000000040 physical addr 00000000000274b2 mov ax 5724h cmp ax 371ah jbe 61h This block s execution was 1 532475 percent of the total since the last epoch e1p 00000000000074b2 the total since the last epoch The simulator contains a code profiling facility that is accessed through the dumpprofile automation command There is no graphical user interface to the profiling facility at this time Profiling in the simulator has some limitations and features not present in most 240 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 systems The limitations are that no symbolic information is present in the output and that only execution since the beginning of the last epoch see the last paragraph for an explanation of an epoch is measured The feature which is most unusual is that the user can ask for a profile at any time there is no profiling mechanism that needs to be enabled before execution takes place Another
46. 8 Set the Init File to Images ASLAO00 3 BIN Check the boxes for Read Only System BIOS ROM Memory Address Masking Memory is non cacheable e Clear the boxes for Initialized unwritten memory Configure the PCI device e Goto its PCI Bus Configuration tab e For the PCI Slot 1 add device ID 4 set Base IRQ Pin to PCIIRQ A and check the Enable Slot box e For the next three devices use Device IDs 5 6 and 7 with PCIIRQs B C and D in that order Check their Enable Slot boxes as well Chapter 6 Create a Simulated Computer 49 User Manual November 2010 D PCI Bus 6 Properties MM PO Bus Conipaston a Device ID 0 31 Base IRQ Pin Enable Slot PCI Slot 1 4 PCIIRGA w s PCI Slot 2 PCIIROB w S PCI Slot 3 PCIIRG C s PCI Slot 4 PCIIRG D S PCI Slot 5 ao PCI Slot 6 0 Figure 6 3 PCI Bus Configuration dialog window 4 Configure the DIMM Memory device e Goto the Dimm 0 tab e Click Import SPD e Open the SPD file Images simnow_DDR_256M spd 5 Configure the AweSim CPU device e Goto the Processor Type tab e Choose the Ahtlon64 754_SH CO_ 800MHz id product file as shown in Figure 7 1 on page 56 6 4 Save and Run The created simulated computer is identical to the solo bsd computer You can close the Device Window and save the file from the File Save BSD or by clicking on the EI button All that remains is to set
47. A progress bar will inform you of the progress being made lil Blank Image den windows xp professional x54 hdd AAAA AAAA oz Cancel Figure 13 4 DiskTool Progress Window Chapter 13 DiskTool 167 User Manual November 2010 This page is intentionally blank 168 Chapter 13 DiskTool User Manual November 2010 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide This section provides you with instructions on how to perform common tasks within the simulation environment The tasks described in this section are likely to be of particular interest to BIOS developers However developers of other types of software will benefit as well especially from tasks like logging CPU cycles and using the debugger 14 1 Loading a BIOS Image 1 Move the BIOS ROM image into your Images directory 2 Use View Show Devices to show the Devices Window shown in Figure 3 2 on page 9 3 Right click on the system BIOS memory device icon in the Device Window and select the Configure Device option on the Workspace Popup Menu Figure 3 3 on page 10 4 Choose the Memory Configuration tab Enter the appropriate base address and size for your BIOS ROM 6 Browse for your BIOS ROM image file The browser will only show files that have a ROM or BIN filename extension 7 Select the read only option unless the BIOS code will modify its image within the device 8 For most BIOS ROM select the system BIOS ROM memory address ma
48. ATMEL which can be selected by the drop down below Selecting the Memory Address Masking option indicates that the address received by the memory device is masked by a bit mask with the same number of bits as the size of the memory device e g a 256 Kbyte ROM uses an 18 bit mask or it is masked by 0x003FFFF This enables the ROM to be remapped dynamically into different memory address ranges in conjunction with the aforementioned chip select Selecting the Jnitialized unwritten memory to hex option initializes otherwise not initialized memory with a separate field for specifying the byte to use for initialization Selecting the Memory is non cacheable option tells the system if the memory described by the device is non cacheable r S Memory Device 7 Properties am Connections L Logging Memory Configuration Base Address fff00000 32k Aligned in hex Size 32 32k Blocks in decimal Init File images MMKA03 9 ROM BS Read Only System BIOS ROM V Flash Mode Memory Address Masking Initialized unwritten memory to hex F Memory is non cacheable Figure 7 17 Memory Configuration Properties Dialog 84 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Difference from Real Hardware The memory device differs in that it is a generic memory model When configured as a BIOS ROM it does not contain flash specific information that a modern flash
49. Bit immediate imm16 Word 16 Bit immediate imm16 32 Word 16 bit or doubleword 32 bit immediate imm32 Doubleword 32 bit immediate imm32 64 Doubleword 32 bit or quadword 64 bit immediate imm64 Quadword 64 bit immediate mem An operand of unspecified size in memory mems Byte 8 bit operand in memory mem16 Word 16 bit operand in memory mem16 32 Word 16 bit or doubleword 32 bit operand in memory mem32 Doubleword 32 bit operand in memory mem32 48 Doubleword 32 bit or 48 bit operand in memory mem48 48 bit operand in memory mem64 Quadword 64 bit operand in memory mem16 16 Two sequential word 16 bit operands in memory mem16 32 A doubleword 32 bit operand followed by a word 16 bit operand in memory e mem32real Single precision 32 bit floating point operand in memory e mem32int Doubleword 32 bit integer operand in memory 188 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 e mem64real Double precision 64 bit floating point operand in memory e mem 4int Quadword 64 bit integer operand in memory e mem 0real Double extended precision 80 bit floating point operand in memory e mem 0dec 80 bit packed BCD operand in memory containing 18 4 bit BCD digits e mem2eny 16 bit x87 control word or x87 status word e meml4 28env 14 byte or 28 byte x87 environment The x87 environment consists of
50. CS operand with the contents of a 16 bit e register and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 32 bitE destination register or memory XOR reg mem32 reg32 31 7x operand with the contents of a 32 bit ef register and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 64 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem64 reg64 31 Ze operand with the contents of a 64 bit e register and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of an 8 bit destination register with the XOR reg8 reg mem8 32 7r contents of an 8 bit register or ei memory operand and store the result in the destination 218 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction S rted Mnemonic Opcode Description uus XOR the contents of a 16 bit destination register with the XOR regl6 reg mem16 33 7x contents of a 16 bit register ei memory operand and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 32 bit destination register with the XOR reg32 reg mem32 33 Ze contents of a 32 bit register Af memory operand and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 64 bit destination register with the XOR reg64 reg mem64 93 E contents of a 64 bit register Af in the destination memory operand and store the result Table 15 8 General Purpose Instruction Reference A 6 3 System Instructions This chapter describes the function mnemonic syntax and opcodes that the
51. Copy the value of the selected bit to BTR reg mem32 imm8 OF BA 6 ib the carry flag and then clear the e selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTR reg mem64 imm64 OF BA 6 ib the carry flag and then clear the e selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTS reg memi6 regi6 OF AB r the carry flag and then set the ei selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTS reg mem32 reg32 OF AB r the carry flag and then set the e selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTS reg mem64 reg64 OF AB r the carry flag and then set the ef selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTS reg mem16 imm8 OF BA 5 ib the carry flag and then set the v selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTS reg mem32 imm8 OF BA 5 ib the carry flag and then set the d selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTS reg mem64 imm8 OF BA 5 ib the carry flag and then set the d selected bit Near call with the target specified CADI EB TRUE BEN by a 16 bit relative displacement v Near call with the target specified Stet PEAR PP by a 32 bit relative displacement v CALL reg mem16 FF 2 Near call with the target specified v by reg meml6 Appendix A 193 User Manual November 2010 Instruction Mnemonic Opcode Description Supported Near call with the target specified
52. Data 00000030 Memory Device PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 7 Function 0 Register 43 ByteCount 01 Data 00000030 PCI Bus 0 SubDevAta 0 Winbond W83627HF SIO 0 Clear Window Save Window Contents PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus Device Function Register 6C ByteCount 04 Data 00000005 Register 70 ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 Register 74 ByteCount 04 Data 00000006 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S SE Figure 14 3 Message Log Window 14 6Logging CPU Cycles Setting up the simulator to log CPU cycles requires most of the steps detailed in Section 14 5 Logging PCI Configuration Cycles However in this case the messages from the CPU are captured The steps are 1 Open the Device Window View Show Devices Double click on the CPU device This will bring up the device Properties Window that will list available logging options Select the desired logging options Click OK to accept the configuration See Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 to obtain detailed information about CPU Logging options 2 Select View Log Window from the Main Window Menu This will bring up a Message Log dialog box s
53. FF 6 register or memory operand onto the Af stack Push the contents of a 32 bit PUSH reg mem32 FF 6 register or memory operand onto the e stack Push the contents of a 64 bit PUSH reg mem64 FF 6 register or memory operand onto the e stack Push the contents of a 16 bit ER SH register onto the stack v Push the contents of a 32 biE ee Ge register onto the stack v Push the contents of a 64 bit BUSH ERR SU sour register onto the stack v Push an 8 bit immediate value sign PUSH imm8 6A extended to 16 32 or 64 bits onto Af the stack Push a 16 bit immediate value onto PUSH imml 68 eg e Push the contents of a 32 biE RUSH mmaa a register onto the stack v Push the contents of a 64 bit FUSE sane 68 register onto the stack v PUSH CS OE Push the CS selector onto the stack m PUSH SS 16 Push the SS selector onto the stack v PUSH DS 1E Push the DS selector onto the stack A PUSH ES 06 Push the ES selector onto the stack A PUSH FS OF AO Push the FS selector onto the stack A PUSH GS OF A8 Push the GS selector onto the stack A PUSHF Sc Push the FLAGS word onto the stack m PUSHFD SC Push the EFLAGS word onto the stack v PUSHFO BC Push the RFLAGS word onto the stack ei Rotate the 9 bits consisting of the RCL reg mem8 1 DO 2 carry flag and an 8 bit register or Af memory location left 1 bit Rotate the 9 bits consisting of the carry flag and an 8 bit register or RCL reg mem8 CL Be memory location left the number of v bits sp
54. Floppy Display 82 500 096 master read D master read 465 read 4 545 535 master written D master written 165 written D slave read D slave read D slave written D slave written DMA PIO mode PIO PIO mode Figure 3 23 Primary Secondary and Floppy Displays When a disk is accessed in simulation the status information is updated Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 31 User Manual November 2010 3 4 5 Using Hard Drive DVD CD ROM and Floppy Images Section 4 on page 35 describes how to create disk images To use a disk image created by DiskTool go to the Main Window File Menu and choose one of the Set Image menu items This brings up an open file dialog Select your drive image and click on Ok Standard file extensions for disk images are shown in Table 3 3 Image Type File Extension Hard Drive Image hdd Floppy Drive Image fdd DVD CD ROM Image iso Generic Image img Table 3 3 Image Types After an image is selected any changes to the image are stored in journal form in the BSD file unless journaling is disabled in the Southbridge for hard drive images or SuperIO for floppy drive images device If journaling is disabled changes are stored to the image file see also Section 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Image on page 42 3 4 6 Help Problems and Bug Reports The simulator has HTML on line help and documentation with Help menu entries or buttons on the dialogs In t
55. HyperTransport CPU interface a PCIe interface and an A Link PCIe dowstream interface to the SouthBridge Depending on the part and the platform each device may have some number of available PCIe slots to connect with endpoint devices Interface These Northbridge devices provide an upstream HyperTransport interface for communication with the Host The Downstream link is a 2x or 4x PCIe link used for communication with a SouthBridge device Several PCIe slot interfaces are also available The number of slots varies by part and platform specifications Contents of a BSD The current state of all PCI configuration registers and any internal state variables are saved in the BSD Configuration Options No configuration options currently Log Messages No logging is provided other than the global options provided by each device See Section 9 3 I O Logging on page 148 for more information Difference from Real Hardware The ATI RS480 and ATI RS780 device models do not simulate their integrated graphics processors The RS780 model does not simulate the integrated HD Audio device 136 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 29 AMD Istanbul Device The AMD stnabul device is a 6 core processor node suitable for an L1 socket It emulates a planned product that derives from a revision of the AMD Family10h product line The device iteself is composed of 6 individual AweSim Processor Devices that are c
56. Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0000102 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0011004 Data 000000008001350C gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MOOOOO0FE Data 0000000000000508 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FCW Data 0000107F gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FSW Data 00000020 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FTW Data 0000FFFF gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FDS Data 00000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FCS Data 00000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FIP Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FOP Data 00000000 gt 120 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FPO Data 00000000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FP1 Data 00000000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FP2 Data 3ffee6455d0000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FP3 Data 3ffdb139430000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FP4 Data 4005c45c6d0000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FP5 Data 4004ccf8aa0000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FP6 Data 40018ac7100000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FP7 Data 40068d00470000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0000081 Data 0000000000000
57. Mediator 126 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Alternatively a multi machine approach can be used in which multiple BSD s are loaded in the same process space This architecture allows the simulator sessions to pass packets back and forth without the need for a mediator Running without a mediator isolates the simulator sessions from the real network For more information on running multiple simulator instances in the same process see Section 5 3 Multi Machine Support on page 45 Figure 7 36 illustrates multi machine communication of simulator sessions without a mediator Simulator Process BSD 2 Machine 2 04 00 00 00 0 04 10 0 0 2 BSD 1 Machine 1 BSD 3 Machine 3 02 02 02 02 02 02 06 00 00 00 00 06 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 3 Figure 7 36 Multi Machine Communication without a Mediator 7 25 1 Simulated Link Negotiation A link will appear connected in the guest system when one of the following occurs e A mediator connection has been established e There is at least one other NIC BSD running in the same process and are aware of each other When a new mediator connection string has been specified a one shot link negotiation will take place within the simulator Depending on whether a connection was made with the mediator the link will appear to be connected or disconnected on the guest If the mediator was killed and has since been restarted then the user will need to perform a lin
58. Messages The AMD 8111 device produces log messages to the Message Log Window as specified by the options in the Logging Option tab shown in Figure 7 27 The device can log I O mapped Transactions Memory mapped Transactions and SMI and SCI assertions 96 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 D AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 4 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Logging Device Options Primary HDD Chann gt Options C Log ID mapped Transactions C Log Memory mapped Transactions C Log SMI and SCI assertions Figure 7 27 Logging Options Properties Dialog AMD 8111 chipset Differences from Real Hardware The AMD 8111 Southbridge device differs from other devices mainly in those items that deal with real time operation Those items cannot be modeled in the current simulator The model does not include any of the power management registers The functionality of the USB 2 0 controller is also absent PCI registers and memory mapped registers are the only portion present For experimental purposes the AMD 8111 Southbridge device supports an optional IOMMU based on IOMMU spec 1 2 that can be enabled and disabled via the automation command 8 SetIOMMU O 1 The addition of this block to the device model does not reflect any real or planned hardware When enabled the AMD 8111 device s IOMMU PCI registers live in a capability block of the PCI Bridge When enabled the AMD 8111 device s IOMMU delivers interrupt
59. Options C Log PCI Config Space Accesses C Log I O Space Accesses Disable Fastpath 1 0 when Logging C Log Memory Space Accesses Disable Fastpath Memory when Logging C Log Fastpath Memory Requests when Logging Figure 9 3 I O Logging Dialog Log PCI Config Space Accesses Checking this will log PCI Config Space accesses made to the device Log I O Space Accesses Checking this will log I O Space accesses made to the device These are the accesses made with the x86 IO read write instructions Disable Fastpath I O when Logging This item checked by default disables the Fastpath I O mechanism when I O Space Accesses logging is enabled If this is unchecked accesses may not appear in the log Log Memory Space Accesses Checking this will log Memory Space accesses made to the device These are the accesses corresponding to standard x86 move read and write instructions to memory Disable Fastpath Memory when Logging 146 Chapter 9 Logging User Manual November 2010 This item checked by default disables the Fastpath Memory mechanism when Memory Space Accesses logging is enabled If this is unchecked accesses may not appear in the log WARNING Un checking this item may lead to significantly compromised performance of SimNow if large numbers of accesses are being made to the device in question For example logging all accesses to the DIMM device would make SimNow extremely slow Log Fastpath Memory Requests when Log
60. RX780 gt Sets package type to RD790 or RX780 GetPackageType Displays current package type A 7 35 ATI RD890S RD890 RD780S RX880 1 simnow rd890 usage Automation Command Description SetRev rev Sets the internal chip revision number to rev GetRev Displays the internal chip revision number Version Displays the binary revision SetPackageType lt RD890S RD890 RD870S RX880 gt Sets package type to RD890S RD890 RD870S or RX880 GetPackageType Displays current package type Appendix A 253 User Manual November 2010 254 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Index View Memor 151 Deprecated Devices ssesses 10 ROMs ches enia 183 Device ID eet RR e eU 99 ES PD inne ended 184 Device List uo ones e RED dees eae 10 Devices Windouw eee 9 A DHCP et amc AT 128 ADOS De deed be rac e ird pot 80 Diagnostic Porte 28 e E 8 DIMM irapa ita it nonet 57 Address Translation Cache 29 Disable USB Pont 92 EE 63 67 Disk Journaling eee 41 94 AMD 3DNow Technology 224 DiSkTool 5 ttr 165 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 88 Double baut 188 AMD Virtualization AMD VTM Technology DVD CD ROM eene 33 Pose pepe ense eter FARE seat i Dp e Re P Se pets 151 E AMD 8111 Device see 92 AMD 8132 PCI X Controller 13 101
61. all real I O not memory I O generated by the processor model Check the Log Linear Memory Accesses check box to log all memory accesses based on linear memory This logs all data memory accesses generated by the processor model This does not log code fetch memory accesses nor physical memory accesses for example page table access and dirty bit updates Check the Log Exceptions check box to log all exceptions generated by the processor model 54 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 D AweSim Processor 0 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Logging Processor Type Options Log Disassembly C Log Register State Changes C Log LO Read writes C Log Linear Memory Accesses C Log Exceptions Figure 7 2 AweSim Processor Logging Properties Dialog Log Messages This device produces log messages to the Message Log Window as specified by the options in the Message Log Windows see Section 9 Logging on page 145 Difference from Real Hardware While the processor device is a faithful simulation of the software visible portion of an AMD microprocessor it is not a model of the specific AMD microprocessor hardware Because of this the processor device is not equivalent in certain areas Any issues related to timing such as the time to execute a given instruction will be different The TLB models do not exactly match any particular processor so any software that depends
62. appears to be off Clicking on the Soft Sleep button simulates a power consumption reduction The power consumption is reduced to one of several levels depending on how the system is to be used The lower the level of power consumption the more time it takes the system to return to the working state To close a previously loaded system simulation definition file click on the Close BSD button z 3 This button is only enabled when a system definition file has been loaded or created earlier Please make sure you save any changes that you make to the system configuration before clicking on the Close BSD button l to close the system definition file Otherwise all changes will be lost The Save BSD button bal is only enabled active when a system definition BSD file has been loaded or created To save your current system definition click on the Save BSD button kl or click on the File menu item and select Save BSD To open a system definition file BSD file click on the Open BSD button 3 and select the desired BSD file from the Open File Dialog Window The Open BSD button is only enabled active when no other system definition file has been open yet To create a blank or new system definition file click on the New BSD button 1 This button is disabled when a system definition file has been loaded or created earlier In this case you must close your current system definition file click on t
63. commands that can be used to configure the device 1 simnow gt e1000 usage Automation Command Description Enables or disables message logging for PCI Config c MMIO m I O o Unmasked Interrupts 1 MDI d Frame Transfers t or Frame Receptions r logStatus Displays the current log status Sets the mediator connect string The domain string and the port number are setMediatorHost domain hostname port optional The default domain string is null The default port is 8196 The hostname is the host in which the mediator is running Outputs the current mediator connect log enableldisable cmoidtr getMediatorHost string ser MACAddress XX XX XX XX XX XX e MAC Address to be used by the Retrieves the MAC Address being used by the adapter Restarts link negotiation auto for the adapter or forces a link disconnect down getMACAddress linkConnect autoldown 250 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description tune intthrtlIrxdelayltxdelay value Sets certain synthetic delay and throttle values which gives the user the opportunity to change the default settings to get optimal results intthrt sets the interrupt throttle rate to value rxdelay sets the amount of link idle time required before generating an rx interrupt to value txdelay sets the amount of link idle time required before generating an tx interrupt to value getTuneValues
64. conservative setting fx Changes several parameters to the default optimize Speed aggressive setting Table 15 13 CodeGen Command Overview A 7 19 Emerald Graphics 1 simnow emerald usage Automation Command Description FrameBufSize size FrameBufSize sets the size of the frame buffer in Megabytes The size must be a power of 2 The value placed in this option is only read at reset The frame buffer size can not be dynamically modified FrameBufGetSize Returns the size of the frame buffer in Megabytes Accel 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 the Accelerator used by the Video driver Returns true if Accelerator is enabled otherwise it GetAccel returns false VBE 0l1 Enables 1 or disables 0 VESA BIOS Extensions GetVBE Returns true if VESA BIOS Extensions is enabled otherwise it returns false A 7 20 Matrox MGA G400 Graphics 1 simnow gt mgag400 usage Automation Command Description SetTexmap 0 1 Enables 1 or disables 0 the texture units By default the texture units are disabled SetCardType CARDID Sets the MGA G400 type to CARDID Valid values for CARDID are 6648 888 6616 and 824 GetCardType Returns the current CARDID value A 7 21 PCI Bus 1 simnow pcibus usage Automation Command Description DeviceID lt SlotID gt lt DeviceID gt Sets the DeviceID to DeviceID on slot SlotID GetDeviceID
65. dee 111 Figure 7 35 Communication via Mediator essere 128 Figure 7 36 Multi Machine Communication without a Mediator 129 Figure 7 357 Visibility Did Sram e ioa peior add pte eco el epi eaten d nsa a onde ghe 133 Figure 7 38 Plug and Play Monitor Device Confgeuraton eee 135 Figure 7 39 ATI SB600 SATA Configuration Dialog eene 137 Figure 8 1 PCI Configuration Viewer 143 Figure 9 1 EE 146 Figure 9 2 Error EE 147 Figure 9 3 I O Logging Dialog eg aeree eat te Ra eo hte santa ee Pe ena nona ie esa Pe agant 148 Figure 10 1 CPU Debugger WIBQOW 4 eater ieeueeeta earns pero hne ASTU ed Rer eoe UNT NEES 151 Figure 13 1 DiskTool Shell Window 22er ies htt die ege eee de odes 169 Figure 13 2 DiskTool GUI WindOWw ie rta eiie re odi melee petrae 170 Figure 13 3 DiskTool Drive Information eese nennen 170 Figure 13 4 DiskTool Progress Window esee 171 Figure 14 1 Memory Configurator oie d aie od desee d ee esa eas 174 Figure 14 2 KE EE 175 Figure 14 3 Message Log Window essen steci metes dosdeaesaueececuedecedsscceaasadandens 176 Pigure l5 To Console e EE 230 X Figures User Manual November 2010 Figures xi User Manual November 2010 Tables Table 1 1 Feature Overview Public Release versus Full Release A 2 Table 2 1 Software and Hardware Requirements esee 3 Table 351 Cheetah T p bsd Devices se otros eger
66. dee eege Dus ege PO sehe Ro eeepen 14 Table 3 2 Device Window Quick Reference esses ene enne 14 Table 3 3c KEE 32 Table 5 1 Command Line Argument Nu 40 Table 5 2 Newmachine Command Arguments esee 46 Table 7 1 Supported Deviees eA oo nti et a a taco tal qe p e 54 Table 7 2 Supported Standard VESA Modes eene 67 Table 7 3 Supported Custom VESA Modes eese eene enne enne 68 Table 7 4 Matrox G400 VESA Modes esses enne enne enne eene nenne 75 Table 7 5 Supported Resolutions in Power Graphics Mode sss 75 Table 7 6 Supported Guest Operating Systems sssseeeeeeeeneeen 76 Table 7 7 Execution Control Flags ue toe petere oit es sues oct det GREEN 120 Table 7 8 Internal Execution Control Flags eene 121 Table 7 9 Mediator Command Line Switches esee 131 Table 7 10 MAC Address Assignments eee esee estne tenete etse na 132 Table 7 11 Client Server Simulator erer 132 Table 7 12 Client Server Simulator Client 1 eere 132 Table 7 13 Isolated Client Server Simulator Server ccccccesccecesececeeeeeceeeceseneeeesaes 132 Table 7 14 Isolated Client Server Simulator Client 1 sees 133 Table 10 1 Debugger Breakpoint Command Examples eene 152 Table 10 2 Debugger Memory Dump Command Examples
67. existing device that has a more generic and abstract definition such as a non configured Dimm Bank can be wrapped in a device group to give it an identity as a particular hardware implementation such as an already configured Dimm DDR2 IGBx2 More generally any device can be wrapped by a device group to give an alternate default configuration for the device s state archive data 3 3 5 2 Example Quad Core Node Next we will consider examples relevant to the ability of a device group to have multiple child devices default archive data for each child device and connections between the child devices These next examples are based on a quad core processor node Building a processor node in SimNow has traditionally been a multi step process First the user would add the AMD Sth Generation Northbridge Device and then add one AweSim Processor device for each processing core in the node These devices then need to be connected together along the respective CPU Bus and Interrupt IOAPIC Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 21 User Manual November 2010 connection ports Once the devices are connected a user would then need to load a product ID file so that the simulated devices would represent a real and planned piece of hardware In summary building a Quad core node in SimNow could take as many as 14 individual steps and these steps would need to be repeated each time a processor node is to be added A device group ca
68. feature are currently not supported Configuration Options The Plug and Play Monitor device gives you the opportunity to choose from different Plug and Play Monitor device models as shown in Figure 7 38 132 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 D Plug and Play Monitor 10 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging General Basic Display Parameters Standard Timings Coor ZE Monitor Model ViewSonic Professional Series P815 21 CRT v Vendor Product ID EDID Structure Version EDID Extensions Vendor ID Product ID Wee E Revision 3 Serial Number 39438 Mfg Week Mfg Year 16354 Version 1 Number of extensions 0 EDID Checksum 8 bit Checksum CB Figure 7 38 Plug and Play Monitor Device Configuration Chapter 7 Device Configuration 133 User Manual November 2010 7 27 ATI SB400 SB600 SB700 SB800 Southbridge Devices The ATI Southbridge devices provide the basic I O Southbridge functionality of the system Features include 4 or 6 SATA ports a PIO mode IDE controller supporting 1 or 2 channels fully functinoal USB 1 1 Controller supporting legacy emulation an LPC ISA bridge an SMB 2 0 compliant controller an IOAPIC controller HPET timer and legacy AT devices 8259 PIC 8254 PIT CMOS and DMA controller The legacy AT devices have the standard behavior and IO addresses unless otherwise noted Interface The Southb
69. file contents Contents of a BSD The contents of memory as well as all configuration information are stored in the BSD Configuration Options The first field of the Memory Configuration tab shown in Figure 7 17 is the base address of the device in a hexadecimal value The second field is the total size of the memory device given in decimal value for the number of 32 Kbyte blocks you would like created 32 Kbyte blocks are used because non initialized memory is dynamically allocated when addressed in 32 Kbyte chunks The third field is the name of the binary file you use to initialize the memory contents The device initializes memory for the content length of the file If you specify a 512 Kbyte ROM and use a 256 Kbyte image file the first 256 Kbytes are initialized The Init File selection comes with a browse button for easier selection Selecting the Read Only option turns the memory device into a ROM Writes to the device are ignored when the Read Only option is selected Chapter 7 Device Configuration 83 User Manual November 2010 Selecting the System BIOS ROM option tells the memory device it is the system BIOS The memory device only responds to memory address ranges accompanied by a chip select that is generated by the Southbridge device Selecting Flash Mode option tells the memory device that it is configured as a flash memory device There are two command sequences supported by our flash memory device SST and
70. i e if the JumpDrive device is connected to a USB controller The device must be not connected i e unplugged to issue commands that alter the JumpDrive image Chapter 7 Device Configuration 125 User Manual November 2010 7 25 E1000 Network Adapter Device The network adapter device models an Intel Pro 1000 MT Desktop Network Adapter The adapter depends heavily on MAC address assignment in order to determine how visible it is to real network resources or other simulator network sessions The adapter model requires a separate mediator process to bridge access to the real network This device provides a list of automation commands that can be used to configure the adapter model see Section A 7 Automation Commands on page 230 To model network workloads the following are typically required 1 One or more BSDs with a NIC device included in each BSD 2 A mediator process running remotely or locally The mediator is a background daemon task whose purpose is to bridge the NIC model to the real network or other SimNow BSDs The level of network visibility for each simulator session depends on the format of the MAC address that is used for the simulated NIC model Figure 7 35 shows depicts four simulator sessions communicating via a mediator HostName thehost Simulator 4 Mediator External Network Host theclient1 Host theclient2 Simulator Simulator 1 Simulator 2 Figure 7 35 Communication via
71. monitored by hardware and activates MONITOR EAX ECX EDX OF 01 C8 the monitor The address range should be of a write back memory caching type Move 64 bits representing the lower double precision data element from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 register and duplicate Move 128 bits representing packed Single precision data elements from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 register and duplicate high Move 128 bits representing packed single precision data elements from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 register and duplicate low A hint that allows the processor to stop instruction execution and enter MWAIT EAX ECX OF 01 C9 an implementation dependent x optimized state until occurrence of a class events S S 000 LDDQU xmm m128 F2 OF FO r pa amp MOVDDUP xmmi xmm2 m64 F2 OF 12 r MOVSHDUP xmmi xmm2 m128 F3 OF 16 r MOVSLDUP xmm1 xmm2 m128 F3 OF 12 r Table 15 12 Prescott New Instruction Reference A 6 8 1 MONITOR Setup Monitor Address Opcode Instruction Description OF 01 C8 MONITOR Setup Monitor Address The simulator does not recognize this instruction Therefore the simulator generates an invalid opcode exception See Section A 6 8 1 MONITOR Setup Monitor Address on page 228 See Section A 6 8 2 MWAIT Monitor Wait on page 229 224 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 A 6 8 2 MWAIT Monitor Wait Opcode Instruction Description OF 01 C9
72. of inside the device group Le Create device grouy wizard peu 9 set identity Ei Identity Step 1 o Give the device group an as a known device A device group is a device With other devices device groups and or device libraries inside it If dont know what something is then right click V What s This or mouse hover on a particular item or check the Hdlp documentation Name 4 core Node Description this is an example description of our example 4 core Node device Device Identity Icon icons awesim png Browse Properties help main help htm E deprecated 1 no active 4 core Node AweSim Processor 3 Export to file devicesv4 node core example bsg Ico Qi Figure In the second step we specify options relative to each child device For each child s device state the resulting known device group can either save the child device s current state or it can specify no default device state and thus inherit the default device state for the particular child device For example if a child device is an AweSim Processor we can either save the current configuration for that AweSim Processor as the default state for the known device group we are creating Or the group s child can just inherit the defaults of the AweSim Processor known device For each child device we can specify internal to external port mappings This maps an inter
73. on the command line So you can repeatedly step instructions by entering T once then repeatedly hitting the Enter key 5 The simulation can be returned to continuous execution by entering G This executes the debugger s Go command 10 1 3 Stepping Over an Instruction 1 Stop the simulation as described in Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on pags 7 2 Open the Debugger Window View Show Debugger or click on gt The simulation will pause and the Debugger Window will appear 3 When the Debugger Window has attention enter P on the debugger command line The debugger Pretty Trace command will execute causing the CPU device to execute up to the next instruction in linear order 1 e step over calls interrupts repeated instructions and loops This is distinguished from the T command which will step into calls interrupts etc executing the next instruction regardless of its type 4 The debugger will repeat the last entered command if you just type Enter in the command edit window So you can repeatedly execute the pretty trace command by entering P once then repeatedly hitting the Enter key 150 Chapter 10 CPU Debugger User Manual November 2010 5 The simulation can be returned to continuous execution by entering G This executes the debugger s Go command 10 1 4 Skipping an Instruction 1 Stop the simulation as described in Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on page 7 2 Setup a breakpoint to break at th
74. one SMBus to any of four SMBus branches The device is programmed via read byte and write byte commands on the SMBus where the 7 bit address field is 0x18 The SMB hub device models the combination of two physical devices manufactured by Philips Semiconductors the PCA9516 5 channel PC hub and the PCA9556 Octal SMBus and I C registered interface In the simulator s device model the two devices are configurable via GPIO x enables segment x as shown in Figure 7 33 Interface The SMB hub has five SMBus interfaces SMBO can be connected within the SMB hub to any of the four other SMBuses SMB 1 3 Typically SMBO is connected to a SMBus connection on a Southbridge device and the other SMBus ports are connected to other devices in the system Initialization and Reset State When first initialized or reset the SMB hub registers are set to their default state The internal registers and their default states are described in the PCA9556 data sheet Contents of a BSD The current state of all internal registers and any internal state variables are saved in the BSD Configuration Options The SMB Hub device allows you to enable up to eight GPIO segments GPIOO GPIO7 to connect SMB devices to SMB hub device as shown in Figure 7 33 Chapter 7 Device Configuration 107 User Manual November 2010 D SMB Hub Device 11 Properties Connections 140 Logging GPIO 0 enables segment GPIO 1 enables segment GPIO 2 enables segment G
75. or RCR reg mem32 CL D3 3 SE location right the number of v bits specified in the CL register Rotate the 33 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 32 bit register or RCR reg mem32 imm8 CI 3 ib memory location right the number of n d bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value 208 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP ROL REN Rotate the 65 bits consisting of the Di 3 carry flag and a 64 bit register or Af RCR memory location right 1 bit Rotate the 65 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 64 bit register or BOR EE GE D3 3 memory location right the number of v bits specified in the CL register Rotate the 65 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 64 bit register or RCR reg mem64 imm8 cl 3 ib memory location right the number of e bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value RET C3 Near return to the calling procedure v Near return to the calling procedure RET imml6 C2 iw and then pop of the specified number D of bytes from the stack RETF CB Far return to the calling procedure A Far return to the calling procedure RETF imml6 CA iw and then pop of the specified number ef of bytes from Che stack Rotate an 8 bit register or memory ROL reg imm8 1 DOSAR operand left 1 bit v Rotate an 8 bit register or memory ROL reg mem8 CL DS 0 operand left the number of bits Ff
76. requests as well as cache control and input output signal messages This interface is generally connected to the Northbridge device Interrupt Bus This interface is used to communicate interrupt request and acknowledge messages This interface is connected to whichever device is used to generate and control interrupts typically the Southbridge device System Messages Interface This interface is used by the processor device to output ASCII and binary log information Initialization and Reset State The processor device s state at initialization is equivalent to an industry standard x86 processor at initialization The L1 cache and APIC interfaces are disabled the debugger is off and the L1 cache is configured as two 2 way 512 line and 64 byte caches When the processor device receives a reset the device resets its internal state in a manner consistent with a standard x86 processor No configuration information is modified Contents of a BSD The BSD file contains the current state of all internal processor registers state variables etc It also contains all configuration information Any memory configured locally to the processor is saved in the BSD Configuration Options The Device Properties Window is used to set various processor identification and behavior options Figure 7 1 shows the Processor Type tab for the AweSim processor device Here you can specify which member of the AMD microprocessor family should be simulated Th
77. shell SwapDevice created device known device 3 3 8 Ungrouping a created device group Since a device group is really just a container for its child device s with its own identity as a device it is simple to ungroup a device group on either the GUI or the console In Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 27 User Manual November 2010 the show devices GUI right click a device group click Ungroup Device Or in the console execute the command shell UngroupDevice created device group 3 4 Main Window The AMD SimNow Main Window shown in Figure 3 1 is the main application window It contains a Menu Bar with a set of pull down menus and a Tool Bar both of which control many aspects of the simulation environment The console window shown in Figure 3 15 provides a textual interface for status information and command line style control see Section A 7 Automation Commands on page 230 F SimNow 4 0 0 NDA simnow exe Using image path Images Using library path devices d simnow gt Opening C SimNow cheetah_ip bsd creating device 6 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge creating device Dimm Bank creating device AMD 8111 I 0 Hub creating device Memory Device creating device Winbond W83627HF SIO creating device SMB Hub Device creating device PCI Bus creating device Debugger creating device AweSim Processor creating device AMD 8132 PCI X Control
78. show child devices inside device groups On the standard top level view the context of inside the machine device we would more simply just see three devices see Figure 3 8 arrows represent possible port connections between the devices C3 S Cape Figure 3 8 Device Group 2 group devices 1 library device 3 3 3 Working with Device Groups From the main SimNow window View Show Devices opens a device viewer GUI window for the machine device group We can also open a device viewer GUI window that views any device group s children Right click the device icon and select Modify Group Show Devices from the popup menu If Modify Group Show Devices is not present then the device the user has clicked on is not a group Configure Device Ctrl E Modify Group Show Devices Ctrl M Add Connection Delete Device s Del Disconnect Device s Group Devices What s This Help Figure 3 9 Modify Group Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 17 User Manual November 2010 Click on Modify Group Show Devices This will open a separate show device viewer window AweSim Process Processor 4 AweSim Processor 0 AMD 8th Generation AweSim Processor 5 Integrated Northbridge 6 Figure 3 10 Device Group If any modifications are done to the device group then they will be saved with the BSD Note that it is possible to modify a device group to a point where its children look nothing like the original devi
79. simulator simulates The system instructions are used to establish the operating mode access processor resources handle program and system errors and manage memory Many of these instructions can only be executed by privileged software such as the operating system kernel and interrupt handlers that run at the highest privilege level Only system instructions can access certain processor resources such as the control registers model specific register and debug registers Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Adjust the RPL of a destination segment selector to a level not less than the RPL of 1 ARP Beg ition regie 63 ZS the segment selector specifies in the 16 bit v Source register CLI FA Clear the interrupt flag IF to zero v CLTS 0F 06 aud the task switched TS flag in CRO to v HLT F4 Halt instruction execution ei F Z INT 3 CC Trap to debugger at interrupt 3 o Flush internal caches and trigger external TNVD Or og cache flushes v INVLPG mem8 OF Ol 7 Invalidate the TLB entry for the page v containing a specified memory location IRET CF Return from interrupt 16 bit operand size A IRETD CF Return from interrupt 32 bit operand size IRETO CF Return from interrupt 64 bit operand size bp Reads the GDT LDT descriptor referenced by the 16 bit source operand masks the DAR regl reg meml OF 02 r attributes with FF00h and saves the result v in the
80. specified in the CL register Rotate an 8 bit register or memory operand left the number of bits ROL Zeg meme GENRE EU 0 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Rotate a 16 bit register or memory ROL reg inmi6 1 Se CR operand left 1 bit v Rotate a 16 bit register or memory ROL reg mem16 CL D3 0 operand left the number of bits e specified in the CL register Rotate a 16 bit register or memory operand left the number of bits ROL reg m ml6 imme pl 7 0 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value e Rotate a 32 bit register or memory Qua bic aii Di g operand left 1 bit v Rotate a 32 bit register or memory ROL reg mem32 CL D3 0 operand left the number of bits ef specified in the CL register Rotate a 32 bit register or memory i 3 operand left the number of bits ROL reg mem32 imm8 EL 4 b specified by an 8 bit immediate v value i Rotate a 64 bit register or memory RON EE d operand left 1 bit v Rotate a 64 bit register or memory ROL reg mem64 CL D3 0 operand left the number of bits Af specified in the CL register Rotate a 64 bit register or memory i s operand left the number of bits RON peg memed imme C1 0 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Rotate an 8 bit register or memory ROR reg imm8 1 DO qa operand right 1 bit v Rotate an 8 bit register or memory ROR reg mem8 CL D2 0 operand right the number of bits e Specified in the CL register Rotate an 8 bit register or memory e e operand right the number o
81. steps in Section 4 1 Creating A Blank Hard Drive Image on page 35 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Images Assign a blank hard drive image by selecting File Set IDE Primary Master Image Open the directory that contains your hard drive images and choose a blank hard drive image that you created earlier see Section 4 1 Creating A Blank Hard Drive Image on page 35 or use one of the hard disk images which come with the simulator see Section A 2 4 1 Hard Disk Image Files on page 185 and un check the Journal check box see below The IDE controller has two important features then click on Ok Assign the first OS installation ISO image to the IDE Secondary Master Channel of the hard disk controller by selecting File Set IDE Secondary Master Image If you don t have access to any ISO images you have two options 40 Chapter 5 Running the Simulator User Manual November 2010 You can download Linux ISO images from fedora redhat com If you are a MSDN Subscription member you can also download Windows ISO images from Microsoft s MSDN Subscription Webpage You can assign a physical host DVD CD ROM drive to the simulators IDE Secondary Master Channel and use your host s physical DVD CD ROM drive to install from a CD or DVD media Section 4 Disk Images on page 35 describes how to assign a physical DVD CD ROM drive When the OS installation prompts you eject the current ISO image using File Clear IDE Sec
82. the DiskTool icon or running DiskTool from the command line with no command line options starts DiskTool in GUI mode If you run DiskTool from the command line and include any command line parameters DiskTool runs in command line mode To get a list of the command line options run DiskTool help 13 1 Command Line Mode The functions recognized by the DiskTool command line include Option G Copy a physical device to the given image file Syntax GI G lt DeviceName gt lt ImageName gt ImageSize ImageSize of sectors of data to copy from the device to the image file O All sectors this is the default value 1 All data to the end of physical partition 1 2 All data to the end of physical partition 2 3 All data to the end of physical partition 3 4 All data to the end of physical partition 4 lt Any Other Valid Number gt The number of sectors specified Example disktool g dev hd0 image hdd 102400 This command reads the first 102400 sectors from device dev hdO and places them in the image file image hdd Option P Put the image file lt ImageName gt to physical device lt DeviceName gt Syntax PI P lt DeviceName gt lt ImageName gt Example disktool p dev hd0 image hdd This command reads image file image hdd and writes data to physical device dev hdo Chapter 13 DiskTool 163 User Manual November 2010 Option E Erase Write zeros to all blocks physical device
83. the Matrox Millenium G400 Graphics Device This is the simulated video device Connect it to the AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel Device using AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel AGP Bus and the Graphics Device s AGP or PCI Bus 48 Chapter 6 Create a Simulated Computer User Manual November 2010 11 12 13 14 Add the Southbridge Device Connect it to AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel using AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel HyperTransport Bus 1 and HyperTransport Bus 0 Also connect AMD 8111 _ to the DIMM device using AMD 8111 System Management Bus 0 and DIMM s Generic Bus Add the Winbond W83627HF SIO device This is a Super IO device that supports keyboard mouse and floppy disk Connect it to Southbridge using Winbond s Generic Bus and Southbridge s LPC Bus Add the PCI Bus Connect it to AMD 8111 Southbridge using both devices PCI Bus 0 Add the Memory Device This will contain the System BIOS image Connect it to AMD 8111 Southbridge device using AMD 8111 LPC Bus and the Memory Device s Generic Bus 6 3 Solo bsd Device Configuration To configure each device right click on the device and choose Configure Device from the workspace popup menu see also Section 7 Device Configuration on page 53 L Configure the Matrox Millenium G400 Graphics Device e Go to its Configuration tab e Choose the BIOS file Images g400_897 21 bin Configure the Memory device e Goto its Memory Configuration tab Set the base address to fffc0000 Set the Size to
84. the Simulator You can start AMD SimNow by launching SimNow exe in your install directory For convenience you can create a desktop shortcut to launch the simulator When you run the simulator you will see the simulator s Main Window as shown in Figure 5 1 It will also open a console window shown in Figure 3 15 that is used for text interaction X 1 AMD SimNow Main Window File View Special Keyboard Help J 85H Figure 5 1 Main Window No BSD Loaded 5 1 Command Line Arguments This section describes the command line arguments supported by the simulator Table 5 1 shows the command line arguments Argument Description path Directory to load devices from If used it must be first f file Open the bsd file file e file Execute commands in file on startup i path Image search path for loading image files m path Mediator connection string for network adapters to use Chapter 5 Running the Simulator 37 User Manual November 2010 Argument Description n novga Disable VGA Window c nogui Disable GUI console mode d Disable mouse and keyboard inputs to simulator r register Register the simulator with the O S as an automation server h help Print this help message Table 5 1 Command Line Arguments For instance to open the cheetah_Ip bsd when starting the simulator you can enter the
85. the contents of a 16 bit XCHG regl6 reg memi6 B7 Ze register or memory operand with the e contents of a 16 bit register Exchange the contents of a 32 bit XCHG reg mem32 reg32 87 r register with the contents of a 32 d bit register or memory operand Exchange the contents of a 32 bit XCHG reg32 reg mem32 87 r register or memory operand with the d contents of a 32 bit register Exchange the contents of a 64 bit XCHG reg mem64 reg64 87 r register with the contents of a 64 d bit register or memory operand Exchange the contents of a 64 bit XCHG reg64 reg mem64 87 r register or memory operand with the ef contents of a 64 bit register Set AL to the contents of DS rBX XLAT mem8 D7 unsigned AL v Appendix A 217 User Manual November 2010 Instruction S ted Mnemonic Opcode Description uus Set AL to the contents of DS rBX ats p7 unsigned AL v XOR the contents of AL with an XOR AL imm8 34 ib immediate 8 bit operand and store the e result in AL XOR the contents of AX with an XOR AX imm16 35 iw immediate 16 bit operand and store A the result in AX XOR the contents of EAX with an XOR EAX imm32 35 id immediate 32 bit operand and store ef the result in EAX XOR the contents of RAX with a sign XOR RAX imm32 35 id extended immediate 32 bit operand and ei store the result in AX XOR the contents of an 8 bit destination register or memory X
86. the result TEST reg mem64 imm32 F7 0 id AND a sign extened immediate 32 bit value with the contents of a 64 bit register or memory operand and set rFLAGS to reflect the result TEST reg mem8 reg8 84 E AND the contents of an 8 bit register with the contents of an 8 bit register or memory operand and set rFLAGS to reflect the result pS See Se SS SSS SS SU Si SS Sk Si Se Se Si Se SS 216 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction S ted Mnemonic Opcode Description uus AND the contents of a 16 bit register with the contents of a 16 bit TEST reg mem16 reg16 85 r register or memory operand and set v rFLAGS to reflect the result AND the contents of a 32 bit register with the contents of a 32 bit TEST reg mem32 reg32 85 r register or memory operand and set v rFLAGS to reflect the result AND the contents of a 64 bit register with the contents of a 64 bit TEST reg mem64 reg64 85 fx register or memory operand and set v rFLAGS to reflect the result Exchange the contents of an 8 bit register with the contents of 8 bit XADD reg mem8 reg8 OF CO r destination register or memory e operand and load their sum into the destination Exchange the contents of a 16 bit register with the contents of 16 bit XADD reg mem16 reg16 OF C1 r destination register or memory
87. the x87 control word x87 status word x87 tag word last non control instruction pointer last data pointer and opcode of the last non control instruction completed e mem94 l08env 94 byte or 108 byte x87 environment and register stack e mem512env 512 byte environment for 128 bit media 64 bit media and x87 instructions e mmx Quadword 64 bit operand in an MMX register e mmxl Quadword 64 bit operand in an MMX register specified as the left most first operand in the instruction syntax e mmx2 Quadword 64 bit operand in an MMX register specified as the right most second operand in the instruction syntax e mmx mem32 Doubleword 32 bit operand in an MMX register or memory e mmx mem64 Quadword 64 bit operand in an MMX register or memory e mmxl mem 4 Quadword 64 bit operand in an MMX register or memory specified as the left most first operand in the instruction syntax e mmx2 mem64 Quadword 64 bit operand in an MMX register or memory specified as the right most second operand in the instruction syntax e mofjset Memory offset of unspecified size e moffsetS Operand in memory located at the specified byte 8 bit offset from the instruction pointer e moffset16 Operand in memory located at the specified word 16 bit offset from the instruction pointer e moffset32 Operand in memory located at the specified doubleword 32 bit offset from the instruction pointer pnt
88. then on Settings 3 Select the Adjust For Best Performance option 4 Click on Apply Also make sure you have installed the Matrox G400 graphics device drivers You can download the latest Matrox Millennium G400 graphic device drivers for Windows and Linux at http www matrox com mga support drivers latest home cfm Enabling Graphics Hardware Acceleration on Windows Server Operating Systems Graphics Hardware Acceleration and DirectX are disabled by default on a Windows Server configuration to ensure maximum stability and uptime But if you need to improve the graphics performance the following steps will guide you through on how you can enable hardware acceleration Right click the desktop and then click Properties on the menu Click the Settings tab and then click on Advanced Click the Troubleshoot tab Move the Hardware Acceleration slider across to full see Figure 7 12 Click Ok and then click Close pce p 74 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Default Monitor and Matrox Millennium G400 English PR Information Options DN Monitor Settings Color General Adapter Monitor Troubleshoot Color Management m Are you having problems with your graphics hardware These settings can help you troubleshoot display related problems Hardware acceleration Display Manually cont
89. to point interface The monitor is always put at transmit only mode DDC1 The monitor will continuously transmit data until the monitor will be turned off or switched to the bi directional mode DDC2 In DDC2 mode the C protocol is being used for data transfers Interface The Plug and Play Monitor device model has a VGA and DVI interface connection Connections can be only made to the VGA or DVI interface It can be connected to the VGA or DVI connection of a video card device Contents of a BSD The current state of all internal registers and any internal state variables are saved in the BSD Initialization and Reset State When first initialized or reset the Plug and Play Monitors DDC registers are set to their default state After initialization the monitor device will operate in DDC1 mode The device will remain in the DDC1 mode until there is a valid HIGH to LOW transition on the SCL pin when it will switch to DDC2B mode Differences from Real Hardware The model attempts to match the functionality of the physical devices from a programmer s perspective Upon power up a real Plug and Play monitor will output valid data only after it has been initialized During initialization data will not be available until after the first nine clock cycles are sent to the device This Plug and Play monitor device model does not simulate this behaviour It will always output valid data The Page Write Acknowedge Polling and the Write Protection
90. unintialized state Sync This command flushes the in memory caches out to the files Type 530415312 This was supposed to allow support for both the 5304 default and 5312 cards the 5312 support is not well tested Image Vol gt Image file gt Creates a volume for the give disk image For e g raid image 0 i cOd0 img GetImage lt Vol gt Displays the disk image for the given volume Journal Vol gt 011 Enables 1 or disables journaling for specified volume AddJournal Vol Journal file Creates a journal for the given volume number For file based journal raid addjournal O iNcOd0jl jrn for in memory journal raid addjournal 0 ResizeJournal Vol gt Old Journal New Journal Resizes the journal for the given volume to the new journal parameters Commit Vol gt Commit copies back the modified data blocks from the journal to the disk image and clears the journals Clear Vol gt Clears the volume discards any changes made to the volume Flatten Vol gt Deletes the journal added last for that particular volume Status Vol gt v r Displays the status for the RAID device or a particular volume v option displays details regarding the statistics of performance meters implemented in the RAID device while r option resets the performance counters SetDBC Entries Depth Bl
91. visible portion of an ATI Radeon HD 3870 adapter it is not a model of the specific ATI Radeon HD 3870 hardware Because of this the graphics device model is not equivalent in certain areas Any issues related to timing such as the vertical retrace time DAC CRTC and GPU clock timing will be different Any software that depends on exact timing behavior may not function correctly The following features are not supported in this version of the ATI Radeon HD 3870 device model Any software that depends on these features may not function correctly Unsupported Feature List DirectX 10 shader constant buffer geometry processing shader import export from memory DirectX 10 shader instructions Flow control and conditional shader instructions Texture Filtering mip mapping LOD anti aliasing blending weight generation depth filtering Line color gradients wireframe fill mode Fog UVD Dual screen configurations and display hotplug detection ATI CrossFire Chapter 7 Device Configuration 79 User Manual November 2010 7 7 Super lO Devices Winbond W83627HF SIO ITE 8712 SIO Device models of the Super IO device contain the keyboard PS 2 mouse floppy COM1 COM2 LPT1 IR fan GPIO MIDI and joystick devices as well as PCI support and control information The COMI and COM2 devices create named pipes SimNow Coml and SimNow Com2 and send all serial communication through these In
92. writable or read only as defined by the appropriate Super IO specification 82 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 8 Memory Device The memory device enables you to add memory devices to the system You can configure the memory device for emulation of ROM or dynamic memory You specify the total memory size and the beginning address to which the device should respond The memory device can also be configured as a LPC flash device It currently models 2Mb SST49LF020A 4Mb SSTA9LF040A 8Mb SST49LFO80A and 16Mb SST49LF160C flash memory devices Note that we support two command sequences used generally by flash memory SST and ATMEL User should configure the flash memory to the appropriate command sequence to get desired results The SST49LF160C device uses the ATMEL command sequence while SST49LFO20A SST49LFO40A SST49LFO80A use the SST command sequence Interfaces The memory device has a general purpose interface that you can connect to any other type of port No selection is necessary when connecting this memory device to another device Initialization and Reset State The default state of the device is a RAM memory device that is at a base address of 0x00000000 and a size of 4 Gigabytes The memory has no default content When an initialization file is specified the memory device s contents contain the data from that binary file After a reset the memory device reverts back to the initialization
93. you don t define any parameters the default protocol and port will be used You can override tcp with udp The following example shows how to override the default protocol and port parameters shell gdb udp 2233 The host parameter can t be changed it is always set to localhost For more information please refer to Section 11 2 GDB Interface on page 162 Appendix A 229 User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description Swap X86Sim Processor AweSim Processor Switches CPU model from X66Sim to AweSim or the other way around HasModule module Returns true if module is present otherwise it returns false GetDisplayIndex Returns the 0 based index of which VGA device is currently being displayed in the GUI Only useful if more than one VGA device is active within a BSD file SetDisplayIndex lt n gt Sets the 0 based index of which VGA devices output is to be displayed in the GUI Only useful if more than one VGA device is active within a BSD file Wait Provides a WAIT UNTIL STOPPED feature NGo Provides a non blocking GO command DisplayScreenShot lt index gt lt filename gt lt format gt DisplayScreenShot takes a screen shot This command supports multiple displays Index is a number that identifies the desired display An Index of 0 means that a screen shot from display 0 will be taken Filename is the name of the s
94. 000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0000082 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0000083 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000001B Data 00000000FEE00900 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000200 Data 0000000000000006 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000202 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000204 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000206 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000208 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000020A Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000020C Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000020E Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000201 Data 000000FF80000800 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000203 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000205 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000207 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000209 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000020B Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000020D Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Dev
95. 000000080000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC001001D Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010030 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010031 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010032 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010033 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010034 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010035 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010112 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010113 Data 0000000000000001 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0011020 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0011023 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type APIC Length 1024 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000010000400 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Data Length 16 Value 0000000000000000ffffffffffO00000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 V
96. 000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Init gt lt Trace started on instruction 227 gt Event Device CPUO Type IOR ICount 326 Address a03e Size 2 gt lt Data Length 2 Value 0100 gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type IOW ICount 345 Address a03c Size 2 gt lt Data Length 2 Value 0000 gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type IOW ICount 364 Address a03e Size 2 gt lt Data Length 2 Value 1100 gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type IOR ICoun
97. 010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00
98. 1lp Displays the contents of p hysical default or linear memory as b ytes w ords d ouble words or q uad words or in the previous format if not specified e b w d q address data gt 1lIp Allows the modification of p hysical default or l inear memory in b ytes w ords d ouble words or q uad words or in the previous format if not specified Data values are entered immediately after the address separated by spaces f b w d g address range value 1llp Fills the given p hysical default or l inear memory range with the indicated value g address Begins or will resume CPU execution setting a temporary execution breakpoint on the given address h on off clear value Controls history trace collection ON enables trace collection and clears the current trace buffer OFF disables trace collection and CLEAR clears the current trace buffer Specifying no arguments or a value disassembles the most recent value instructions executed i b w d port Input a b yte w ord or d ouble word from the indicated port Chapter 10 CPU Debugger 155 User Manual November 2010 Debugger Command Definition o b w d port data Output a b yte w ord or d ouble word to the indicated port p Similar to the command single steps the simulation one instruction unless the current instructio
99. 2 25 id extended immediate 32 bit value and e store the result in RAX AND reg mem8 imm8 80 4 ib pen the contents of reg mem8 with v AND reg mem16 imm16 81 4 iw po E contents of reg mem16 with A AND reg mem32 imm32 81 4 id oe contents of reg mem32 with A AND the contents of reg mem64 with a 4 AND reg mem64 imm32 81 4 id sign extended imm32 e AND the contents of reg memi6 with a 4 AND Keg Nemo imme ae sign extended 8 bit value v e g AND the contents of reg mem32 with a 4 AND reg memg2 imme eee sign extended 8 bit value v e P AND the contents of reg mem64 with a 4 AND Reg cae 93 4 vee sign extended 8 bit value v AND the contents of an 8 bit register AND reg mem8 reg8 20 r or memory location with the contents e of an 8 bit register AND the contents of a 16 bit register AND reg mem16 reg16 21 r or memory location with the contents d of a 16 bit register AND the contents of a 32 bit register AND reg mem32 reg32 21 Ze or memory location with the contents e of a 32 bit register AND the contents of a 16 bit register AND reg mem64 reg64 21 Ze or memory location with the contents e of a 16 bit register AND the contents of an 8 bit register AND reg reg mem8 22 r with the contents of an 8 bit memory e location or register AND the contents of a 16 bit register AND regl6 reg mem16 23 r with the contents of a 16 bit memory d location or register AND the contents of a 32 bit register AND reg32 reg mem32 23 r wit
100. 2 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP PAVGUSB mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF BF E e EE EE e nm Converts packed floating point Pao eee GNE ee oy era operand or packed 32 bit integer PFACC mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF AE Floating point accumulate PFADD mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 9E Packed floating point addition SEN Packed floating point comparison PFCMPEQ mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF BO Baie toe PFCMPPGE mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 90 Packed floating point comparison greater than or equal to Packed floating point comparison PFCMPGT mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF AO greater than PFMAX mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF A4 Packed floating point maximum PFMIN mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 94 Packed floating point minimum ST Packed floating point PFMUL mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF B4 multiplication PFRCP mmregl mmreg2 m64 OF OF 96 Packed floating point approximation PFRCPIT1 mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF A6 Packed floating point reciprocal first iteration step Packed floating point reciprocal second iteration step Packed floating point reciprocal Square root first iteration step Packed floating point reciprocal Wel FRCPIT2 mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF B6 Wel FRSQIT1 mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF A7 SS 4S SN 4 PFRSQRT mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 97 square Sede approximation PFSUB mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 9A Pa
101. 2 imm32 B8 rd 32 bit register v e Move a 64 bit immediate value into a MOV reg64 imm64 B8 rq 64 bit register Af Move an 8 bit immediate value to an MOV See ds 8 bit register or memory operand v Move a 16 bit immediate value to a MOV reg mem16 imml6 c7 0 16 bit register or memory operand v i Move a 32 bit immediate value to a MOV reg mem32 imm32 CD 32 bit register or memory operand v Move a 64 bit immediate value to a ee ET d 64 bit register or memory operand v Move 32 bit value from a general MOVD xmm reg mem32 66 OF 6E r purpose register or 32 bit memory e location to an XMM register Appendix A 203 User Manual November 2010 Instruction EE Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Move 64 bit value from a general MOVD xmm reg mem64 66 OF 6E r purpose register or 64 bit memory e location to an XMM register Move 32 bit value from an XMM MOVD reg mem32 xmm 66 OF 7E r register to a 32 bit general purpose register or memory location MOVD reg mem64 xmm 66 Move 64 bit value from an XMM OF 7E r register to a 64 bit general purpose register or memory location MOVD mmx reg mem32 Move 32 bit value from a general 6E r purpose register or 32 bit memory location to an MMX register MOVD mmx reg mem64 Move 64 bit value from a general 6E r purpose register or 64 bit memory location to an MMX register MOVD reg mem32 mmx Move 32 bit value from an MMX 7E r registe
102. 28 SPD cal GERI 172 Memory Configurator eee 171 E POLE dee eec Aetio este iet 62 Message E08 entier nae uterine 143 I MPO GE 62 Microcode Patching esee 188 e SPD D t issu EN 172 Microsoft DirectX H 2 S tepping Over sees See Debug MID ipea enin iei edet 80 Stop 7 MIPS iei tinet MM LS 29 Sop X EEN 113 Modify PCI Configuration Space 141 SuperlO cese ioa nC RANG 80 Mouse CUrsOfiorscscecccneesssszvsdeccsateetevtenaceevodbeavees 177 Multiple Virtual Mann 188 SVGA Siret audi oe etes 63 67 PEED SPA Eeer Switching CD Images esses 179 N System Requirements ssseseee 3 Named Pipe 159 160 161 162 238 239 T EE ee CAG estos ei Ec uda 29 P ONE 55 Triple Fault treten 188 Partition mA 167 T SS cete etlam ere ete 223 PCIEX iin PU Pee 100 PCI X Configuration Cycle 103 U PDL n eene nennen 57 Usage Commande 229 Enable Error Simulation 60 User Defined Keys 5 Error Simulation Control 60 a i Reset cete RP E 62 V Performance Monitoring PE abies E Ke sister cdit e EU aie a 63 67 Physical Drtves sese 166 Virtual Address Space sess 4 EE eines er tp ere E E 7 PnP Monitor 132 W DDC xeu Rei 132 Winbond W83627HE LLL 80 VESA ainsi eee ie aree 132 Work 9 EI 28 BEE Prescott New Instruction sees 225 256 Index
103. 32 D e Move if greater or equal OF m CMOVGE reg64 reg mem64 D r Move if greater or equal OF m CMOVLE regl6 reg mem16 E r Pa less or equal ZF 1 or SF v CMOVLE reg32 reg mem32 E r pat less or equal ZF or SF v Appendix A 195 User Manual November 2010 Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP e Move if less or equal ZF 1 or SF F4 CMOVLE reg64 reg mem64 0 E Ze lt gt OF e CMOVNG regl16 reg mem16 OF 4E r oe lg Be ee quc ome CMOVNG reg32 reg mem32 OF 4E r Ee v CMOVNG reg64 reg mem64 OF 4E r i us n DOE EE qux cod Sus v CMOVNLE regl6 reg memi6 OF 4F r ope di BEBE SE eve duds Sr dui v CMOVNLE reg32 reg mem32 OF 4F r zc d EE dU Br se c ES d CMOVNLE reg 4 reg mem 4 OF 4F r 2 can Rese On Sogyal pure gus e CMOVG regi6 reg memi6 OF 4F r Move if greater ZF 0 or SF OF v CMOVG reg32 reg mem32 OF 4F r Move if greater ZF 0 or SF OF m CMOVG reg64 reg mem64 OF Ap r Move if greater ZF 0 or SF OF m Compare an 8 bit immediate value with CMP Aly imme oy ae the contents of the AL register v Compare a 16 bit immediate value with CNE Payee eu ay the contents of the AX register v Compare a 32 bit immediate value with idco aal SB ae the contents of the EAX register v Compare a 32 bit immediate value with bos decade 2B ta the
104. 5 Supported Guest Operating Systems The simulator has recently but not specifically tested for this release e Successfully completed a 64 bit SpecJBB run on a simulated 4 processor machine The simulator has also successfully completed the entire SPECint 2000 and SPECfp 2000 suite e Successfully completed an in memory run of TPC C on a simulated multi processor system as well as parts of TPC C on a simulated RAID device e Successfully completed Sysmark 2004 s Office Productivity section and parts of Internet Content Creation Appendix A 183 User Manual November 2010 A 4 CPUID This section is an overview of the CPUID feature implementation in the AweSim CPU processor model A 4 1 CPUID Standard Feature Support Standard Function 0x01 Table 15 6 shows the standard feature bits returned by the AweSim CPU processor model and which features are fully w or only partially amp implemented and supported A indicates that the returned feature bit is zero and this feature is not implemented and not supported 7 8 8 8 Generation Feature on Generation Generation Rev F Base Pre Rev F i Floating Point Unit v v v Virtual Mode Extensions Debugging Extensions Page Size Extension Time Stamp Counter AMD Model Specific Registers Physical Address Extensions Machine Check Exception CMPXCHGSB Instruction APIC SYSENTER and SYSEXIT Memory Type Range Registers Page Global Extension Machin
105. 6M w 0x0107 SVGA Packed pixel 8 bpp 1280x1024 256 f 0x0119 SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 1280x1024 32K A 0x011A SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 1280x1024 64K f 0x011B SVGA Packed pixel 32 bpp 1280x1024 16M w 0x011C SVGA Packed pixel 8 bpp 1600x1200 256 w 0x011D SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 1600x1200 32K A 0x011E SVGA Packed pixel 16 bpp 1600x1200 64K f Table 7 4 Matrox G400 VESA Modes Memory Interface The Matrox G400 supports a total of 32 megabytes of SGRAM SDRAM memory comprised of one or two banks of 8 16 or 32 Mbytes each In Power Graphics Mode the resolution depends on the amount of available memory Table 7 5 shows the memory configuration for each standard VESA resolution in pixel depth Single Frame Buffer Mode Single Z Buffer No Z Z 16 bits Z 32 bits Resolution 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit 32 bit 8 bit 16 bit 32 bit 8 bit 16 bit 32 bit 640x480 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 720x480 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 800x600 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 1024x768 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 1152x864 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 1280x1024 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 10M 1600x1200 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 16M 16M 16M 16M 1920x1080 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 16M 16M 16M 16M 1800x1440 8M 8M 8M 16M 8M 16M 16M 16M 16M 16M 1920x1200 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 8M 16M 16M 16M 16M
106. 7 24 CMOS Properties Dialog AMD 8111 Southbridge The Primary HDD Channel and Secondary HDD Channel tabs shown in Figure 7 25 contain the same information for each hard drive channel The user has two options for drive simulation an image of a hard drive created with DiskTool see Section 13 on page 167 or use of a real hard disk Using a real drive requires Windows 2000 and a drive that is able to be isolated locked from the rest of the system You cannot use the drive s that the OS and or the simulator reside on To use a drive image enter a file name in the Image Filename field A browse window is activated by pressing the right most button All disk devices Primary Master etc by default have the disk journaling feature turned on which allows simulations to write to the disk image during normal operation and not affect the contents of the real disk image This is useful for being able to kill a simulation in the middle for multiple copies of the simulator running at the same time etc Journal contents are saved in BSD checkpoint files but lost if you don t save a checkpoint before exiting To change journal settings or commit journal contents to the hard disk image go to the Device View Window then the AMD 8111 Southbridge then the configuration for the hard disk in question on either the Primary or Secondary IDE controller Here you can either commit the contents of the journal to the hard disk image or turn off journaling for
107. 83627HF PCI v Vp bd phasel 1 1 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI A Vp_bd_phase2 1 4 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI X Sahara FamilylOh 1 4 1 SB400 ITE8712SIO PCI X Shiner familylOh 1 4 1 SB700 ITE8712SIO PCI v Guam familylOh 1 4 1 SB800 k 0 PCIe d Dune 1 1 1 SB400 ITE8712SIO PCI X Drachma peso lp familylOh 2 6 1 SB700 W83627HF PCI X ati mako hd3870 1 1 1 SB600 ITE8712SIO PCIe e Table 15 1 Computer Platform Files BSD A 2 2 Device Files BSL Please see Section 7 Device Configuration on page 53 for device listings and descriptions A 2 3 Product Files CID A product file configures the CPU and Northbridge to represent and behave as an actual AMD product A product file will set the CPUID Family Model and Stepping the BrandID the MANID and fuses This is the recommended default uniprocessor platform 180 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 CPU AMD Public Paitai Mie Cru AD Cores HIN Revs Virtualization Release Athlon64 754_SH C0_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 754 CO Xx A Athlon64 754_SH CG_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 754 CG Xx A Athlon64 754_SH DO_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 754 DO Xx mv Athlon64 754_SH E0_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 754 EO Xx m Athlon64 939 JH E0 800MHz x2 id AMD Athlon64 2 939 EO Xx A Athlon64 939_SH CG_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 939 CG x A Athlon64 939 SH DO 800MH
108. 9 r Move if not sign SF 0 ei CMOVNS reg64 reg mem64 0 9 r Move if not sign SF 0 m CMOVP regl 6 reg memi6 0 A r Move if parity PF 1 m CMOVP reg32 reg mem32 0 A r Move if parity PF 1 m CMOVP reg64 reg mem64 0 A r Move if parity PF 1 v CMOVPE regl6 reg mem16 0 A r Move if parity even PF 1 m CMOVPE reg32 reg mem32 0 A r Move if parity even PF 1 Af CMOVPE reg64 reg mem64 0 A Jr Move if parity even PF 1 m CMOVNP regl6 reg memi 0 B r Move if not parity PF 0 ei CMOVNP reg32 reg mem32 0 B r Move if not parity PF 0 m CMOVNP reg64 reg mem64 0 B r Move if not parity PF 0 m CMOVPO regi6 reg memi 0 B r Move if parity odd PF 0 m CMOVPO reg32 reg mem32 0 B r Move if parity odd PF 0 m CMOVPO reg64 reg mem64 0 B r Move if parity odd PF 0 m CMOVL regi6 reg memi6 0 G ux Move if less SF OF m CMOVL reg32 reg mem32 0 C r Move if less SF OF Af CMOVL reg64 reg mem64 0 C r Move if less SF OF ei CMOVNGE reg16 reg mem16 0 C r pr if not greater or equal SF lt gt v CMOVNGE reg32 reg mem32 C r an if not greater or equal SF lt gt e CMOVNGE reg64 reg mem64 C Ze Se if not greater or equal SF lt gt e CMOVNL regl6 reg mem16 D r Move if not less SF OF Af CMOVNL reg32 reg mem32 D r Move if not less SF OF v CMOVNL reg64 reg mem64 D r Move if not less SF OF m CMOVGE regi6 reg meml 6 D Ze Move if greater or equal OF m CMOVGE reg32 reg mem
109. AC FA CD 00 00 00 01 IP Address Any Can be a static IP address assigned by your sys admin or a Chapter 7 Device Configuration 129 User Manual November 2010 DHCP acquired address Visibility Can be seen by external network and all simulator sessions running anywhere on the network Mediator String Hostname Table 7 10 MAC Address Assignments 7 25 4 2 Client Server simulated network This configuration uses fixed MAC addresses to allow this domain to be replicated in the mediator space without colliding with one another To allow real network access we will also run the mediator with a gateway at IP address 192 168 0 1 Example MAC FA CD 21 00 00 01 IP Address Static IP address 192 168 0 2 Visibility Accesses the real network via the mediator s gateway External network hosts can not directly communicate with this client Mediator String mydomain hostname Table 7 11 Client Server Simulator Server Example MAC FA CD 22 00 00 02 IP Address Static IP address 192 168 0 3 Visibility Accesses the real network via the mediator s gateway External network hosts can not directly communicate with this client Mediator String mydomain hostname Table 7 12 Client Server Simulator Client 1 The BSD s that contain the server and client can be run simultaneously on the same network without any collisions The
110. AGS register Shift an 8 bit register or memory 4 SAL teg meme l DO location left 1 bit v Shift an 8 bit register or memory SAL reg mem8 CL D2 4 location left the number of bits e specified in the CL register Shift an 8 bit register or memory location left the number of bits 4 SAL reg memgrinmg BB 6 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 16 bit register or memory 4 SAL reg meml6 1 DEW location left 1 bit v Shift a 16 bit register or memory SAL reg mem16 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits e specified in the CL register Shift a 16 bit register or memory location left the number of bits 4 SAL eee ee Gamay C1 Prom specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 32 bit register or memory 4 BAL reg mem32 1 DES location left 1 bit v Shift a 32 bit register or memory SAL reg mem32 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits ei specified in the CL register Shift a 32 bit register or memory d i EE location left the number of bits BED CHANSONS UND cb specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 64 bit register or memory 4 SAL reg mem64 1 DE Y location left 1 bit v Shift a 64 bit register or memory SAL reg mem64 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits D specified in the CL register Shift a 64 bit register or memory 7 4 3 location left the number of bits SAL reg mem64d immg GE specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift an 8 bit register or memory 4 SHL reg memd 1 DO location left l bit v
111. AMD AMD SimNow Simulator 4 6 1 User s Manual Revision Date 2 14 November 2010 Advanced Micro Devices Inc One AMD Place Sunnyvale CA 94088 simnow amd com AMDO 2004 2009 Advanced Micro Devices Inc The Contents of this document are provided in connection with Advanced Micro Devices Inc AMD products AMD makes no representations or watranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this publication and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice No license whether express implied arising by estoppels or otherwise to any intellectual property rights is granted by this publication Except as set forth in AMD s Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale AMD assumes no liability whatsoever and disclaims any express or implied warranty relating to its products including but not limited to the implied warranty of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or infringement of any intellectual property right AMD Ss products are not designed intended authorized or warranted for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body or in other applications intended to support or sustain life or in any other application in which the failure of AMD s product could create a situation where personal injury death or severe property or environmental damage may occur AMD reserves the ri
112. CPU analyzers devices Contains the simulator s device models doc Contains the latest versions of the simulator documentation o help Contains the simulator s help files i icons Contains icons used by the simulator s GUI components o images Contains image files e productfile Contains processor id files reg Contains register script files used to register simulator components o devel Contains the Emerald BIOS changes analyzer header files and monitor module example radeon Contains the ATI Radeon board configuration files Under Windows each model is a Windows DLL Under Linux each model is a Linux library Each model has a bel extension 2 4 Setting up Linux for the Simulator Make a file etc sysctl conf or add to the existing one This is here to make sure we get enough mmap able virtual address Space in 4K pages It defaults to 65536 which is generally OO eme vm max map count 1048576 This line doesn t need to be here for newer Linux kernels but some early AMD64 Linux kernels would log SEGVs even if a process had a handler for them which is what SimNow does debug exception trace 0 Example 2 1 Setting up Linux for the Simulator Then run sysctl p or make sure the boot sequence does this if you don t want to run it at each reboot Newer Linux distributions may set a per process memory limit by default SimNow allocates a large amount of memory that is never touched This untouche
113. Character Drawing 1bpp Rectangles Chapter 7 Device Configuration 71 User Manual November 2010 a Patterned Fills b Constant Shaded c Gouraud Shaded partially d Texture Mapping partially Trapezoids a Constant Shaded Lines a Auto Lines line open line close b Solid Lines line open line close 8 15 16 24 and 32 Bits Per Pixel video modes ILOAD Pseudo DMA Window Transfers Programmable transparent BLTer Linear packed pixel frame buffer Supported DirectX 6 1 Features Alpha TestO Alpha Blending Functions a Normal Blending b Transparency Blending c Additive Blending d Soft Additive Blending e Multiplicative Blending Depth Test Z Buffer 15 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 32 bit Texel Width 4 8 12 15 16 and 32 bit UV Texture Coordinate support DMA Vertex Engine Supported Graphics Modes The Matrox G400 provides three different display modes text VGA or SVGA VGA graphics and SVGA graphics Table 7 4 list all of the display modes which are available through BIOS calls Mode Number Type Organization Resolution No of colors Supported 0x00 VGA 40x25 Text 360x400 16 v 0x01 VGA 40x25 Text 360x400 16 wv 0x02 VGA 80x25 Text 720x400 16 A 0x03 VGA 80x25 Text 720x400 16 w 0x04 VGA Packed pixel 2 bpp 320x200 4 v 0x05 VGA Packed pixel 2 bpp 320x200 4 r4 0x06 VGA Packed pixel 1 bpp 640x200 2 w 0x07 VGA
114. Configuration dialog wimndouw eee 52 Figure 7 1 AweSim Processor Type Properties essere 56 Figure 7 2 AweSim Processor Logging Properties Dialog esses 57 Figure 7 3 AMD Opteron Processor Virtual Bank Select Line Configuration 60 Figure 7 4 AMD Athlon 64 Processor Bank Select Line Configuration sseeseesseee 60 Figure 7 5 DIMM Bank Options Properties Dialog eee 62 Figure 7 6 DIMM Module Properties Dialog 63 Figure 7 7 Graphics Device VGA Sub Device Properties Dialog 66 Figures ix User Manual November 2010 Figure 7 8 Graphics Device Frame Buffer SubDevice Properties sse 67 Figure 7 9 Matrox G400 Block Diagram 2 2 ertet rete reed eit iren ec 69 Figure 7 10 Matrox G400 Information Property Dialog eee 71 Figure 7 11 Matrox G400 Configuration Properties eee 72 Figure 7 12 Enable Full Hardware Acceleration on WindowsXP guest 77 Figure 7 13 ATI Radeon HD 3870 Configuration Information sss 79 Figure 7 14 Display Device GOEN d eet E Leah eite esiti ecd 80 Figure 7 15 Extended Display Identification Data Viewer 8l Figure 7 16 Super IO Properties Dialog Winbond W83627HF eee 83 Figure 7 17 Memory Configuration Properties Dialog eee 86 Figure 7 18 PCA9548 SMB Con
115. D operand and load their sum into the destination Exchange the contents of a 32 bit register with the contents of 32 bit XADD reg mem32 reg32 OF Cl Ze destination register or memory Af operand and load their sum into the destination Exchange the contents of a 64 bit register with the contents of 64 bit XADD reg mem64 reg64 OF Cl r destination register or memory e operand and load their sum into the destination Exchange the contents of AX register XCHG AX regl6 90 rw with the contents of a 16 bit ei register Exchange the contents of a 16 bit XCHG regl6 AX 90 rw register with the contents of the AX e register Exchange the contents of EAX register XCHG AX reg32 90 rd with the contents of a 32 bit d register Exchange the contents of a 32 bit XCHG reg32 AX 90 rd register with the contents of the EAX d register Exchange the contents of RAX register XCHG RAX reg64 90 rq with the contents of a 64 bit e register Exchange the contents of a 64 bit XCHG reg64 RAX 90 rq register with the contents of the RAX d register Exchange the contents of an 8 bit XCHG reg mem8 reg8 86 r register with the contents of an 8 v bit register or memory operand Exchange the contents of an 8 bit XCHG reg8 reg mem8 amp 86 r register or memory operand with the e contents of an 8 bit register Exchange the contents of a 16 bit XCHG reg mem16 reg16 87 r register with the contents of a 16 e bit register or memory operand Exchange
116. DR 32M Reg spd 32MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR 64M Reg spd 64MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR 128M Reg spd 128MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR 256M Reg spd 256MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR 512M Reg spd 512MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR 1G Reg spd 1024MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR 2G Reg spd 2048MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR 4G Reg spd 4096MB registered DDR memory simnow DDR2 128M spd 128MB DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 256M spd 256MB DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 512M spd 512MB DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 1G spd 1024MB DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 2G spd 2048MB DDR2 memory simnow_DDR2_4G spd 4096MB DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 8G spd 8192MB DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 16G spd 16384MB DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 128M Reg pd 128MB registered DDR2 memory simnow_DDR2_256M_Reg spd 256MB registered DDR2 memory simnow_DDR2_512M_Reg spd 512MB registered DDR2 memory simnow_DDR2_1G_Reg spd 1024MB registered DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 2G Reg spd 2048MB registered DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 4G Reg spd 4096MB registered DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 8G Reg spd 8192MB registered DDR2 memory simnow DDR2 16G Reg spd 16384MB registered DDR2 memory IBM 512 Reg spd 512MB registered DDR memory Smart DDR 128 2 133 spd 128MB DDR memory Table 15 4 Memory SPD Fil
117. DROMStatus Returns whether the drive is a BD ROM device SetBDROM offlonlOI1 Set master or slave to BD ROM device Blu ray SetConnectable offlonlOl1 Sets whether the sata port is available to connect a drive on the platform Disable clears the drive image and prevents execution of other automation commands GetConnectable Returns whether we can connect a drive A 7 4 USB 1 simnow gt usb usage Automation Command Description log enableldisable mifsopt Enables or disables Memory m Interrupt i Frame f StateChange s PCI Config p Transfer t or and IO 0 logging A 7 5 CMOS 1 simnow gt cmos usage Automation Command Description Load lt filepath gt Loads CMOS data stored at filepath For example cmos load c cmos dat Save lt filepath gt Saves CMOS data to filepath e g cmos save c cmos dat SetTime lt seconds gt lt minutes gt lt hours gt lt days since Sunday gt lt day of the month gt lt months since January gt lt years since 1900 gt Sets CMOS Time to specified time For instance emos SetTime 00 00 12 00 31 12 14 sets the CMOS time to Sunday December 31th 2004 at 12 00 00 GetByte lt addr gt Returns byte in CMOS that is stored at address addr 234 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description SetByte lt addr gt lt data gt Sets b
118. Device found at SCSI Port H Bus H Target A LUN Opening WDC UD128B8BB 8B8Df f di as PHYSICALDRIVEG Cylinders Media Type Completed Device has been successfully identified Disk Device found at SCSI Port H Bus A Target 1 LUN Opening WDC WD1i26GBB GBDAAL as PHYSICALDRIVE1 Cylinders Bytes 512 Media Type 12 Completed Device has been successfully identified Disk Device found at SCSI Port 1 Bus Target 1 LUN Opening IC35L 2Q AVER 7 as PHYSICALDRIVE2 Cylinders Heads Sectors Bytes Media Type Completed Device has been successfully identified Figure 13 1 DiskTool Shell Window DiskTool will only copy drives not partitions although it does have the ability to stop copying at the end of a given partition So for example you can copy the contents of a drive starting at the beginning of the drive and ending at the end of the 2nd partition but you can not copy only the 2nd partition LINUX Note The list box always shows dev fd0 and dev fd1 If you click on one of these and the physical device does not actually exist the GUI will hang for a short time and will then display information in the lower list box indicating that a 4Kb media is installed in this device DiskTool only recognizes device names dev hda through dev hdz In addition it looks for the file proc ide hd media and uses the information in that file to determine whether the device is a hard drive or a DVD CD drive If
119. EC ie ance Bae Sai Ait ee RA Shea ke 62 AMD 8151 Device eee 104 EOT ege Ee OBERE 114 ATAC Dey e i remote 14 109 Error WO genee gedet 145 LKA KEE 110 B F Base Address sse 171 Baud Rate etes eere ees 82 Fatis eterni heehee ete ET 80 BIOS ROM occa a idan iene 171 FAQ geet Eggs ess 177 BSD file oU ee heed 38 47 Flash ROM 5iueeceetie pi ep eR Ree 85 FLEDENYV nette etd etta 188 C Poppy EE 42 Checkpotntz cesare RR ee 47 Frame Buffer eee onseshel emen 64 Chip Selects ices rrt o DIT OE 84 FRSTOR uester tret ett reete 188 Clearing CMOS sess 173 ESAVE EE 188 MOSSER 93 173 LR KE 188 Code Generator 243 G Code Pages ie eene 188 COMA eee REIR Rer ee 80 Gate Ways eie edere d ene orent 128 EMS 80 GDB E 160 Comtinit eine diesen aie 41 94 GPIQ eiie eee 80 Configuration bie 5 Graphics iere etaed eere 2 63 67 Console Window eese 28 H CPUID ehe uA 186 CRA PCE se 5 deed 188 Host Operating Systems ssssssss 3 Create Device Connection seseseeeseeerreeeer ee 10 HyperTransport Technology Creating Floppy Disk Image 175 Gob r nt 23 esee 88 Cvcle Accurate sinises e 1 ibn dq EE 90 D Link capable devices 88 lU D 89 Debug Non Coherent sess 88 Find Pater 153 Ainin E BEEE E e 13 101 Read Write MSRS sees 152 Upstream Link
120. F FF FF eccccc 00000030 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 00000040 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF O0000050 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 00000060 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF DOOO00070 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF ECX EAX out omm omm omm ommo om mom m n C R W lt Bus gt lt Device in Hex Function Register Data TT 3 The bottom pane in the CPU Debugger Window is the debugger command line Enter a BX BM BR or BI on the debugger command line to setup and enable a breakpoint The BX BM BR and BI commands specify breakpoints on execution data access MSR access or I O access respectively Each of these commands requires an address parameter that specifies a linear address associated with the breakpoint An optional parameter can be used to specify the pass count i e the number of times the breakpoint should be hit before breaking into the debugger In addition the BM BR and BI commands accept an optional parameter that specifies whether to break on a read input or write output transaction to the specified address Examples of each command are shown in Table 10 1 Chapter 10 CPU Debugger 149 CPU Registers Disassembly Instruction Opcode cs rl elip Memory Dump Memory Dump in ASCII Memory Dump Address Information and Message Output Command Line User Manual November 2010 4 After setting up and enabling the breakpoint s enter G on the command line to resu
121. Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 xr ag Configured with product 4 core Node 0 ID file amd xxxx id This device group would externally be functionally the same as our previous AMD 4 core CPU xxxx example although it has the additional layer where it cleanly reuses 4 core Node We could also reuse 4 core Node for other device groups that represent a particular hardware implementation of a 4 core node such as the theoretical AMD 4 core CPU yyyy configured with the theoretical product ID file amd yyyy id Or a DeerHound RevB QuadCore Socket LI configured with the product ID file Family IOhDR L1 BO id 3 3 5 3 Example SuperlO device For SimNow developers device groups can be a technique for developing SimNow devices in a layered manner promoting optimal code reuse Before device groups were available SuperIO devices were written as device libraries It is cleaner to implement SuperlO device models with device groups Typically SuperIO devices consist of multiple functional blocks such as a UART LPT PS2 controller Floppy controller etc Device groups provide a way to develop each functional block as discrete devices that can later be grouped to represent a particular SuperIO controller 3 3 6 Creating a Device Group GUI From the Device Viewer window select the devices you want to group then Ctrl left click a device to add or remove it from being selected left click drag the back
122. Graphies Device sc to ue ei ortae idis euasit aes ai de pe ies 65 deo Matrox MG AAD POU AGP ee de Red RYE Oen vas eaae uk 69 74 6 ATI Radeon HD 3870 iid tege a E TL EI Dr oa WERE 78 7 1 Super IO Devices Winbond W83627HF SIO ITE 8712 SIO 82 55 Memory Device deele ere 85 I PCAOSAS SMB DeviQe oec snos Se itera IRURE IE 88 TIO PCEA9556 SMB D6VICE de tese eo Peel anb I D aaa oe aa 89 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device sse 90 7 12 AMD 8111 Southbridge Devices IO Hubs esee 94 RE PGUBUS EE 100 TAA AMD 8131 PCEX Controller EE 102 7 15 AMD 8132 PCI X Controller tnnt 103 LLO PCISX Test De VIC use Et EE 105 7 17 AMD 8151 AGP Bridge Device soto eoe nee prete APA 106 7 18 Rad Device Compaq SmartArray 5304 sese 108 7 19 SMB Hub Device uses ierit ern oe I Rn ENS UPS eH AINS ER RES E TUUS PD De Ren S 109 E E ER 111 Td EXDIServer Device yne hee 112 7 22 USB Keyboard and USB Mouse Deviees seen 113 T23 XER Deyi CE ee ee 114 23 SIGN NEE 115 iv Contents User Manual November 2010 heels Recoding XUR RE 115 1523 EE ele XTR RECO EE 115 T23 N3 ATR EE 115 7 23 1 4 Stop XTR Ee E 116 Pee Dear XTR SUCUT oee a E E 118 1232 14 Ee EE 118 7 23 2 2 XTR Binary File Contents oe EEN EEN 120 1 23 3 MOdePlags uisi rere REY SUN UR AINE OS IA TR URNA SEATS AN SURE WANN EE 120 T234 Cm
123. Head 16 MB SGRAM 300 MHz RAMDAC Millennium G400 SingleHead 16 MB SDRAM 300 MHz RAMDAC Note Restart or reset your simulation for the settings to take effect Figure 7 11 Matrox G400 Configuration Properties The BIOS ROM File input field gives you the ability to load different Matrox G400 BIOS ROMs into the device This is in particular useful if Matrox releases a new BIOS ROM file which has improvements or bug fixes To check for new Matrox BIOS ROM releases go to http www matrox com mea support drivers bios The Matrox G400 ROM has a maximum size of 32 Kbytes and is assigned to ISA bus address 0x000C0000 0x000C7FFF which is the industry standard location The Configuration tab lets you choose from six different Matrox G400 graphics adapters For instance if you prefer to use a Matrox Millennium G400 SingleHead 16 Mbytes of SDRAM with a 300 MHz RAMDAC instead of the default adapter then select this adapter from the Millennium G400 Adapters list To apply the new configuration click on the Ok button Note if you make any changes in the Configuration tab you must restart or reset your simulation before the new configuration will take effect Difference from Real Hardware The Matrox G400 graphics device is a faithful simulation of the software visible portion of a Matrox G400 adapter it is not a model of the specific Matrox G400 hardware Because of this the graphics device is not equivalent in certain are
124. IOAPIC Bus cpu type K8 modifyregistry System Bus Frequency 100 xtrnb xtrfile lt filename xml gt xtrnb debug 1 xtrnb xtrlogfile lt filename playback log gt SetLogFile lt filename log gt SetLogFileEnabled 1 SetErrorLogFile lt filename errlog gt qur ARE Chapter 7 Device Configuration 113 User Manual November 2010 SetErrorLogFileEnabled 1 GO Tee PE Ruin Cia cae sell 7 23 1 4 Stop XTR Playback XTR Playback will stop automatically when End Of Trace EOT event is reached It could also be stopped prematurely by clicking on the stop button or by executing the stop automation command Initialization and Reset State XTR Record does not have any special Initialization or Reset state Init from BSD The BSD contents of XTRNB are loaded The XTR XML file is skipped the number of lines to the last event read and the system prepares itself for playback Init from Automation Script The CPU is initialized from the initialization data in XML and the system prepares itself for playback This method does not support persistent storage of XTR state to be replayed later Reset The XTR file handle is closed All the queued events are flushed Simulated DIMM memory is flushed and unallocated Contents of a BSD XTR Record contains xtrsvc which is described below in addition to modules in the simulation For XTR Playback the BSD is composed of following modules shell 0 The s
125. MWAIT Monitor Wait The simulator does not recognize this instruction Therefore the simulator generates an invalid opcode exception Appendix A 225 User Manual November 2010 A 7 Automation Commands The simulator can be controlled externally through a scripting interface by issuing automation commands These commands are directed toward either the shell or toward any device that is part of the currently loaded BSD Automation commands are plain ASCII text and are sent to the simulator s automation interface The method for sending automation commands to the interface and for retrieving the response is host dependent on the host OS Figure 15 1 shows the simulators Console Window The Console Window is the user interface to the simulators automation interface All automation commands can be send from the Console Window to the simulators automation interface as explained in the following sections imNow simnow exe Using image path Images Using library path devices 1 simnow gt Opening C SimNow solo bsd info creating device 6 Debugger creating device AweSim Processor creating device AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel creating device AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge creating device RMD 8111 170 Hub creating device Dimm Bank creating device PCI Bus creating device Winbond W83627HF SIO creating device Memory Device creating device
126. NFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 18 Function 3 Register 48 ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 10 Logger AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 0 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 18 Function 3 Register 4C ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 10 Logger AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel 0 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 19 Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data 000000FF 10 Logger AweSim Processor 0 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 1A Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data OOOOOOFF 10 Logger Dimm Bank 0 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 1B Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data OOOOOOFF 10 Logger Emerald Graphics 0 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 1C Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data OOOOOOFF 10 Logger Memory Device 0 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 1D Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data OOOOOOFF 10 Logger PCI Bus 0 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 1E Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data OOOOOOFF T ionge EE PCI CONFIG READ Bus D Device 1F Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data 000000FF Journal PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 7 Function 0 Register 43 ByteCount 01 Data 00000030 Journal 2 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 7 Function 0 Register 43 ByteCount 01 Data 00000080 Joundld PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 7 Function 0 Register 43 ByteCount 01 Data 00000080 Keyboard Controller 0 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 7 Function 0 Register 43 ByteCount 01 Data 00000030 Keyboard Controller Scancode Translator 0 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 7 Function 0 Register 43 ByteCount 01
127. OF 42 r Move if carry CF 1 v CMOVC reg32 reg mem32 OF 42 r Move if carry CF 1 v CMOVC reg64 reg mem64 OF 42 r Move if carry CF 1 m CMOVNAE reg16 reg mem16 OF 42 r Move if not above or equal CF 1 m CMOVNAE reg32 reg mem32 OF 42 r Move if not above or equal CF 1 v CMOVNAE reg 4 reg mem 4 OF 42 r Move if not above or equal CF 1 m CMOVNB regl6 reg mem16 OF 43 r Move if not below CF 0 m CMOVNB reg32 reg mem32 OF 43 r Move if not below CF 0 m CMOVNB reg64 reg mem64 OF 43 r Move if not below CF 0 Af CMOVNC regi6 reg memi OF 43 r Move if not carry CF 0 Ff CMOVNC reg32 reg mem32 OF 43 r Move if not carry CF 0 m CMOVNC reg64 reg mem64 OF 43 r Move if not carry CF 0 m CMOVAE regl6 reg memi OF 43 r Move if above or equal CF 0 m CMOVAE reg32 reg mem32 OF 43 r Move if above or equal CF 0 m CMOVAE reg64 reg mem64 OF 43 r Move if above or equal CF 0 m CMOVZ regl6 reg mem16 OF 44 r Move if zero ZF 1 m CMOVZ reg32 reg mem32 OF 44 r Move if zero ZF 1 m CMOVZ reg 4 reg mem64 OF 44 r Move if zero ZF 1 Ff CMOVE regl6 reg mem16 OF 44 r Move if equal ZF 1 Af CMOVE reg32 reg mem32 OF 44 r Move if equal ZF 1 m CMOVE reg64 reg mem64 OF 44 r Move if equal ZF 1 m CMOVNZ regl6 reg memi OF 45 r Move if not zero ZF 0 v CMOVNZ reg32 reg mem32 OF 45 r Move if not zero ZF 0 m 194 Appendix A
128. OR reg mem8 imm8 80 6 ib operand with an 8 bit immediate value ef and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 16 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem16 imm16 81 6 iw operand with a 16 bit immediate value Ff and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 32 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem32 imm32 81 6 id operand with a 32 bit immediate value e and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 64 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem64 imm32 81 6 id operand with a sign extended 32 bit ei immediate value and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 16 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem16 imm8 83 6 ib operand with a sign extended 8 bit e immediate value and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 32 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem32 imm8 amp 83 6 ib operand with a sign extended 8 bit e immediate value and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 64 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem64 imm8 83 6 ib operand with a sign extended 8 bit ei immediate value and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of an 8 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem8 reg8 30 fe operand with the contents of an 8 bit ef register and store the result in the destination XOR the contents of a 16 bit destination register or memory XOR reg mem16 reg16 31
129. OS Part Number 113 B33901 026 BIOS Date 03 11 08 Memory Size 512 MB Memory Type DDR4 ok II me j cw jJ Figure 7 13 ATI Radeon HD 3870 Configuration Information Figure 7 14 shows detailed information about the connected display device such as Basic Display Parameters Standard Timings Color Estabilished Timings and Raw Data see Figure 7 15 Additional display devices can be added and used by importing Extended Display Identification Data EDID To import EDID open the GUI device property dialog and Chapter 7 Device Configuration 77 User Manual November 2010 then click on the Import EDID button Automation commands can be used alternatively see section A 7 32 ATI Radeon HD 3870 on page 256 EDID versions up to version 1 3 are supported EDID files contain 128 byte of user defined EDID information in binary format Note that SimNow does not provide any tools to create EDID binary files The Display Device drop down list can be used to select a different display device By default the ATI Radeon HD 3870 is connected to the AMD SimNow Display Device r ATI Radeon HD 3870 14 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Configuration Du General Basic Display Parameters Standard Timings Color Established Timings Raw Data Display Device Model AMD SimNow Display Device AMDOO1W Flat Panel TFT digital el Impo
130. PIO 3 enables segment GPIO 4 enables segment GPIO 5 enables segment GPIO 6 enables segment GPIO 7 enables segment SMBHub Configuration NO SEGMENT NO SEGMENT NO SEGMENT NO SEGMENT NO SEGMENT NO SEGMENT NO SEGMENT NO SEGMENT Figure 7 33 SMB Hub Properties Dialog Differences from Real Hardware This device model is the combination of two physical devices connected in a specific way The model attempts to match the functionality of the physical devices from a programmer s perspective The SMBus protocol is not modeled Also the SMBus address of the PCA9556 is programmable based on pin strapping whereas this model has a fixed SMBus base address 108 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 20 AT24C Device The AT24C device is a Serial EEPROM device It can be configured to store 16 32 or 64Kb of EEPROM The device has an SMB bus interface for access to its internal registers It is typically used to store platform specific configuration data Interface The AT24C device has a SMB interface For example this device can be connected to a PCA9548 or PCA9556 device see Section 7 9 PCA9548 SMB Device on page 88 or Section 7 10 PCA9556 SMB Device on page 89 Contents of a BSD The current state of all internal registers and any internal state variables are saved in the BSD Configuration Options The AT24C devi
131. ROM contains for programming information purposes Chapter 7 Device Configuration 85 User Manual November 2010 7 9 PCA9548 SMB Device The PCA9548 is an 8 channel System Management Bus SMB switch Interface The PCA9548 has one input port and eight output ports as well as a programmable interface that directs the switch which output port to forward messages to Initialization and Reset State The PCA9548 has the input value specified in its configuration dialog window Contents of a BSD The PCA9548 saves its SMB base address and input pin value Configuration Options D PCA9548 Device 10 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging SMB Config SMB Base Address Oxe0 Figure 7 18 PCA9548 SMB Configuration Properties Dialog The PCA9548 allows you to set its SMB base address 86 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 10PCA9556 SMB Device The PCA9556 is a registered System Management Bus SMB interface When queried from its SMB base address it returns the value of its input pins Interfaces The PCA9556 has one output port Initialization and Reset State The PCA9556 has the input value specified in its configuration dialog window Contents of a BSD The PCA9556 saves its SMB base address and input pin value Configuration Options D PCA9556 Device 11 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging SMB Config SMB Base Address 0x30 Figure 7 19 PCA9556 SMB Confi
132. T reg mem8 pe 2 Ee or memory operand v e Complements the bits in a 16 bit NOT reg memi6 E Se or memory operand v e Complements the bits in a 32 bit NOT se gemenys EY ES SE or memory operand v Complements the bits in a 64 bit NOT reg mem64 dus register or memory operand v g OR the contents of AL with an OR Alu zmms OC th immediate 8 bit value v OR the contents of AX with an OR AX dun ae immediate 16 bit value v OR the contents of EAX with an OR BAX imm32 DECR immediate 32 bit value v y OR the contents of RAX with an OR RAX imm64 mE immediate 64 bit value v OR the contents of an 8 bit register OR reg mem8 imm8 amp 80 1 ib or memory operand and an immediate 8 n d bit value OR the contents of a 16 bit register OR reg mem16 imm16 81 1 iw or memory operand and an immediate A 16 bit value OR the contents of a 32 bit register OR reg mem32 imm32 81 1 id or memory operand and an immediate e 32 bit value OR the contents of a 64 bit register OR reg mem64 imm32 81 1 id or memory operand and a sign extended ei immediate 32 bit value OR the contents of a 16 bit register OR reg mem16 imm8 83 1 ib or memory operand and a sign extended ef immediate 8 bit value Appendix A 205 User Manual November 2010 Instruction S ted Mnemonic Opcode Description uus OR the contents of a 32 bit register OR
133. TION KEY 7 gt N alt b lt ALT BRAKE Table 15 14 Prefix Sequences keyboard text A 7 27 JumpDrive 1 simnow jumpdrive usage Automation Command Description LoadImage lt HostFileName gt Loads the contents of the specified image file lt HostFileName gt to the memory SaveImage lt HostFileName gt Saves the contents of the memory to an image file on the host specified by lt HostFileName gt ImportFile lt HostFileName gt lt ImageFileName gt Imports the requested file into the image lt ImageFileName gt using the given host file name lt HostFileName gt ExportFile lt ImageFileName gt lt HostFileName gt Exports the requested file from the image lt ImageFileName gt to the given host file name lt HostFileName gt Initialize lt SizeInMB gt Initialize the jump drive image with a single partition of the requested size specified by SizelInMB The JumpDrive supports image sizes from 64 Mbytes to 8192 Mbytes 8 Gbytes ImportDir HostPathName lt ImagePathName gt Imports a directory from the host system into the jump drive The host path name lt HostPathName gt can contain wildcards in the last element If the last element of the HostPathName does not contain wildcards and points to a directory then is assumed The image path name lt ImagePathName gt must be the name of a directory If it does not exist it will be created ExportDir lt ImagePathName
134. TR Binary file The last record in the binary file must have a count of Zero to indicate end of memory image 7 23 3 ModeFlags ModeFlags defines some of the states of the CPU that are important for execution The upper 32 bits store the Execution Control flags e g HLT and ignore interrupts for 1 instruction when we change stack segment The lower 32 bits is redundant from other initialization values in the XTR initialization but is there to maintain code consistency Table 7 7 shows the Execution Control Flags upper 32 bit Execution Control Flag Value Description BIUI LOCK 0x00000001 Bus is locked BIUI RESET 0x00000002 Processor RESET pin BIUI INIT 0x00000004 INIT pin BIUI INTR 0x00000008 Interrupt BIUI NMI 0x00000010 NMI BIUI SMI 0x00000020 SMI BIUI IGNNE 0x00000040 Floating point IGNNE BIUI A20M 0x00000080 A20Mask BIUI PAUSE 0x00000100 PAUSE BIUI HOLD 0x00000200 HOLD BIUI UNUSED 0x00000400 Unused BIUI STOP 0x00000800 Pseudo pin that stops simulation Table 7 7 Execution Control Flags Table 7 8 shows other internal execution control flags Some flags may be AweSim specific Execution Control Flag Value Description ECF SMCRESTART 0x00001000 SMC detected in current translation restart required ECF GENEXCEPTION 0x00002000 SVM virtual interrupt pending ECF VINTR 0x00004000 INIT pin 118 Chapter 7 Device Configuration
135. UD EE 17 Figure 3 10 Device Group EE 18 Figure 3 11 Example DIMM Device Ee EEN 20 Figure 3 12 Created DIMM Device Group Ae Eed 21 Figure 3 13 Children of DIMM Device Group eese 21 ett E ENER 23 Figure 3 15 Console WindOw EE 28 Figure 3 16 Progress Meter and Diagnostic Porte 20 Figure 3 172 CPU Translation E EE 29 Figure 3 18 CPU Real MIPS Graph etit edi ak iue tec ins 30 Figure 3 19 CPU Invalidatiou Graph EE 30 Figure 3 20 CPU Exception Rate Graph ree ioca ede d eb i e ede ics 30 Figure 3 2 CPU PIO Bate E EE 31 Figure 3 22 CPU MMIO Rate Graph eege Eeer 31 Figure 3 23 Primary Secondary and Floppy Displays eese 31 Figure 4 1 DiskTool Dialogue Window AAA 36 Figure 4 2 Disk Pool Shell Window ee 36 Figure 4 5 New Image EE 37 Figure 4 4 Create Blank EE 27 Figure 4 5 Disk Tool Operation Successful a er retire deed 38 Figure 5 1 Main Window No BSD Loaded eene 39 Figure 5 2 Main Window BSD Loaded ettet tetris tree eet annees 41 Figure 5 3 Device Window ei eR a essai iiai ENEE deet deiis 42 Figure 5 4 Installing WindowsXP eeeseeseeesesseeseseessrssrssresseserestesseesresrensessresreeseesesreesee 44 Figure 5 5 Special Keys EE EE 45 Figure 6 1 Solo bsd Configuration esesseeesesseeseseessrserssresseserssresseseresrensessresesseeseeseeesee 49 Figure 6 2 Connections Tab of Device Properties Wimdouw eee 50 Figure 6 3 PCI Bus
136. WARNING Changes in these parameters are generally only looked at during PCI config at BIOS initialization Frame Buffer Size MBytes Accelerator Enabled YESA BIOS Extensions Enabled Figure 7 8 Graphics Device Frame Buffer SubDevice Properties Difference from Real Hardware The Emerald Graphics device currently does not simulate any specific graphics hardware it simulates something functionally like a modern graphics adapter with only 2D acceleration implemented at this time Drivers are Windows only at the moment When the VGA display window has the focus any keyboard messages and mouse click messages received by the window are routed via a DEVCWINDOWMSG message through the simulators I O subsystem The keyboard or mouse device accepts these messages and simulates key presses and key releases to match the keys While certain key combinations do not result in the generation of keyboard messages by the OS this does enable you to use the real keyboard to interact with the simulation in many cases Supported VESA BIOS Graphics Modes Only supports flat and linear frame buffer with 16 bit 64K 5 6 5 colors and 32 bit 16 8M 8 8 8 8 colors modes Table 7 2 shows the subset of standard VESA mode numbers supported Mode Number Resolution Color depth 10Eh 320x200 16 bit 111h 640x480 16 bit 114h 800x600 16 bit 117h 1024x768 16 bit 11Ah 1280x1024 16 bit Table 7 2 Supported Standard VESA M
137. Window dialog box To view this dialog select the View Message Log entry from the Main Window shell menu A sample of this dialog is shown in Figure 9 1 Chapter 9 Logging 143 User Manual November 2010 lt 1 SimNow Message Log Devices AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 0 AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 0 Log to File simnow log AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel 0 AT24C Device 0 AweSim Processor 0 C Leg to Console I Debugger 0 Dimm Bank 0 Log to Window 100 Buffer Size t lines Fast DMA 0 Fast DMA 1 Dimmdevice Bank 0 Simulated Size 10000000 Fast DMA 2 Dimmdevice Bank 2 Simulated Size 10000000 Fast DMA 3 Connected to pipe SimNow Com1l Fast DMA 4 Connected to pipeSimNow Com2 Fast DMA 5 Fast DMA 6 Fast DMA 7 IDE Controller 0 IDE Controller 1 IDE Drive 0 IDE Drive 1 IDE Drive 2 IDE Drive 3 10 Logger AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 0 10 Logger amp MD 8111 1 0 Hub 0 10 Logger amp MD 8151 AGP Tunnel 0 10 Logger AT 24C Device 0 10 Logger amp weSim Processor 0 10 Logger Dimm Bank 0 10 Logger Matrox R MGA G400 Graphics Adapter 0 10 Logger Memory Device 0 IO Logger PCI Bus 0 10 Logger Winbond W83627HF SIO 0 Journal 0 Journal 1 Journal 2 Journal 3 Keyboard Controller 0 Keyboard Controller Scancode Translator 0 Matrox R MG4 G400 Graphics Adapter 0 Memory Device 0 PCI Bus 0 SubDevAta 0 Winbond W83627HF SIO 0 Clear Window Save Window Contents
138. X and the remainder in RDX ENTER imm16 0 CB iw 00 Create a procedure stack frame amp ENTER imm16 1 CB iw 01 Create a nested stack frame for a procedure ENTER imml6 imm8 CB iw ib Create a nested stack frame for a procedure Perform signed division of AX by the contents of an 8 bit register or IDIV reg mem8 F6 7 memory location and store the e quotient in AL and the remainder in AH Perform signed division of DX AX by the contents of a 16 bit register or IDIV reg mem16 F7 7 memory location and store the Af quotient in AX and the remainder in DX Perform signed division of EDX EAX by the contents of a 32 bit register or IDIV reg mem32 F7 7 memory location and store the e quotient in EAX and the remainder in EDX Perform signed division of RDX RAX by the contents of a 64 bit register or DIV reg mem64 F7 7 memory location and store the e quotient in RAX and the remainder in RDX Multiply the contents of AL by the contents of an 8 bit memory or MUL eg mong F6 5 register operand and put the signed v result in AX Multiply the contents of AX by the contents of a 16 bit memory or MUL SOS RENS Pr ZS register operand and put the signed v result in DX AX Multiply the contents of EAX by the contents of a 32 bit memory or MUL reg mem32 F7 5 register operand and put the signed v result in EDX EAX Multiply the contents of RAX by the contents of a 64 bit memory or MUL reg meme4 F7 5 register operand and put
139. Z id AMD Athlon64 1 939 DO Xx e Athlon64 939_SH E0_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 939 EO Xx v Athlon64 AM2_BH G1B_ 800MHz x2 id AMD Athlon64 2 AM2 GIB mv mv Athlon64 AM2_JH F2G_ 800MHz x2 id AMD Athlon64 2 AM2 F2G A A Athlon64 AM2_SH FO_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 AM2 FO A A Athlon64 S1 BH GIB 800MHz x2 id AMD Athlon64 2 S1 GIB v v Athlon64 S1 JH F2G 800MHz x2 id AMD Athlon64 2 S1 F2G m m Athlon64 S 1_SH FO_ 800MHz id AMD Athlon64 1 S1 FO m m Opteron 940_JH EO_ 800MHz x2 id AMD Opteron 2 940 EO x m Opteron 940 SH B3 800MHZ id AMD Opteron 1 940 B3 x m Opteron 940 SH CO 800MHZ id AMD Opteron 1 940 CO x v Opteron 940 SH CG 800MHZ id AMD Opteron 1 940 CG x m Opteron 940 SH DO 800MHZz id AMD Opteron 1 940 DO x m Opteron 940_SH E0_ 800MHz id AMD Opteron 1 940 EO x m Opteron L1_JH FO_ 800Mhz x2 id AMD Opteron 2 L1 FO m m Opteron L1 JH F2G 800Mhz x2 id AMD Opteron 2 L1 F2G m m Opteron L1 SH PO 800Mhz id AMD Opteron 1 L1 FO A A Family10hDR L1_A0 id Family 10h 4 Ll AO A A FamilylOhDR L1 BO id Family 10h 4 Ll BO A m Family10hDR L1_C0 id Family 10h 4 L1 CO m m FamilylOhDR AMQ2 BO id Family 10h 4 AM2 BO m m FamilylOhRB AM3 CO id Family 10h 4 AM3 CO m v Family 0hBL AM3_C2A id Family 10h 4 AM3 C2A m x FamilylOhHY G3M DOA id Family 10h 12 or 8 G34 D0A v x FamilylOhHY G3S DOA id Family 10h 6 or 4 G34 DOA m x Familyl10hHY L1_DOA id Family 10h 6 Ll DOA A Xx Familyllh Sl AQ id Family 11h 2 S1 AO A x Familyllh Sl BO i
140. aS secpeatateasaceusdecaleaseenaas 246 A 7 20 Matrox MGA G400 Graphics eese enne 246 p WOMEN GNI we c M cx 246 PR Roc ME 5 Nc Ma NEP EE 247 3 123 MEMORY DOVICR cu acci x S ERR axis EE 247 E T24 REBELDE 249 E RT Ab seit ds ear cuca teal ess tn cto a ae ie ntc ect Aad 249 A 720 1 Keyboard and e 251 ACL2 SUMP DIVE EE 252 A T28 VELO EE 254 AT29 ZAR OUS eto ce a Ga Such wad eee dee 255 A 7 30 ATI SB400 SB600 SB700 SB800 essen 255 ATIL ATR EEN 256 A732 AL Radeon HD 3870 iis ue cian rrt Do a E este sateen 256 E SNELRSASU E cabo Ure teniente toD N b teet da eon 257 A 7 34 IT REES 257 A 7 35 ATI RD890S RD890 RD780S RX880 essere 257 Contents vii User Manual November 2010 Viii Contents User Manual November 2010 Figures Figure 3 1 Main Window In Simulation eene y Figure 3 2 Device Window isis inse eR eae eee ie spud eee 9 Figure 3 3 Workspace Popup Menu eerie erento seek enu oe tag ea e eee eb Fea esee dee 10 Figure 3 4 Add Connection Dialog of Device Properties Wmdow 11 Figure 3 5 Computer Simulation in cheetah lp bsd File sss 12 Figure 3 6 Device group BSD with one machine group and three child devices 16 Figure 3 7 Device group different conceptual view devices are inside groups 17 Figure 3 8 Device Group 2 group devices 1 library deviece 17 Figure 2 9 Modify GEO
141. achine Notice also that domains one and two are using identical BSDs that are running simultaneously To prevent collisions on the external network the mediator will not route broadcast packets to these sessions as they are using a fixed MAC classification The gateway will be able to do network address translation NAT for each BSD in each domain to make sure that there are no collisions between the two domains External Network mediator s g 192 168 0 1 G 163 1B1 0 14 163 181 0 14 192 168 0 1 Domain 2 Clients using Fixed MACs Domain 3 Same as from Domain 1 BSD 3 fa cd 00 00 00 01 myhost 8196 Figure 7 37 Visibility Diagram Chapter 7 Device Configuration 131 User Manual November 2010 7 26 Plug and Play Monitor Device The Plug and Play Monitor device PnP Monitor conforms to the VESA Plug and Play Monitor specification and therefore supports the DDC2B standard DDC Display Data Channel is the Plug and Play standard for monitors DDC monitors are designed to meet the VESA Video Electronic Standards Association standard that defines the DDC implementation If the video card also supports the DDC standard it gets from the PnP monitor device all the information about its features and makes consequently an automatic configuration for the best refresh values depending on the selected resolution The Plug and Play monitor device supports the DDC1 and DDC2B standards DDC1 is primitive and a point
142. alue 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000010000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt 122 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000010000000100 gt lt Data Length 16 Value 00000100000001000000
143. and device state come from the known device External connections from the devices you grouped are recreated as connections to your new created device group All of this is done automatically by the wizard when you click Finish 3 3 7 Creating a Device Group Automation Commands Although it is simpler to create a device group in the GUI it is also possible to create a device group on the console using shell automation commands First we group a set of specified devices into an Unnamed Group Then we can customize our Unnamed Group by specifying device group options Next we export it to a file as a known device with a new identity as a device instead of just the generic Unnamed Group Finally we can replace our Unnamed Group created device with a created device instance of our new known device Here are the details of these commands You can specify devices to get grouped into an Unnamed Group device 26 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 shell GroupDevices devices We can modify an existing created device group s options shell SetDeviceGroupOption device group ExternalPortMap ExportDeviceState variable args Specifically we can add remove and rename the internal to external port mappings between a device child and its parent device group shell SetDeviceGroupOption device ExternalPortMap Add device ez l t mai outi shell SetDeviceGroupOpt
144. ary Secondary Master Slave Image as shown in Figure 7 25 on page 97 Change a hard drive or DVD Or CD ROM image Go to the Southbridge Properties page HDD Primary Secondary Channel If using a DVD CD ROM image check the DVD ROM checkbox as shown in Figure 7 25 on page 97 Go to the Main Window File Menu Set Floppy Image Or Go to the SIO properties page Super IO tab see Figure 7 16 on page 83 Go to the System BIOS Properties page Memory Change a BIOS image Configuration tab see Figure 7 17 on page 86 Change the Init File entry Table 3 2 Device Window Quick Reference Change a floppy drive image 14 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 3 3 Device Groups A platform bsd consists of devices and each device is an instance of either a device library bsl or so or a device group bsg A device group is an aggregation of devices into a single composite device that has some customized aspects includes its name icon ports initial and default state Device groups are a particular class of devices They have the same properties and characteristics as traditional devices but also allow the user to extend and tailor specific device s to meet a particular hardware implementation or configuration Device groups provide a method that allows the user to group or collect one or more devices libraries or groups into one composite de
145. as Any issues related 70 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 to timing such as the vertical retrace time will be different Any software that depends on exact timing behavior may not function correctly The following features are only partially implemented Any software that depends on these features may not function correctly Translucency Full Alpha Blending Full Texture Mapping Gouraud Shaded Fills ALPHA FOG STENCIL Trapezoids functions Bitblts a Color Patterning 8x8 b Expansion Character Drawing 1 bpp Planar Lines a With Line style b With Depth c Polyline Polysegment using Vector Pseudo DMA Mode Image Load ILOAD a Linear Color Expansion Character Drawing 1 bpp b Loading the Texture Color Palette Loading any accelerator registers through the Pseudo DMA Window ZBuffer Direct Access Procedure when ZBuffer is in AGP Space Table Fog Video Scaler Texture Unit blending Texture Staging Supported 2D Features Bus Mastering PCI AGP Raster Operations 0 D I S D amp S D amp S S D amp S D D S D amp S D amp S D S D DI S S D IS DIS 1 Hardware Clipping Software Hardware Cursor a Three Color Cursor b XGA Cursor c X Windows Cursor d 16 Color Palletized Cursor Bitblts a Two Operand b Transparent Two Operand c With Expansion Character Drawing lbpp Image Load ILOAD a Two operand b With Expansion
146. ase Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DSLimit Data 00000000FFFFFFFF gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DSFlags Data 00000CF3 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FS Data 00000038 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FSBase Data 000000007FFDEOOO gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FSLimit Data 0000000000000FFF gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item FSFlags Data 000004F3 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item GS Data 00000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item GSBase Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item GSLimit Data 000000000000FFFF gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item GSFlags Data 00000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item LDTR Data 00000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item LDTBase Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item LDTLimit Data 000000000000FFFF gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item LDTFlags Data 00000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item TR Data 00000028 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item TSSBase Data 0000000080042000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item TSSLimit Data 00000000000020AB gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item TSSFlags Data 00000089 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item IDTBase Data 000000008003F400 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item IDTLi
147. ation command 1 simnow gt shell gdb 2233 lt ENTER gt e Start gdb gdb gt set architecture 1386 x86 64 lt ENTER gt gdb gt target remote 2233 lt ENTER gt 11 2 4 Using Two Separate Machines e Start the simualtor on simnow host e Run the following automation command 1 simnow gt shell gdb lt ENTER gt e Start gdb on gdb host gdb gt set architecture 1386 x86 64 lt ENTER gt gdb gt target remote simnow host 2222 ENTER 11 3Linux Host Serial Port Communication When running the simulator on a Linux host the serial port is able to communicate with external host applications via either a named pipe or the host serial port If the user has configuired named pipe communication the simualtor will set up an input pipe and an Chapter 11 Debug Interface 159 User Manual November 2010 output pipe at simnow comX simnow in and simnow comX simnow out External applications should read data from the simulation using the simnow out named pipe Conversely external applications should send serial data to the simulation using the simnow in pipe Note that it is not possible for two simualtor sessions to communicate with each other on the same host using named pipes This is an issue that will be fixed in a future version of the simulator When the simaultor serial port has been configuired to use the host serial port the simualtor will o
148. available for BIOS probing but are not used to configure the DIMM model The RAM array for each DIMM is sized based on parameters contained in the SPD array SPD array bytes 5 and 31 are used to calculate the size of the DIMM s RAM array If byte 0 in the SPD array has a value of zero then the DIMM device does not respond to any SMBUS read attempts on the module This indicates to the reading device that an SPD ROM is not available on the DIMM module By appropriately setting bytes 5 and 31 and clearing byte 0 the model simulates a valid DIMM that contains no SPD ROM Dual data rate DDR DIMMs use bidirectional data strobe signals to latch data on transfers The Northbridge device contains Programmable Delay Lines PDLs that are used to delay the Data Qualification Signal DQS signals so that the edges are centered on the valid data window BIOS algorithms are used to locate the valid data window and adjust the PDLs accordingly Physical DIMMs provide 8 bytes of data per access On the module the 8 bytes of data are stored across several memory devices The data width of the memory devices on the DIMM SPD byte 13 determines how many PDLs are used DIMMs that use 8 bit or 16 bit memory devices use one PDL per byte of width eight total PDLs DIMMs that use 4 bit devices use one PDL per nibble 16 total PDLs The memory controller in the AMD Opteron processor includes two DDR channels that are ganged into a single effective 128 bit int
149. b PCI Bus 6 SIO 7 Memory Device 8 Figure 6 1 Solo bsd Configuration The thickness of the connection between devices represents the number of existing connections 6 1 BSD Files A BSD file contains the configuration of a computer system how models are connected together and their settings sometimes called a virtual motherboard description and a checkpoint of the state of all devices in the simulator BSD files are stored in the simulator s home directory For a list of BSD files provided with the simulator see Appendix A 2 1 on page 184 6 2 Device Placement To place a device into a simulated computer system 1 Open a new simulator instance by launching SimNow exe in your install directory 2 Select File New BSD or click on the button to create a new BSD file Chapter 6 Create a Simulated Computer 47 User Manual November 2010 Select View Show Devices or click on the button to show the blank Device Window For each item added click and drag the icon from the device list on the left side into the workspace area on the right side of the window Add the Debugger device This device needs no connections drawn Add the AweSim Processor and the AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge When you add the AweSim Processor CPU Simulation Stats are added to the Main Window Connect the AweSim Processor and the AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge by shift click dragging from one to the ot
150. can be displayed on this graph the graph line turns red A rate of zero will appear as a horizontal line one pixel high Full vertical scale represents one MMIO per ten simulated instructions Darker color on the bottom of the graph represents the read MMIO s the lighter color represents the write MMIO s MMIO Rate Graph Read Exceeded MMIO s what can be displayed Write MMIO s Figure 3 22 CPU MMIO Rate Graph 3 4 3 Simulated Video The simulated video area of the Main Window depicts the VGA output screen that appears when a VGA device is added to the workspace When the mouse focus is over the video area the simulator captures host keyboard input enabling you to type most keyboard entries on your real keyboard This is a convenience and may not accurately position the mouse or grab all keys correctly For more accurate mouse and keyboard capture see Grab the mouse and keyboard in Section 5 2 3 Interaction with the Simulated Machine on page 45 You can also allow the simulator to take complete control of the mouse and keyboard by selecting Special Keyboard Grab Mouse and keyboard To return from this mode press and hold Ctrl then Alt and then release them in reverse order 3 4 4 Hard Disk and Floppy Display The IDE Primary byte counts IDE Secondary byte counts and Floppy disk byte counts displays appear when a Southbridge device is added to the workspace IDE Primary Display IDE Secondary Display
151. ce 3 3 4 Shell Automation Commands for Device Groups The shell automation commands that are used for a device also work for a device group For example shell KnownDevices lists all known devices both device libraries and device groups For example a device group exposes ports and connections so shell AvailablePorts and shell Connect etc work with a device regardless of whether it s a group or a library 3 3 4 1 Device Tree You can optionally reference a device in the parent and child grouping device tree using the syntax separator gt between device parent and child and Machine 1 as the root device Here are some examples using a machine and platform that just has two 4 core Node devices 1 simnow shell createddevices WAWcone Neden ON ai owe Noe gl 1 simnow shell CreatedDevices gt Machine 1 4 core Node 0 4 core Node 1 1 simnow shell createddevices Machine 1 gt 4 core Node 0 Cpu 0 AweSim Processor 0 Couga dL AweSim Processor 1 Cous 2 AweSim Processor 42 Cours AweSim Processor 3 sledgenb 0 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 4 1 simnow shell createddevices gt Machine 41 gt 4 core Node 1 Cpu 4 AweSim Processor 0 Gou 5 AweSim Processor 1 Cpu 6 AweSim Processor 2 Ganz AweSim Processor 3 sledgenb 1 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 4 18 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November
152. ce can be configure to store an AT24C16A 16Kb AT24C32A 32Kb or AT24C64A 64Kb 2 Wire Bus serial EEPROM D AT24C Device 10 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging SMB Config SMB Base Address 0x30 Type AT24C164 AT24C32A AT24C64A Figure 7 34 AT24C Device Configuration Chapter 7 Device Configuration 109 User Manual November 2010 7 21 EXDI Server Device This interface and the instructions contained herein applies only to the Windows operating system hosted version of the simulator The simulator provides a special device known as the EXDI Server Device This device can be added to any BSD When a BSD containing the EXDI Server Device is loaded the EXtended Debugging Interface becomes available This allows client debugging software such as CmdeXdi and the Windows kernel debugger to interact with the platform being simulated as if it were a real hardware platform The installation of the simulator should provide all the COM registration hooks that are required If it does not here are the steps to manually register the EXDI server 1 Open a command window run cmd exe 2 Change the current directory to the location where the simulator was installed 3 Execute the command Regsvr32 exdi64ps dll You should get a message box indicating that registration was successful 4 Execute the command Regrgs exdiamdserver rgs MODULE path and file name of exdi64ps dll usually C SimNow exdi64
153. ception Rate Graph Service Pack 1 Registered to J r SimNow inae pans UND Advanced Micro Devices Inc 76588 371 0497215 51703 PIO Rate Graph Computer AMD Engineering Sample 00 802 MHz 512 MB of RAM MMIO Rate Graph B Microsoft Windows Professional x64 Edition J Take a tour of Windows XP x To learn about the exciting new features in XP now click here To take the tour later click All Programs on the Start menu wa then click Accessories 12 14PM Simulator status CSC Simulation Display Figure 3 1 Main Window In Simulation Area 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons The Tool Bar shown in Figure 3 1 contains up to eleven control buttons The simulation can be started by clicking on the Play button SA The simulation can be stopped by clicking on the Stop button To reset the entire simulator stop the simulation first by clicking on the Stop button and then click on the Reset button 1 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 7 User Manual November 2010 The power management Soft Power button El and Soft Sleep button 4 are available only on simulated systems that have an Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI BIOS Clicking on the Soft Power button puts the simulated system in a very low power consumption mode The working context can be restored if it is stored on nonvolatile media The simulated system
154. ces provide configuration options Selecting Configure Device from the workspace popup menu produces a dialog window containing options for the specified device Selecting the Connections tab in the Device Properties window will display a list of all connections between the specified device and any other devices in the workspace 3 2 2 3 Disconnect Device Selecting Disconnect Device from the workspace popup menu removes all connections to the specified device 3 2 2 4 Delete Device Selecting Delete Device from the workspace popup menu removes all connections to the specified device and removes the device from the workspace 3 2 3 Example Computer Description In this section we describe the major components of the computer simulation contained in the cheetah_Ip bsd file Debugger 8 AweSim Processor Dimm AMD 8th Beneration PCI Bus 10 PCI Bus 11 Winbond W83627HF 140 Hub Plus 7 Intel R Pro 1000 SIO 5 MT Desktop Network Adapter 16 Emerald Graphics 12 c USB JumpDrive 15 we at PCA3548 Device 13 AT24C Device 14 Figure 3 5 Computer Simulation in cheetah 1p bsd File 12 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 This computer is a single processor AMD 8 Generation machine with 256 MB of memory a Southbridge that supports two IDE chains VGA output and a SuperIO that supports a keyboard mouse and flopp
155. cked floating point subtraction sm Packed floating point reverse PFSUBR mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF AA subtraction ei e nm Packed 32 bit integer to floating PI2FD mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 0D point conversion Multiply signed packed 16 bit values PMULHRW mmregl1 mmreg2 m64 OF OF B7 with rounding and store the high 16 bits PREFETCH PREFETCHW OF OD Prefetch processor cache line into L1 data cache Dcache Table 15 10 3DNow Instruction Reference A 6 7 Extension to the 3DNow Instruction Set This section describes the five new DSP instructions added to the 3DNow Instruction set Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Packed floating point to integer ida D adc A Mail deas word conversion with sign extend v Packed floating point negative PFNACC mmreg1 mmreg2 m64 OF OF 8A Stecker e Packed floating point mixed PFPNACC mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 8E positive negative accumulate e Packed 16 bit integer to floating PI2FW mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF 0C point conversion e PSWAPD mmregi mmreg2 m64 OF OF BB Packed swap double word m Table 15 11 Extension to 3DNow Instruction Reference A 6 8 Prescott New Instructions Prescott New Instruction technology for the x64 architecture is a set of 13 new instructions that accelerate performance of Streaming SIMD Extension technology Streaming SIMD Extension 2 technology and x87 FP math capabilities Th
156. contents of a 16 bit register or memory operand by a sign extended immediate word and put the signed result in the 16 bit destination register IMUL reg32 reg mem32 imm32 69 Ze id Multiply the contents of a 32 bit register or memory operand by a sign extended immediate double and put the signed result in the 32 bit destination register amp MUL reg64 reg mem64 imm32 69 fr id Multiply the contents of a 64 bit register or memory operand by a sign extended immediate double and put the signed result in the 64 bit destination register N AL imm8 E4 ib nput a byte from the port at the address specified by imm8 and put it into the AL register N AX imm8 E5 ib nput a word from the port at the address specified by imm8 and put it into the AX register N EAX imm8 BS ib nput a doubleword from the port at the address specified by imm8 and put it into the EAX register N AL DX EC nput a byte from the port at the address specified by the DX register and put it into the AL register N AX DX ED nput a word from the port at the address specified by the DX register and put it into the AX register N EAX EDX ED nput a doubleword from the port at the address specified by the EDX register and put it into the EAX register NC reg mem8 FE 0 ncrement the contents of an 8 bit register or memory location by 1 NC reg mem16
157. contents of the RAX register v Compare an 8 bit value with the CMP reg mem8 imm8 80 7 ib contents of an 8 bit register or e memory operand Compare a 16 bit value with the CMP reg mem16 imm16 81 7 iw contents of a 16 bit register or e memory operand Compare a 32 bit value with the CMP reg mem32 imm32 81 7 id contents of a 32 bit register or ei memory operand Compare a 32 bit signed immediate CMP reg mem64 imm32 81 7 id value with the contents of a 64 bit e register or memory operand Compare an 8 bit signed immediate CMP reg mem16 imm8 83 7 ib value with the contents of a 16 bit d register or memory operand Compare an 8 bit signed immediate CMP reg mem32 imm8 83 7 id value with the contents of a 32 bit ei register or memory operand Compare an 8 bit signed immediate CMP reg mem64 imm8 83 7 id value with the contents of a 64 bit e register or memory operand Compare the contents of an 68 bit CMP reg mem8 reg8 38 Ze register or memory operand with the ei contents of an 8 bit register Compare the contents of a 16 bit CMP reg mem16 reg1 39 r register or memory operand with the e contents of a 16 bit register Compare the contents of a 32 bit CMP reg mem32 reg32 39 r register or memory operand with the Af contents of a 32 bit register Compare the contents of a 64 bit CMP reg mem64 reg64 39 r register or memory operand with the e contents of a 64 bit register Compare the contents of an 8 bit CMP reg8 reg mem8 3A r re
158. controller register set for the USB controller s an LPC ISA bridge a system management bus controller IOAPIC bus bridge if applicable and legacy AT devices PIC PIT CMOS timer and DMA controller The legacies AT devices have the standard behavior and IO addresses unless otherwise noted Interfaces The Southbridge devices have several connection points Possible connection points include a PCI bus a SMB bus a LPC bus an INT IOAPIC bus for interrupt signaling and ISA and HyperTransport ports depending on the device type The PCI bus acts as a host bus AMD 8111 The SMB connects to devices such as the DIMM or the SMB hub The LPC bus provides connectivity to devices such as Super IO s and BIOS ROMs A HyperTransport port is used for main connectivity for the AMD 8111 device to the reset of the system Initialization and Reset State When first initialized the Southbridge devices are in the default state This is described in detail in the respective datasheets The legacy CMOS sub device initializes to all zeroes When reset a Southbridge device takes on all default register values as above The exception to this is that the CMOS contents remain the same Contents of a BSD The BSD file contains the contents of all registers It also saves the contents of any buffers and states of all internal devices HDD controllers PIT PIC etc When the BSD file is read in all buffers are filled with past data and all states are restored
159. count v b w d lt data gt br Address r w pass cnt V lt Data gt 154 Creates and enables a breakpoint for access to the given MSR address Sets optional pass count to pass cnt User can also specify conditional break by specifying the data to be read written via V lt Data gt Chapter 10 CPU Debugger User Manual November 2010 Debugger Command Definition bi p p bast Display the settings of one or all breakpoints bm address r w Pass count v b w d data Creates and enables a breakpoint for the indicated memory address Sets the pass count to count or 0 if not specified Defaults to read or write but can be set to read only or write only using the r or w options v enables the data data check capability for b yte w ord or d ouble word memory accesses For example bm 1000 w vb c0 stands for break when byte OxCO is written to memory address 0x1000 bs Vector Pass count Creates and enables a breakpoint for the indicated software interrupt vector Sets the pass count to count or O if not specified bx address Pass count Creates and enables a breakpoint for the indicated code fetch address Sets the pass count to count or 0 if not specified Sets the pass count to count or 0 if not specified c rlw Bus Dev lt Func gt Off data Performs a PCI configuration r ead or w rite diblwidiq I
160. ctly Interfaces The ATI Radeon HD 3870 device has a PCIe connection point The PCIe port is used for connectivity upstream to a compatible Northbridge Device See Section 7 28 ATI RS480 RS780 RD790 RD890 Northbridge Devices on page 138 for more information Initialization and Reset State Upon initial creation this device initializes the internal GPU state to ATI Radeon HD 3870 standard reset state and creates a display window that acts as the VGA display The board configuration options are loaded and initialized Frame buffer memory is initialized to all zeros Most of the simulated hardware features that are available during simulation depend on the specific board configuration settings A reset will re load the default GPU and PCI configuration registers The internal GPU state will be also set to the ATI Radeon HD 3670 default values Contents of a BSD The data saved in the BSD depends on the mode the graphics controller was in when the BSD was saved If the graphics controller was in VGA mode the BSD file contains a copy of the 256 Kbyte VGA frame buffer and all configuration information If the graphics controller was in an accelerated graphics mode the entire linear frame buffer is saved in the BSD All modified GPU and PCI configuration registers and the current GPU state of all blocks are saved in the BSD Display device data and display device connection information are saved as well in the BSD When the BSD file is reload
161. d Family 11h 2 S1 BO v Xx A 2 4 Table 15 2 Product Files Image Files HDD FDD ROM SPD BIN An image file is an exact representation of a media including the contents and the logical format A 2 4 1 Hard Disk Image Files Table 15 3 shows hard disk image files present in the simulator These images can be found in the simulators image folder see Section 2 3 Directory Structure and Executable on page 4 File name Description Bare 4gig hdd 4 GB bare hard disk image Bare 8gig hdd 8 GB bare hard disk image Appendix A 181 User Manual November 2010 Table 15 3 Hard Disk Images A 2 4 2 Memory SPD Files When a computer is booted started serial presence detect SPD is information stored in an electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM chip on memory module that tells the BIOS the memory module s size data width and speed The BIOS uses this information to configure the memory properly for maximum reliability and performance File name Description simnow_DDR_32M spd 32MB DDR memory simnow_DDR_64M spd 64MB DDR memory simnow_DDR_128M spd 128MB DDR memory simnow_DDR_256M spd 256MB DDR memory simnow_DDR_512M spd 512MB DDR memory simnow_DDR_1G spd 1024MB DDR memory simnow_DDR_2G spd 2048MB DDR memory simnow DDR 4G spd 4096MB DDR memory simnow D
162. d as the right most second operand in the instruction syntax e xmm mem64 Quadword 64 bit operand in a 128 bit XMM register or memory e xmm meml28 Double quadword 128 bit operand in a 128 bit operand in an XMM register or memory e xmml mem128 Double quadword 128 bit operand in a 128 bit operand in an XMM register or memory specified as the left most first operand in the instruction syntax e xmm2 mem128 Double quadword 128 bit operand in a 128 bit operand in an XMM register or memory specified as the right most second operand in the instruction syntax A 6 1 2 Opcode Syntax In addition to the notation shown in above in Mnemonic Syntax on page 192 the following notation indicates the size and type of operands in the syntax of instruction syntax e digit Indicates that the ModRM byte specifies only one register or memory r m operand The digit is specified by the ModRM reg field and is used as an instruction opcode extension Valid digit values range from 0 to 7 e Ar Indicates that the ModRM byte specifies both a register and operand and a reg mem register or memory operand e cb cw cd cp Specified a code offset value and possibly a new code segment register value The value following the opcode is either one byte cb two bytes cw four bytes cd or six bytes cp e ib iw id Specifies an immediate operand value The opcode determines whether the value is signed or unsi
163. d in detail in the AMD 8132 datasheet Each bridge defaults with hot plug functionality disabled When reset AMD 8132 takes on all default register values Contents of a BSD The entire configuration of the AMD 8132 chipset including all state and registers for its sub devices is saved in the BSD Configuration Options The Hot Plug tab options for AMD 8132 are to enable or disable hot plug for each of its PCI X bridges as shown in Figure 7 30 You cannot enable or disable hot plug after a simulation has already begun D 44 8132 PCI X Controller 11 Properties Connections 120 Logging HotPlug HT Link Configuration C Hot Plug Bridge amp Enable C Hot Plug Bridge B Enable Figure 7 30 AMD 8132 Device Hot Plug Configuration Figure 7 31 shows the HT Link Configuration options Chapter 7 Device Configuration 101 User Manual November 2010 D AMD 8132 PCI X Controller 11 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Hot Plug HT Link Configuration L Upstream HyperTransport Link HyperTransport Bus 0 HyperTransport Bus 1 Figure 7 31 AMD 8132 Properties Dialog The Upstream HyperTransport Link selection shown in Figure 7 31 specifies the HyperTransport Bus that will be used as a upstream link Differences from Real Hardware Clock sensitive functionality like setting bus speed is not supported Neither are system errors nor power management 102 Chapter 7 Device Configurat
164. d memory will not be backed by DRAM or swap but Linux counts it against SimNows process memory limit when it comes to resource limits 4 Chapter 2 Installation User Manual November 2010 You can unset the per process memory limits by running the following commands as root ulimit m unlimited Wbm e Sw met cee 2 5 Configuration File The simulator s configuration file is a text file that may be edited and that is stored in different locations depending on which host OS you are using If you are using Windows as host operating system the configuration file is located in C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data simnowrc If you are using Linux as host operating system the configuration file is located in SHOME qt simnowrc Here is an example of the contents of this file with an explanation General UserKeys CLL ESC Sends s CiL EmSC Een chs uer ee om IID OL SL 9D ALT F4 Sends an ALT F4 to the application 38 3e be b8 UserBottons BUTTONO MyIconPathMMyIcon png cpu name The configuration file is divided into sections with each section title enclosed in square brackets This particular example includes three sections named General UserKeys and UserBottons All user key definitions are stored in the UserKeys section Each user key definition is defined by a single line This example defines two user keys The string to the left of the equal sign is the string t
165. d to running the mediator in this mode Client machines that connect to the mediator will not require supervisor privileges The mediator is capable of grouping certain simulator sessions into domains Domains isolate groups of simulator sessions from each other This can be useful when the user wants to run replicated groups of BSD s simultaneously The user need to ensure that each group of BSD s are using unique domains in the mediator by passing an appropriate connect string to the mediator or supplying it on the command line using the m option see Section 5 1 Command Line Arguments on page 39 The mediator can provide one or more gateways to isolate broadcast traffic from your simulation environment A gateway will perform NAT in order to ensure that BSD s in different domains get their packets routed appropriately The simulator sessions using the mediator s gateway can continue to access network resources but are essentially hidden from the real network Table 7 9 shows command line switches that the mediator accepts Switch Description p portNum Dictates what port number the mediator will be listening on for incoming traffic It specifies the base port address used by the mediator and port usage is based off of this number The mediator s listening thread uses portNum 4 l Lists possible host adapters that the mediator can use to snoop real network traffic S Tells the mediator to snoop real netw
166. de Translation Graph Real MIPS Graph Invalidation Rate Graph Exception Rate Graph PIO Rate Graph MMIO Rate Graph l capi en ithe simulated machine A Area Area 5 Sg gt 8 B Lei lt ge o D d oe X H d T A d E Chapter 5 Running the Simulator 39 User Manual November 2010 D SimNow Device Window Drag Icons to insert new devices Shifttdrag io add connections C Show Deprecated Devices r AMD ITE AMD 8111 1 0 Hub Debugger 8 AweSim Processor 0 Dimm Bank 2 AMD 8th Beneration mee AMD 8132 PCI X Controller Debugger wit AT24C Device O9 EJ Processor un PCI Bus 10 eS Dimm Bank T Controller 9 Hal Intel R Pro 1000 MT Desktop Network Adapter PCI Bus 11 SMB SMB Hub Devicest Emerald Graphics HI USB Winbond W83627HF DS ub CI USB JumpDrive SIO 5 PClBus 7 Intel R Pro 1000 MT Desktop Network t Quel Memory Device Er Adapter 16 wm PCA9548 Device Emerald Graphics o PCI Bus 12 AMD Sth Generation Integrated Northbridge smp E ee PCA9548 Device 13 AT24C Device 14 ng ES Winbond W8362 HF SIO Figure 5 3 Device Window 5 2 Installing an Operating System This section describes the steps that are necessary to install Windows or Linux using the simulator Before you can start installing an operating system make sure you have a blank hard drive image available To create a blank hard drive image with DiskTool please follow the
167. disables file logging 1 enables file logging LogDevice Device Name 01 1 gt Enabled 1 or disables 0 device logging for device LoggingEnabled Device Name Returns the logging status of device Device Name This automation command returns enabled or disabled ErrorLogFile Returns the current Error Log file name Default is simnow errlog SetErrorLogFile filename Sets the Error Log file name ErrorLogFileEnabled Returns enabled if error file logging is enabled otherwise it returns disabled SetErrorLogFileEnabled lt 011 gt Enables or disabled error file logging 0 disables error file logging 1 enables error file logging 228 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description Memdump lt FileName gt Set the memory dump file name Reset Resets the simulation see also Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on page 7 CreatedDevices Lists all created devices AddDevice Device Name x y Creates a device and adds the device to the device window at position x y x and y are pixel coordinates inside the device window Connections Device Name Lists all connections that a device has Connect Device Name1 gt connect point1 Device Name2 connect point2 Connects Device Namel and Device Name2 using connect point and connect poi
168. displays data written to three I O address ranges 0x80 0x83 0x84 0x87 OxEO OxE3 Currently the Diagnostic Display is implemented only for Southbridge device If the system configuration includes a Southbridge device then the Diagnostic Display will be displayed 14 5Logging PCI Configuration Cycles Northbridge devices can be configured to produce PCI configuration cycle log messages Complete the following steps to enable and capture of these log messages 1 Open the Device Window from the Main Window Menu View Show Devices Double click on the Northbridge device This will bring up the device Properties Window Click on Logging Capabilities that will display the logging options Select Log PCI Configuration Cycle to and then click OK to accept the configuration 2 Select View Log Window from the Main Window Menu This will bring up a Message Log dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 14 3 Chapter 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide 171 User Manual November 2010 3 Log messages will only be captured from devices that have a check beside their name If the Northbridge device does not have a check then check it by clicking its check box 4 Select whether to send log messages to the window and or to a file If logging to a file enter a filename for the log file 5 Execute the simulation and the requested information will be logged lt 1 SimNow Message Log Devices AMD 8th Generation I
169. dress value may be an absolute address or a module relative address For the latter case the load address may be specified when the symbols are loaded into the debugger with the Joad symbols command see Section 10 2 Debugger Command Reference on page 155 Appendix A 179 User Manual November 2010 A 2 Bill of Material A 2 1 Computer Platform Files BSD This section gives a brief description of the computer platform description BSD files devices and disk and ROM image files that come with AMD SimNow Platform Simulator CPU PCI 5 Graphic Public spes CPUs Cores Buses prd Be Type Release Solo 1 1 1 AMD 8111 W83627HF AGP Xx Fuge 8 1 d AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI X Melody 1p 1 1 1 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI e Melody 1p jh 1 2 4 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI v Melody 2p 2 1 4 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI w Melody_2p_jh 2 2 4 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI ei Quartet 4 1 4 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI oe Serenade lp ami 1 1 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI X Serenade ami 2 2 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI Xx Family10h_Ip 1 4 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI v Family10h 2p 2 4 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI X Warthog2_Family10h 4 4 2 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI X Cat2 Familyl 1h 2 1 1 SB600 RU fel x Warthog2 4 1 1 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI v Cheetah lp 1 1 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI ei Cheetah 1p jh 1 2 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI oe Cheetah_2p 2 1 3 AMD 8111 W83627HF PCI e Cheetah_2p_jh 2 2 3 AMD 8111 W
170. e To get an overview of all automation commands which are not attached to any specific device enter 1 simnow gt help Automation Command Description exec lt file gt Execute automation commands in file List shell automation commands same as usage be shell usage Create a new SimNow machine and make that newmachine machine the current machine for subsequent commands Switches the current machine to the machine identified by n the given number switchmachine lt n gt listmachines Lists the SimNow machines that currently exist exit Quits the current SimNow machine quit Exits the current SimNow machine 5 Displays all automation commands which are i not attached to any specific device help The same as A 7 1 Shell To list all registered shell commands enter 1 simnow gt shell usage Automation Command Description ECHO lt Value gt Displays value to the standard output device by default the screen Exit Closes all open GUI components and exits the simulator Appendix A 227 User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description Quit See Exit Starts the simulation see also Section 3 1 Tool Go Bar Buttons on page 7 Stops the simulation see also Section 3 1 Tool Stop Bar Buttons on page 7 The Stop command does not return until the simulation has in fact stopped or the stop has failed Clos
171. e 9 71 MIPS MIPS are the simulator started instantaneous value of MIPS are the total the simulators number of simulated performance d dimension is millions of instructions executed simulated instruction since the simulator started divided by the Hosts Seconds executed per second of host user and system Figure 3 16 Progress Meter and Diagnostic Ports CPU time The simulation counter measures the number of microseconds of simulated time However it is not a performance or cycle based simulator so the simulated time is estimated 3 4 2 CPU Statistics Graphs There are several graphs that can be displayed on the left side of the Main Window These graphs can be activated by the View CPU Graphs menu selection 3 4 2 1 Translation Graph The Translation Graph updates once a second Full vertical scale means the address Translation cache tcache is full Dark color on the bottom of the graph represents percent of tcache containing valid translations Lighter color above the dark color represents percent of tcache containing invalidated translations Black color growing from the top represents the meta data that describes the translations Percent of tcache Translation Graph Meta Data that containing describes the Invalidated Translations Translations Percent of tcache containing Valid Translations Figure 3 17 CPU Translation Graph 3 4 2 2 Real MIPS Graph The Real MIPS Graph updates o
172. e Check Architecture Conditional Move Instruction Page Attribute Table Page Size Extensions PSE 36 CFLUSH Instruction MMX Instructions FXSAVE FXRSTOR SSE SSE2 Hyper Threading SSE3 PNI Monitor MWAIT HVS GOS X363 nn nn 4 0 X363 4 444444 4 0 X3 4 444444444404 Table 15 6 CPUID Standard Feature implementation A 4 2 CPUID AMD Feature Support Extended Function 0x80000001 Table 15 7 shows the extended feature bits returned by the AweSim CPU processor model and which features are fully or only partially amp implemented and Only read and write to debug registers is supported side affects are not implemented 184 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 supported A 9 indicates that the returned feature bit is zero and this feature is not implemented and not supported gi gi gi KR Feature Generation Generation Generation Generation Base Pre Rev F Rev F Floating Point Unit m f AMD Extensions to 3DNow 3DNow Instructions Virtualization Technology v Virtual Mode Extensions ef v v Debugging Extensions amp amp amp amp Page Size Extension v v v v Time Stamp Counter v v v oS AMD Model Specific Registers v v v v Page Address Extensi
173. e Closes a BSD file that was previously opened Open lt FileName gt Opens a BSD file Modules Lists all loaded modules Shell running returns No if simulation is Running currently not running otherwise it returns Yes Save lt Filename gt Saves the current system configuration to a file Default is simnow bsd RunTimeDuration lt time gt Runs the simualtion for the given number of microseconds and then stops the simulation GetRunTimeDuration Returns the run time duration in nanoseconds ModifyRegistry lt key gt lt value gt ModifyKey modifies and updates the given registry key with the given value LogConsoleEnabled Shell LogConsoleEnabled returns disabled if console logging is disabled otherwise it returns enabled SetLogConsoleEnabled lt 011 gt Enables or disables logging Shell SetLogConsoleEnabled I enables logging and Shell SetLogConsoleEnabled O disables logging Returns the Log Window status The status is EEN enabled or disabled SetLogWndEnabled lt 0lis Sets the Log Window status to enabled or disabled Logfile Returns the current Log file name Default is simnow log SetLogFile filename Sets the Log file name LogFileEnabled Returns enabled if file logging is enabled otherwise it returns disabled SetLogFileEnabled lt 011 gt Enables or disabled file logging 0
174. e DIMM size of memory module DimmNo GetDimmBanks lt DimmNo gt pun ihe DIMM banks of memory module DimmNo GetDimmWidth lt DimmNo gt Returns the DIMM width of memory module DimmNo GetSpdData lt DimmNo gt Returns SPD data of memory module DimmNo 246 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description DeleteDimm lt DimmNo gt Deletes memory module DimmNo from current configuration GetSpdDataByte lt DimmNo gt Returns a specific SPD data byte stored at lt Addr gt on lt Addr gt Dimm lt DimmNo gt SetSpdDataByte lt DimmNo gt Sets the SPD data byte lt Data gt at SPD Address lt Addr gt lt Addr gt lt Data gt on DIMM lt DimmNo gt A 7 26 Keyboard and Mouse By default the GUI uses keyboard key and keyboard mousemove commands to send input to the simulator These can be overridden using the Gui_Key_Device and Gui_Mouse_Device registry keys For example if you connect a USB keyboard device to the simulation you can have keystrokes use the USB keyboard rather than the old keyboard 1 simnow gt keyboard usage Automation Command Description Forwards the specified key to the simulated system Key XX XX E g the following command forwards the ENTER keystroke to the simulated system keyboard key 1C Moves the mouse cursor to relative position DeltaX and MouseMove lt DeltaX gt lt DeltaY gt DeltaY MouseLeftDown Genera
175. e default is a standard AMD microprocessor See Section A 2 3 Product Files ID on page 184 Chapter 7 Device Configuration 53 User Manual November 2010 D AweSim Processor 0 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Logging Processor Type Current Product name productfile Dpteron L1 JH F 800Mhz id To change please choose from the following product files This has the side effect of reselling the BSD AthlonB4 754 SH CO_ 800MHz id Athlon64 S1_SH EO_ 800MHz id Athlon64 754_SH CG_ 800MHz id Opteron 940_JH EO_ 800MHz x2 id Athlon64 754_SH DO_ 800MHz id Opteron 940_SH B3_ 800MHz id AthlonB4 754 SH EO 800MHz id Opteron 340 SH CO S00MHz id AthlonB4 333 JH EO 800MHz x2 id Opteron 940_SH CG_ 800MHz id Athlon64 333 SH CG 800MHz id Opteron 940_SH DO_ 800MHz id Athlon64 939_SH DO_ 800MHz id Opteron 940_SH EO_ 800MHz id Athlon64 939_SH EQ_ 800MH2z id Opteron L1 JH F 800Mhz id Auslese CA kd CILLA GOO0 amp 41E Lei zl ouem L3 EET ODORE Aas al Figure 7 1 AweSim Processor Type Properties Figure 7 2 shows the Logging tab for the AweSim processor device Here you can specify the following configuration options Check the Log Disassembly check box to log the disassembly of the instructions executed by the processor model Check the Log Register State Changes check box to log all the processor model register state changes Check the Log I O Read Writes check box to log
176. e execute in step 6 will probably be the old code because our page based coherency mechanism depends on the software TLB to write protect pages which have x86 code that has been translated However this mechanism protects physical pages through the virtual mapping mechanism and this mechanism only knows about one virtual address mapping not all possible mappings of any code page Appendix A 187 User Manual November 2010 A 6 Instruction Reference This section specifies the hexadecimal and or binary encodings for the opcodes that SimNow does ef does not 4 or does partially amp simulate when simulating an AMD 8 Generation CPU Rev F A 6 1 Notation A 6 1 1 Mnemonic Syntax Each instruction has a syntax that includes the mnemonic and any operands that the instruction can take Figure A 1 shows an example of a syntax in which the instruction takes two operands In most instruction that take two operands the first left most operand is both a source operand the first source operand and the destination operand The second right most operand serves only as a source not a destination ADDPD xmml xmm2 mem128 Mnemonic First Operand and Destination Operand Second Source Operand Figure A 1 Syntax for Typical Two Operand Instruction The following notation is used to denote the size and type of source and destination operands e cReg Control Register dReg Debug register imm Byte 8
177. e if below or equal CF 1 or SETBE reg mem8 OF 96 mci v SETNA reg mem8 OF 96 Se byte if not above CF 1 or ZF v e Set byte if not below or equal CF SETNBE reg mem8 OF 97 0 and ZF 0 Af SETA reg mem8 OF 97 A byte if above CF 0 and ZF v SETS reg mem8 OF 98 Set byte if sign SF 1 v SETNS reg mem8 OF 99 Set byte if not sign SF 0 v SETP reg mem8 OF 9A Set byte if parity PF 1 m SETPE reg mem8 OF 9A Set byte if parity even PF 1 v SETNP reg mem8 OF 9B Set byte if not parity PF 0 v SETPO reg mem8 OF 9B Set byte if parity odd PF 0 m SETL reg mem8 OF 9C Set byte if less SF OF m SETNGE reg mem8 OF 9C p if not greater or equal SF d SETNL reg mem8 amp OF 9D Set byte if not less SF OF v SETGE reg mem8 OF 9D E byte if greater or equal SF v Set byte if less or equal ZF 1 or SETLE reg mem8 OF 9E SF lt gt OF e o Set byte if not greater ZF 1 or SF GEING reg mem8 OF 9E lt gt OF e 5 Set byte if not less or equal ZF 0 SETNLE reg mem8 OF 9F sud eb LP v SETG reg mem8 OF OF E byte if greater ZF 0 and SF v SFENCE OF AE F8 Force strong ordering of serialized v store operations Shift an 8 bit register or memory 4 SHE peg memor Do location left 1 bit v Shift an 8 bit register or memory SHL reg mem8 CL D2 4 location left the number of bits Af specified in the CL register Shift an 8 bit register or memory i location left the number of bits 4 SHL Reque imma CO MEAD spec
178. e instruction that you want to step over see Section 10 1 1 Setting a Breakpoint on page 151 Execute to the breakpoint 3 Determine the EIP of the next instruction after the one to be skipped This can easily be determined by viewing the disassembly listing in the debugger The top line in the disassembly listing is the instruction pointed to by the current EIP the instruction that you wish to skip 4 Use the debugger s R command to change the value in the EIP register This can be done by typing R EIP new value on the debugger command line In this case new value is the linear address of the instruction that follows the one that you want to skip 5 Enter G on the debugger command line This will execute the debuggers Go command CPU execution will resume 10 1 5 Viewing a Memory Region 1 Stop the simulation as described in Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on page 7 2 Open the Debugger Window View Show Debugger or click on gt The simulation will pause and the Debugger Window will appear 3 When the Debugger Window has attention use the debuggers DB DW DD or DQ command to display the contents of a memory region in the debugger The second letter of the command specifies the display format for the dump The DB command displays byte format DW displays word format DD displays dword format and DQ displays qword format Each of these commands requires a second parameter that specifies the beginning address in h
179. e is enabled by checking the Log to File check box in the Message log dialog Figure 9 2 and setting a filename for the error log This file is created or truncated to zero length if it already exists and opened whenever a BSD file is opened or anew BSD is created The error log is closed whenever the BSD is closed X 1 SimNow Error Log Log to File eror log me 100 Buffer Size in Kbytes cisc cpu cpp CProcessor GenerateException shutdown due to triple fault Fatal error reached stopping Simulation Error message s follow Bailing out NOTE Simulation cannot be restarted until a reset is asserted Simulation state CAN be inspected with the SimNow debugger Clear Window Save Window Contents Figure 9 2 Error Log Chapter 9 Logging 145 User Manual November 2010 9 3 LO Logging This is a generic feature available on all devices for logging slave accesses i e accesses responded to by this device Several categories of generic I O logging are available Logging is performed to the I O loggers see Section 9 1 Message Log on page 145 of names similar to the device you are enabling the logging for Caveat Currently devices which route to other devices may appear as if they are responding to the messages themselves so bridge devices will likely log everything that is behind them D Emerald Graphics 11 Properties Connections f MO Logging VGA SubDevice Framebuffe
180. e new technology is compatible with existing software and should run correctly without modification The thirteen new instructions are summarized in the following section For detailed information on each instruction refer to a complete Instruction Set Reference Appendix A 223 User Manual November 2010 Instruction eT Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Add Subtract packed double precision ADDSUBPD xmm1 xmm2 m128 66 OF DO r floating point number from XMM2 Mem ef to XMM1 Add Subtract packed single precision ADDSUBPS xmm1 xmm2 m128 F2 OF DO r floating point number from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 Store ST as a signed integer PESTLE Meine DF 1 truncate in ml6int and pop ST R Store ST as a signed integer dad iid BEBO truncate in m32int and pop ST FISTTP m 4int DD 1 Store ST as a Signed integer truncate in ml6int and pop ST Add horizontally packed double HADDPD xmm1 xmm2 m128 66 OF 7C r precision floating point numbers from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 Add horizontally packed single HADDPS xmm1 xmm2 m128 F2 0F 7C r precision floating point numbers from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 Subtract horizontally packed double HSUBPD xmm1 xmm2 m128 66 OF 7D r precision floating point numbers from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 Subtract horizontally packed single HSUBPS xmm1 xmm2 m128 F2 OF 7D r precision floating point numbers from XMM2 Mem to XMM1 Load 128 bits from Memory to XMM register Sets up a linear address range to be
181. e workspace adds the floppy byte counts numeric window to the Main Window screen When you add a device to the workspace the shell sends a reset message to all of the devices in the workspace The global reset is equivalent to power cycling the simulated computer system 3 2 2 Workspace Popup Menu Changing the system configuration of the simulated system can make the simulation nonfunctional Right clicking on any icon in the workspace produces a popup menu as shown in Figure 3 3 Configure Device Disconnect Device Delete Device What s This Help Figure 3 3 Workspace Popup Menu 3 2 2 1 Add Connection You can connect a device to another device by holding Shift left click and drag from one device to the other You will draw a line from the first device to the second Release the mouse button to create the connection You can also right click one device select 10 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 Add Connection and then click on the device to connect to Then click Finish The connection enables simulator level message exchanges between the connected devices All connections enable bidirectional message transfers Some devices contain more than one interface to which a connection can be made A multi interface device routes messages out different interfaces based on the type of message being sent When you make a connection with a multi interface device an interface list dialog a
182. ecified in the CL register Appendix A 207 User Manual November 2010 Instruction S ted Mnemonic Opcode Description quus Rotate the 9 bits consisting of the carry flag and an 8 bit register or RCL reg mem8 imm8 ER 2 xb memory location left the number of ei bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value Rotate the 17 bits consisting of the RCL reg memi6 1 Di 2 carry flag and a 16 bit register or D memory location left 1 bit Rotate the 17 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 16 bit register or RCL reg mem16 CL D3 2 memory location left the number of v bits specified in the CL register Rotate the 17 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 16 bit register or RCL reg mem16 imm8 Cl 2 ib memory location left the number of bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value Rotate the 33 bits consisting of the RCL reg mem32 1 DI 2 carry flag and a 32 bit register or memory location left 1 bit Rotate the 33 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 32 bit register or RCL reg mem32 CL ns 2 memory location left the number of v bits specified in the CL register Rotate the 33 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 32 bit register or RCL reg mem32 imm8 cl 2 ib memory location left the number of bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value Rotate the 65 bits consisting of the RCL reg mem64 1 Di ZS carry flag and a 64 bit register or memory location left 1 bit Rotate the 65 bit
183. ed the internal GPU state registers and the frame buffer are restored and a display image is captured and displayed in the display window ATI Radeon HD 3870 device model supports DirectX 9 version including DirectX 9Ex and earlier versions of DirectX DirectX 10 and DirectX 10 1 are not supported 76 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Configuration Options It is recommended to install the latest available A77 Radeon HD 3870 device drivers if you want to enable and use full DirectX and OpenGL support Please refer to http www ati com drivers for more information about available device drivers In most cases the simulated graphics perfromance can be improved by reducing the simulated video resolution to 800x600 or 1024x768 To obtain detailed information about this device model and its hardware configuration such as memory size and general BIOS information please open the GUI device property dialog and then click on the Information tab see Figure 7 13 Le ai ATI Radeon HD 3870 14 Properties 9 Connections L Logging Configuration Du Information PCIR Graphics Hardware item Value Graphics Chipset ATI Radeon HD 3870 Device ID x9501 Vendor ID 1002 RADEON Subsystem ID 02542 Subsystem Vendor ID 1002 Build 14909 Graphics Bus Capability PC Express Maximum Bus Setting PCI Express x16 BIOS Version 010 079 000 005 BI
184. ed by an 8 bit immediate v value Subtract an immediate 8 bit value pbi e a ip m from the AL register with borrow v Subtract an immediate 16 bit value SBB RA UNE aid from the AX register with borrow v Subtract an immediate 32 bit value Ee SE from the EAX register with borrow v A 3 Subtract an immediate 32 bit value EE THREE from the RAX register with borrow v Subtract an immediate 8 bit value SBB reg mem8 imm8 80 3 ib from an 8 bit register or memory e location with borrow Subtract an immediate 16 bit value SBB reg mem16 imm16 80 3 iw from a 16 bit register or memory e location with borrow Subtract an immediate 32 bit value SBB reg mem32 imm32 81 3 id from a 32 bit register or memory d location with borrow Appendix A 211 User Manual November 2010 Instruction d Mnemonic Opcode Description D Subtract a sign extended immediate SBB reg mem64 imm32 Bl 3 id 32 bit value from a 64 bit register e or memory location with borrow Subtract a sign extended 8 bit immediate value from a 16 bit BEEN 83 3 ib register or memory location with v borrow Subtract a sign extended 8 bit SBB reg mem32 imm8 83 3 ib immediate value from a 32 bit v register or memory location with borrow Subtract a sign extended 8 bit y immediate value from a 64 bit SBB SSH de imma 83 3 ib register or memory location with v bo
185. eese 102 Reading CPU MSRS sess 152 I Reading PCI Configuration Registers 152 Set Breakpoint sse 149 Insert CD ROM niente rg 41 Single Stepping sseeseeeeseeesereersrrerrerrereeen 150 INT IOAPIC reti ttn 92 Skip Instruction 151 IR 80 Stepping Over sessie siiret 150 IRQ Routing Dm 98 Index 255 User Manual November 2010 J PS 2 mouse eene 80 Journaling isto teet 94 95 R dert RE a E 106 Ke c RAM K Memory Device sese 83 EEN 172 Ee md EDBNIC 56094 surera saron ede ntl 188 L Reset coo teret toT REUS 7 43 f ROM ceee ei a e pts 83 Linux Loopback Device sse 42 A Log SN Ee teen 174 SCHPUNS ie ies Si ete Aa ees 228 RENG geben A a 4 30 Dissassembly inisi 5 emen 54 SEM igneo Eed SEENEN 187 Exceptions geed 54 Shells hiyain n Ae ER 228 I O Logging nenne en 146 2 SUMS AUS TENES 28 I O Read Wiites eese 54 Sineie Stevpin See Debu Linear Memory ACCESSES ssss 54 i EE ere s SlowdowWn eere perterriti dee 1 Register State Changes 54 SMBs eA ead 14 86 87 LPC ISA Brdge sepsstesseeionstycneicossneotasenst os 92 LPTI 80 HUD estes eed eich a ae 14 107 eege EE SMB Base ee ee M Soft POWet eet petri tentent 8 MAC Address LLL 129 Soft Sleep sese setae tetti ied 8 Solo bsd sioe RE aerae Re 47 Mediator Daemon eee 1
186. egister to the port specified by an n d 8 bit immediate value Output the byte in the AL register to iia i i in the output port specified in DX v Output the word in the AX register to OUT DX AX PE the output port specified in DX v Output the doubleword in the EAX OUT DX EAX EE register to the output port specified e in DX Output the byte in DS rSI to the port OUTS DX mem8 6E specified in DX and then increment Af or decrement rSI Output the word in DS rSI to the port OUTS DX meml6 6F specified in DX and then increment e or decrement rSI Output the doubleword in DS rSI to OUTS DX mem32 6F the port specified in DX and then ef increment or decrement rSI Output the byte in DS rSI to the port OUTSB 6E specified in DX and then increment ef or decrement rSI Output the word in DS rSI to the port OUTSW 6F Specified in DX and then increment ei or decrement rSI Output the doubleword in DS rSI to OUTSD 6F the port specified in DX and then ei increment or decrement rSI p Pop the top of the stack into a 16 HOP Regent ud bit register or memory location v e Pop the top of the stack into a 32 POP Wege ie a bit register or memory location v o Pop the top of the stack into a 64 POR EGHATSNES uaa bit register or memory location v Pop the top of the stack into a 16 POP regi6 58 rw bit register D Pop the top of the stack into a 32 POP reg32 58 rd bit register Af Pop the top of the stack into a 64 POP reg64 58 rq bit register
187. en load offset When the load is completed the module name attached to this group of symbols is displayed Supported symbol file extentsions are TXT x SYMTEXT and Linux symbol map file MAP Displays a list of the symbol modules currently loaded U Module Name Unloads the named symbol module that had previously been loaded with the 1 command Symbol Displays all symbols that contain the given string Address Displays the symbol that most closes matches the given address bert p list Clears one or all breakpoints bd list Disables one or all breakpoints be List jJ Enables one or all breakpoints bf vector Pass count Creates and enables a breakpoint for the indicated CPU exception Sets the pass count to count or 0 if not specified bh vector Pass count Creates and enables a breakpoint for the indicated hardware interrupt Sets the pass count to count or 0 if not specified Creates and enables a breakpoint for the indicated I O address Sets the pass count to count or O if not specified Defaults to read write but can be set to read only or write only using the r or w options v enables the data data check capability for b yte w ord or dJouble word I O accesses For example bi 80 w vb c0 stands for break when byte OxCO is written to I O port 0x80 bi lt address gt r w lt Pass
188. er PCI bus Bus Dev Fun Name 4 number 7 D AMD 8111 LPC 1 AMD 8111 IDE de 2 AMD 8111 SMBus 2 0 number 3 AMD 8111 ACPI E List of all PCI 5 AMD 8111 ACS Audio devices PCI D 6 AMD 8111 MC9 Modem function 0 H Simple Communications Controller number 0 24 0 K8 Athlon64 Opteron HyperTransport Technology Configuration D 24 1 K8 Athlon64 Opteron Address Map The columns 0 24 2 K8 Athlon64 Opteron DRAM Controller show the low x ae Q 0i 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC 0D OF OF configuration 00 22 10 54 74 00 00 10 02 12 00 00 06 OO OO OO 00 euer 10 08 oO 00 OO OO 00 00 OO OO 00 00 00 00 OO OO 00 20 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO O0 is eae 30 OO oO op OO O 00 00 OO OO 00 00 OO 00 OO OO O0 show the high 40 OO OO 00 OO OO 00 OO OO OO 00 00 OO OO OO 00 O0 P Nn 50 OO OO OO op op op OO op OO op OO OO OO op oO op PCI 60 OO OO 00 OO OO 00 OO OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO OO O0 configuration 70 00 00 OO OO 00 00 op OO OO 00 OO OO 00 O00 OO OO Pe space register configuration 80 00 OO op OO OO OO OO OO OO op OO OO OO OO OO O0 space 90 OO OO OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO 00 00 00 00 OO 00 O0 A0 O2 CO 35 00 77 OB OO iF OO OO OO 00 00 oO oO 00 8 1 Sca BO 00 OO OO OO OO OF 01 OO OO 00 00 OO 00 OO 00 O0 To view tl om o8 o0 60 00 20 OO 11 OO 20 OO OO OO 22 00 35 00 entry from pn 02 00 35 00 00 OO 00 OO O0 OO OO op OO OO op 00 contains a E0 08 08 oO OO 08 08 00 OO OF OF 00 OO OO OO 00 00 F0 OO OO OO OO OO 00 OO OO OO 00 00 OO 00 OO 00 O0 8 2 Moi in the PCI
189. erface Each access to memory hits a pair of 64 bit DIMMs where one DIMM supplies the lower 64 bits while the other DIMM supplies the upper 64 bits Each DIMM must have the same arrangement in size and number of banks For each valid access to DRAM the memory controller will assert one of eight bank select lines CS7 0 Each bank select line selects one virtual bank A virtual bank is the combination of one bank on the lower DIMM and the corresponding bank on the upper DIMM Row and column addresses select the data offset within the virtual bank Chapter 7 Device Configuration 57 User Manual November 2010 DIMMI DIMM3 CSI 50 CS1 Y Y CSO CS1 CSO CS1 CS0 CS1 CS1 DIMMO DIMM2 DIMMA Didde Figure 7 3 AMD Opteron Processor Virtual Bank Select Line Configuration Memory controllers in AMD Athlon 64 provide eight bank select lines However in this case each bank select is routed to only one physical DIMM bank i e the banks are not ganged AMD Athlon64 Figure 7 4 AMD Athlon 64 Processor Bank Select Line Configuration Configuration of the DIMM Device allows the user to specify SPD data for each simulated DIMM The number of DIMMs supported in the DIMM Device model is dependent on the type of CPU used in the system If the CPU type is an AMD Opteron processor then the DIMM Device will assume a 128 bit memory interface and therefore allow configurati
190. erpreter Chapter 7 Device Configuration 111 User Manual November 2010 7 23 XTR Device XTR is a trace record and playback mechanism that is instrumental for applications that are not dependent on the specific version of the CPU An XTR trace contains the interaction of the processor with the rest of the system in an XML based log file The XTR trace file can be played back and could be used to simulate behavior of one or more devices within a system which in turn may be used to analyze the CPU s performance or to perform conformance analysis between various revs and models of the CPU XTR may also be used in studies where the behavior of some devices needed but the use of an actual device or its software model is either difficult of impossible due to various constraints XTR has two files a binary file which has the memory dump of the system and an XML based text file which contains the log of the events or messages that go in and out a non coherent port of the Northbridge including the DMA signals from devices on the host s secondary bus to the DIMM XTR playback mechanism essentially replaces all the devices including the Northbridge and downwards and feeds the processor with the data present in the XTR XML file The structure of both binary file and XML file is discussed below XTR can be used both in uni processor XTR UP and multi processor XTR MP configurations However currently only XTR UP is supported while XTR MP i
191. ersion 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt AmdEventtTrace version 1 0 gt Init Device DIMM Type MEMI Size 536870912 gt Init Device MEM Type MEMI File xtri bin gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item ICount Data 227 gt The XML attributes are case sensitive but the values are not XTR cannot be used to playback BIOS bring ups Currently XTR does not support AMD V platform Currently XTR traces recorded off SimNow cannot be played back in other XTR Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RIP Data 0000000082D6A8E4 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RAX Data 0000000000628E01 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RBX Data 000000000BOBE41C gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RCX Data 000000000B080E20 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RDX Data 0000000000000080 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RSI Data 0000000000C8FA38 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RDI Data 000000000B09A6BS8 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RBP Data 000000000BOBEFEO gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item RSP Data 00000000B043ADCC gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item R8 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item R9 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item R10 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item R11 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type
192. es In order to use unbuffered DDR DDR2 memory we recommend using the simnow DDRx yyyy spd SPD files To use buffered DDR DDR2 memory use the simnow DDRx yyyy reg spd SPD files for DDR2 x 2 and yyyy size in Mbytes 182 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 A 3 Supported Guest Operating Systems Table 15 5 lists the guest OS compatibility matrix Operating System Known Issues Windows 2000 UP No known issues Windows XP 32 Bit UP No known issues Windows XP 32 Bit MP No known issues Windows XP 64 Bit UP No known issues Windows Server 2003 32 Bit UP No known issues Windows Server 2003 64 Bit UP No known issues Windows Server 2003 64 Bit MP No known issues Windows Vista 32 Bit 64 Bit UP MP No known issues Windows Server 2008 No known issues MS DOS No known issues Linux 32 bit 64 bit RedHat SuSE UP MP Kernel versions 2 4 and 2 6 are all known to work SUSE LiveCD 9 1 Hangs during PCMCIA probe when the VESA BIOS Extension is enabled and the active VESA Mode is not 1024x768 SUSE LiveCD 9 2 No known issues SUSE LiveCD 9 3 No support for initial graphical setup screen Setup screen will appear in text mode SUSE 10 1 No known issues Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 No known issues Solaris x86 No known issues Solaris 10 for AMD64 No known issues Table 15
193. etc in the new machine and they are completely independent of any other machine currently loaded The leading number before the prompt identifies which machine is currently the active machine All subsequent automation commands typed into the console window are directed to the current machine Table 5 2 describes the arguments provided by the newmachine command Argument Description nogui Disable Graphical User Interface GUI gui Enable Graphical User Interface GUI C Enable console mode novga Disable VGA Window vga Enable VGA Window n Disable VGA Window d Disable mouse and keyboard inputs to simulator d Enable mouse and keyboard inputs to simulator i lt path gt Image search path for loading image files m lt path gt Mediator connection string for network adapters to use path Directory to load devices from If used it must be first Table 5 2 Newmachine Command Arguments Usage memmieclaLae Leem e geun ewgea m e gel d d i path m path LL lt path gt The following command creates a new simulation machine 1 simnow newmachine 2 simnow gt The switchmachine n command switches the console window to the machine identified by n All subsequent automation commands typed into the console window are directed to the given machine n 2 simnow switchmachine 1
194. eu OxCOO1001A Table 10 4 MSR Read Examples 4 MSR registers can be modified by adding a Value suffix on the above command syntax Value will be assigned to the MSR register only if the value does not modify any reserved bits in the MSR If an attempt is made to modify 152 Chapter 10 CPU Debugger User Manual November 2010 any reserved bits the MSR write is ignored An example MSR write is shown in Table 10 5 5 This command may not allow access to all MSRs that are supported by the CPU model To view a list of all registers supported by the R command enter R on the debugger command line Command Description Assigns a value of R MC001001A 0000000004000000 0x0000000004000000 to the MSR with an address of 0xC001001A Table 10 5 MSR Write Example 10 1 8 Find Pattern in Memory The find pattern command q1 and qa can be used to search for a specific pattern in memory The pattern that is searched for can either be an ASCII string or a binary pattern If the search is for an ASCII string the noncase option see Table 10 7 Debugger Commands and Definitions on page 158 can be used to match any character Command Description Finds the first occurrence of ASCII pattern PCI in the given memory range 0x1000 0x2000 Same as above but finds all occurrence of the ASCII pattern PCI using the none case sensitive search algorithm Finds all occurrences of the binary pattern 0x55 OxAA in the given memory range
195. ex of the memory dump A linear address can be specified by adding a L suffix to the address Similarly a physical address can be specified by adding a P suffix to the address Examples of the memory dump commands are shown in Table 10 2 4 After the first memory range is displayed you can repeatedly hit Enter to advance the display to the next sequential memory block Command Description Dump memory in byte format starting at physical address 0x00000010 Dump memory in word format starting at linear address OXABCD1234 Dump memory in quad word format starting at linear address OxCOO1CODE Table 10 2 Debugger Memory Dump Command Examples DB 010 p DW abcd1234 L DQ c001c0de L When using AMD V Virtualization Technology in simulation the user can tell the debugger to access memory for either the guest or the host If multiple guests are running under a hypervisor the debugger will acess memory for the last guest that has run The Chapter 10 CPU Debugger 151 User Manual November 2010 user can further qualify an input address using the G Guest and H Host specifiers For example Command Description l Dd c001c0de HL Ad SE host linear memory starting at address Dd c001c0de GL me ee Bom linear memory starting at Dd c001c0de HP nd a Sm SEN physical memory starting at Dd c001c0de GP ee Se Gem physical memory starting at Table 10 3 Debugger AMD V
196. f bits ROPE oy memg SNR ER 0 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Rotate a 16 bit register or memory ROR reg imml 1 D1 0 operand left 1 bit e Rotate a 16 bit register or memory ROR reg mem16 CL p3 0 operand right the number of bits e specified in the CL register Rotate a 16 bit register or memory e operand right the number of bits DOR Aegon Gr NME C1 0 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Appendix A 209 User Manual November 2010 Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Rotate a 32 bit register or memory ROR EE BEER operand left 1 bit v Rotate a 32 bit register or memory ROR reg mem32 CL D3 0 operand right the number of bits ef specified in the CL register Rotate a 32 bit register or memory operand right the number of bits E d E P0308 specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Rotate a 64 bit register or memory ROR reg imm64 1 Di pe operand right 1 bit v Rotate a 64 bit register or memory ROR reg mem64 CL D3 0 operand right the number of bits Ff specified in the CL register Rotate a 64 bit register or memory operand right the number of bits ROR reg mem64 imm8 C1 0 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Loads the sign flag the zero flag the auxiliary flag the parity flag SAHF 9E and the carry flag from the AH d register into the lower 8 bits of the EFL
197. feature is that all code in the system is profiled even code executed with interrupts off and code in all modes 16 bit mode 32 bit legacy mode 32 bit compatibility mode long mode SMM mode etc is measured equally This profiling mechanism is non intrusive no x86 interrupts are taken and profiling does not affect the target machine s selection of code paths at all The dumpprofile command by itself causes all profile blocks to be displayed This output can be quite voluminous The user can select just the most frequently executing blocks by using an optional numeric argument For example dumpprofile 10 will dump the ten most frequently executing blocks Blocks are ordered by their frequency of execution not weighted by the number of instructions in a block Therefore a short block executing 100 times will be displayed before a long block executing 99 times In this example the short block represents fewer total instructions executed The sense of time that the simulator uses is quite simple each instruction takes one instruction count with REP instructions taking one extra count per iteration Therefore profiles from the simulator can differ substantially from those obtained from other tools The simulator works by translating guest x86 instructions to long mode user mode instructions which it then executes These translated instructions are grouped into blocks called translations These translations exist in a translation buffer whic
198. figuration Properties Dialog sss sssseesssesesesesseessee 88 Figure 7 19 PCA9556 SMB Configuration Properties Dialog esses 89 Figure 7 20 Northbridge Logging Capabilities Properties Dialog 91 Figure 7 21 Northbridge HT Link Configuration Properties Dialog 91 Figure 7 22 Northbridge DDR2 Training Properties Dialog esses 92 Figure 7 23 USB Properties Dialog AMD 8111 Southbridge 95 Figure 7 24 CMOS Properties Dialog AMD 8111 Southbridge 96 Figure 7 25 HDD Primary Channel Properties Dialog AMD 8111 Southbridge 97 Figure 7 26 Device Options Properties Dialog AMD 8111 chipset 98 Figure 7 27 Logging Options Properties Dialog AMD 8111 chipset 99 Figure 7 28 PCI Bus Properties Dialog eiie oett teo tone det e eo Een eee ei seas ase eu dts 101 Figure 7 29 AMD 8131 Device Hot Plug Configuration esee 102 Figure 7 30 AMD 8132 Device Hot Plug Configuration esee 103 Figure 7 31 AMD 8132 Properties Dialog eese eene enne 104 Figure 7 32 AMD 8151 Device Properties Dnalog 106 Figure 7 53 SMB Hub Properties Dialog ice dea utei ae dee ede 110 Figure 7 34 A T24C Device Configuration aeneae eene eiat ai sn qa
199. following C NSimNowNsimnow f cheetah Ip bad 5 1 1 Open a Simulation Definition File Click on and select one of the bsd files located in the SimNow directory The bsd files contain pre configured simulation definitions designed to model a specific AMD processor based computer system For this example load the cheetah_Ip bsd file from in the SimNow directory Upon loading the BSD file the Main Window shown in Figure 5 2 will be filled with three sections The left column contains informational graphs if selected see Section 3 4 2 CPU Statistics Graphs on page 29 the top row contains numeric displays of simulation statistics and disk drive access information and the remainder contains the Simulation Display Area of the simulated machine The Simulation Display Area remains blank until the simulated machine is started 38 Chapter 5 Running the Simulator User Manual November 2010 Menu Bar Tool Bar Main Window Numeric Display Components lt V1 AMD SimNow Main Window File view Special Keyboard Help gt m oO g a Graphs amp Numeric Display s B l Simulator Stats IDE Primary Display IDE Secondary Display Diagnostic Ports Floppy Display 0 Host Seconds 0 master read D masterread 00 00 00 00 83 80 0 read 0 Sim Seconds D master written D master written O0 00 00 00 87 84 D written D Avg MIPS D slave read Oslaveread 00 00 00 00 e3 e0 D slave written D slave written D MIPS mode mo
200. for TSC will be ignored Please use M00000010 for writes to TSC Init Devicez CPUO Type APIC Lengthz 1024 gt 116 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 lt Init gt APIC initialization information INSTR Devicez CPUO Typez FJMP ICount 6778 JMP 1 RIP f86b0619 gt An FJMP Instruction RIP is optional and is only used to double check whether if the FJMP is taken at the correct instruction JMP attribute can have the following values JMP 0 Force Do not take jump for this instruction JMP 1 Force Take jump for this instruction Event Devicez CPUO Type IOW ICount 6817 Address a038 Size 2 gt Data Length 2 Valuez 40af gt lt Event gt Defines an IOR or IOW dormant event Event Device CPU0 Type DMAW ICount 8403 Address 000000000c 254340 Length 64 gt lt Data Length 64 Valuez 6d00005f5e5bc3909ac04600b7c04600d4c04600eec0460008c1460022c146003cc1 46 0021c2460067c2460085c24600a3c24600909090909090909090909090 gt lt Event gt Defines a DMAW event Event Devicez CPUO Type PIN ICount 325496 Name INTR Level A gt Defines an INTR PIN event Level A for Asserted or D for Deasserted Name could be INTR RESET A20M NMI PAUSE SMI and lt Unknown gt Event Devicez TO DO IN NB Typez APIC ICount 325496 Namez EXTINT DestinationMode F DeliveryMode 07 Level F TriggerMode F Vector 00 Destination 00 gt Defines an APIC E
201. formally defined XTR XML contains an Initialization section followed by events and instruction sections Last event in the XML must be an EOT event indicating the end of trace Some XTR elements are explained below Please refer to Section 7 23 5 Example XTR XML File on page 121 or the exact and complete structure of the XTR XML All values in the XML are in hexadecimal except for Count and Length values which are always in decimal Exceptions will be stated as necessary Init Device DIMM Typez MEMI Sizez 536870912 gt Memory initialization MEMI information from and for the DIMM device The value for Size attribute the size of DIMM in bytes in decimal base 10 Note that this does not require that XTR playback to have a DIMM device Init Devicez MEM Type MEMI File c simnow xtr DivergenceAt324303 test_snapshot_3dmarkwof_0 bin gt Memory initialization file File path may be relative to the current path Init Devicez CPUO Typez CPU Itemz ICount Data 227 gt Initial instruction count in decimal Different CPUs can have different initial ICounts Init Devicez CPUO Typez CPU Itemz ModeFlags Data 00000001 gt The upper 32 bit of ModeFlags must contain Execution Control flags Please refer to Section 7 23 3 ModeFlags on page 120 for more information Init Device CPU0 Typez SREG Item TSC Dataz 0000000000000000 The initialization information for MSRs Note that initialization information
202. ges are assigned the simulation may be started by clicking on the Play button on the Main Window s Tool Bar 1 AMD SimNow Main Window File View Special Keyboard Help H H Js Wda aA deg Oo Be Numeric Display s B Simulator Stats IDE Primary Display IDE Secondary Display Diagnostic Ports C Floppy Display 58 30 Host Seconds 8704 masterread 919 552 masterread 00 02 03 FF 83 80 1 496 read 16 11 Sim Seconds 512 master written D master written 00 00 00 00 87 84 501 written 18 8 Avg MIPS D slave read D slave read 00 00 00 Dei e D slave written D slave written 0 26 MIPS PIO PIO mode PIO PIO mode Figure 5 4 Installing WindowsXP 42 Chapter 5 Running the Simulator User Manual November 2010 5 2 3 Interaction with the Simulated Machine The simulator will boot and the simulated output screen appears in the bottom right portion of the Main Window which is the Simulation Display Area When the focus is on this portion of the window most keystrokes and mouse operations are passed through to the simulated machine When moving the mouse cursor outside of the Simulation Display area the Main Window returns the mouse cursor and keyboard control to the host machine Some keystrokes such as ALT combinations must be entered using the Special Keyboard Menu At present we have some predefined keystrokes which can be entered by the Special Keyboard Special Keys Generator as shown in Fig
203. ght to discontinue or make changes to its products at any time without notice Trademarks AMD the AMD Arrow logo AMD Athlon AMD Opteron ATI Radeon and combinations thereof SimNow 3DNow AweSim AMD 8111 AMD 8131 AMD 8132 and AMD 8151 are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices Inc HyperTransport is a trademark of the HyperTransport Technology Consortium Microsoft Windows and DirectX are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PCI X and PCIe are registered trademarks of PCI SIG Sysmark is a registered trademark of Business Applications Performance Corp SPECint2000 and SPECfp2000 are registered trademarks of the Standard Performance Evaluation Coorporation SPEC MMX is a trademark of Intel Corporation Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Other product names used in this publication are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies User Manual November 2010 Contents ME ix E EE xiii b C JDVEDAeU S eee Bi ae RS dt M 1 nu E MEET 3 2 1 System Requirements sie Uo oi i ai S YU Enc URN E E R 3 2 2 installation TEE 3 2 3 Directory Structure and Execulable tenete neige ied ipie end 4 24 Setting up Linux for the Simulator eene 4 2 5 Confisuration EE 5 2 6 Updates and QuestiODs i o tree e sii r i a satan EEN 6 3 Graphical User Inte Hape oot dont os cates ot a8 optio tu onte pe Manca a beue 7 3 1 ToolBar Ettel ele 7 3 4 Device Window
204. ging This item when combined with un checking Disable Fastpath Memory when Logging will log both memory space accesses and Fastpath Memory requests themselves What is then logged are slow path Memory Space Accesses and Fastpath Memory handle requests Actual calls to Fastpath Memory i e usage of Fastpath Memory handles are not logged Chapter 9 Logging 147 User Manual November 2010 This page is intentionally blank 148 Chapter 9 Logging User Manual November 2010 10 CPU Debugger 10 1 Using the CPU Debugger The CPU Debugger provides a list of commands and their descriptions when the command is typed in the bottom line of the debug window shown in Figure 10 1 Debugger Attached to CP 40 Eax 00000000 EBX O00000000 Ecx 00000000 EDX OOO000F4A ES5I 00000000 EDI 00000000 ESP OO0000000 EBP 00000000 C5 FO00 DS 0000 ES 0000 FS 0000 G3 0000 S3 0000 EFLAGS oditszapc GIF 1 ASID 00000000 HCR3 0000000000000000 VMHSAVEPA O0O000000000000000 Guest VNCBPA 00000000eeR00000 FOOO EOSB F000 E060 F000 E062 F000 E065 F000 E067 EA6O0EOOO0FO jmp f000 e060 SEEL mow gs A 668508 erT BOAO mow al ab E680 out S0h a FOOO E069 B080 oy al 80h FOOO EO6B E670 70h al FOOO E06D FA cli FOOO0 EO6E FC cla F nn F 6F amp 8CCAOA mer Aw CS OO0000000 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 5 c25 00000010 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 00000020 P FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF F
205. gister with the contents of an 8 ei bit register or memory operand Compare the contents of a 16 bit CMP regl6 reg mem16 3B r register with the contents of a 16 n d bit register or memory operand Compare the contents of a 32 bit CMP reg32 reg mem32 3B r register with the contents of a 32 e bit register or memory operand Compare the contents of a 64 bit CMP reg64 reg mem64 3B r register with the contents of a 64 e bit register or memory operand Compare the byte at DS rSI with the CMPS mem8 mem8 A6 byte at ES rDI and then increment or d decrement rSI and rDI 196 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Mnemonic Opcode Description Supported CMPS mem16 mem16 A7 Compare the word at DS rSI with the word at ES rDI and then increment or decrement rSI and rDI v CMPS mem32 mem32 A7 Compare the doubleword at DS rSI with the doubleword at ES rDI and then increment or decrement rSI and rDI CMPS mem64 mem64 A7 Compare the quadword at DS rSI with the quadword at ES rDI and then increment or decrement rSI and rDI CMPSB A6 Compare the byte at DS rSI with the byte at ES rDI and then increment or decrement rSI and rDI CMPSW A7 Compare the word at DS rSI with the word at ES rDI and then increment or decrement rSI and rDI CMPSD A7 Compare the doubleword at DS rSI with the doubleword at ES rDI and then increment
206. gment selector from the task STR reg64 OF 00 1 register to a 64 bit general purpose ei register Store the segment selector from the task PIRE DEDE sl register to a 16 bit memory location v SWAPGS OF 01 F8 Exchange GS base with KernelGSBase MSR Af SYSCALL OF 05 Call operating system Af SYSENTER OF 34 Call operating system v SYSEXIT OF 35 Return from operating system Af SYSRET OF 07 Return from operating system v UD2 OF 08 Raise an invalid opcode exception v S Set the zero flag ZF to 1 if the segment VERR reg mem16 OF 00 4 selected can be read v Set the zero flag ZF to 1 if the segment VERW oF 00 5 selected can be written v Write modified cache lines to main memory WBINVD OF 09 invalidate internal caches and trigger Af external cache flushes WRMSR OF 30 Write EDX EAX to the MSR specified by ECX m Table 15 9 System Instruction Reference A 6 3 1 INT Interrupt to Vector Opcode Instruction Description CD INT imm Interrupt to Vector BC INT 3 Interrupt to Debug Vector e Interrupt to task gate is not implemented An attempt to execute an interrupt to task gate results in a FeatureNotImplemented exception and the simulation will be stopped e When delivering an exception in an attempt to deliver a hardware interrupt the simulation will not push the resume flag RF onto the stack e Always clears VM NT TF and RF bits in rFLAGS A 6 3 2 IRET Return from Interrupt Opcode Instruction
207. gned The value following the opcode ModRM or SIB byte is either one byte ib two bytes iw or four bytes id Word and doubleword values start wit the low order byte e rb rw rd rq Specifies a register value that is added to the hexadecimal byte on the left forming a one byte opcode The result is an instruction that operates on the register specified by the register code Valid register code values are shown in AMD x86 64 Architecture Programmer s Manual Volume 3 e m64 Specifies a quadword 64 bit operand in memory 190 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 e i Specifies an x87 floating point stack operand ST i The value is used only with x87 floating point instructions It is added to the hexadecimal byte on the left forming a one byte opcode Valid values range from 0 to 7 A 6 2 General Purpose Instructions This chapter describes the function mnemonic syntax and opcodes that the simulator simulates General purpose instructions are used in basic software execution Most of these instructions load store or operate on data location in the general purpose registers GPRs in memory or in both The remaining instructions are used to alter the sequential flow of the program by branching to other locations within the program or to entirely different programs
208. ground for a rectangle selection The devices you select will become the children for the device group An internal connection see Section 3 3 1 Terms on page 15 will be saved inside the group An external connection see Section 3 3 1 Terms on page 15 will be maintained as a connection between the created device group and one of its sibling devices and result in an internal to external port mapping Next right click one of the selected devices and choose Group Devices see Figure 3 14 Delete Device s Del Disconnect Device s Group Device s Ctrl G bim Processor 1 d Ss p Figure 3 14 Group Devices MEI This brings up the device group creation wizard On the first page you give the group an identity as a device by specifying device properties for the device name description Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 23 User Manual November 2010 icon file help file flags You specify a file path to save the known device group because the wizard will create both a known device group bsg file and an instance of the known device as a created device inside your current BSD replacing the devices that you selected for grouping The internal preview left side shows the child devices inside the group the external preview right side shows the group as a device This preview only shows each device icon name number and internal device connections Preview of outside the device group Preview
209. guration SMB Base Address a0 General Maximum Number of Dimms 2 Change MaxDimms Figure 7 5 DIMM Bank Options Properties Dialog Figure 7 5 shows the dialog for configuring DIMM bank options The PDL Error Simulation Control section specifies the type of error that the DIMM device will generate when a memory read is attempted and when a Northbridge PDL is set outside the valid response range These settings apply to all four simulated DIMMs If Enable PDL Error Simulation is selected then the DIMM device monitors PDL settings for all RAM reads The OxFF option specifies that the return data should be forced to all ones The nvert option specifies that the return data should be a bitwise inversion of the valid data The SMB Base Address entry selects the 8 bit address that this DIMM device responds to The SMB address is used for the reading of DIMM SPD data 60 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 D Dimm Bank 45 Properties Connections 10 Logging Options Dimm 0 Dimm 1 Properties Memory Type SDRAM DDA Total Size 256 Number of Banks 1 Device Data Width 8 SPD ROM Contents Address D Number of SPD ROM bytes used 1 Total number of SPD ROM bytes 2 Memory Type 3 Number of row addresses 4 Number of column addresses 5 Number of physical banks on DIMM B Module data width low 7 Module data width high 8 Module volatge interface level lt DDR PDL Respo
210. guration Properties Dialog The PCA9556 allows you to set its SMB base address and input pin values Chapter 7 Device Configuration 87 User Manual November 2010 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device The AMD 68th Generation Integrated Northbridge device supports the AMD 8th generation family of processors AMD Athlon 64 and AMD Opteron processors Although the physical processor chip has a Northbridge built in for simulation purposes the Northbridge is considered as a separate unit Features include HyperTransport technology for coherent and non coherent connections and a memory controller The integrated debugging functions of the ge generation processors are not included Interface The Northbridge device has several connection points It has multiple HyperTransport bus ports that connects to the other AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge devices or to HyperTransport link capable devices e g AMD 8131 PCI X device These ports are mutually exclusive and should be connected to only one other device The Northbridge also has a memory bus to the DIMM devices The CPU bus gives connection points for the CPU The final port is a system message bus port for connection with a Log device A 940 pin g generation processor part AMD Opteron has three HyperTransport ports a 754 pin Ce generation processor part AMD Athlon 64 has one HyperTransport port Initialization and Reset State When first i
211. h is typically about 64 MB When the translation buffer is full and space for another translation is needed the simulator disposes of the contents of the translation buffer and starts a new epoch An epoch in SimNow terms is the period of execution between the flushing of the translation cache It is only the period from the start of the current epoch to the issuance of the dumpprofile command that the profile will cover A 7 18 2 CPU Code Generator Commands Table 15 13 describes all available Code Generator commands and their arguments command args Description Displays an overview of all available commands Displays the current state of the configurable code generator parameters Displays the current value of lt parameter gt e g cpu codegen param FastFloat Sets the current value of lt parameter gt to param parameter value lt value gt For example cpu codegen param FastFloat 0 disables FastFloat Changes the current value of one boolean Help None param None param parameter Sante re Param cbor parameter to true For example cpu codegen enable FastFloat enables FastFloat Changes the current value of one boolean parameter to false For example drsabig PpoTean Parameter cpu codegen disable FastFloat disables FastFloat Appendix A 241 User Manual November 2010 command args Description EE Changes several parameters to the optimize accuracy
212. h the contents of a 32 bit memory e location or register AND the contents of a 64 bit register AND reg64 reg mem64 23 with the contents of a 64 bit memory e location or register Test whether a 16 bit array index is BOUND regl6 mem16 amp mem16 62 r within the bounds specified by the d two 16 bit values in memi 6 amp meml6 Test whether a 32 bit array index is BOUND reg32 mem32 mem32 62 r within the bounds specified by the d two 32 bit values in mem32 amp mem32 Bit scan forward on the contents of BSF regl6 reg mmem8 OF BC r reg mem16 v m e Bit scan forward on the contents of BSF reg32 reg mmem32 OF BC r reg mem32 e e S Bit scan forward on the contents of BSF reg64 reg mmem64 OF BC r reg mem64 v o Bit scan reverse on the contents of BSR regl6 reg mmem8 OF BD r reg mem16 e 5 Bit scan reverse on the contents of BSR reg32 reg mmem32 OF BD r reg mem32 e ei Bit scan reverse on the contents of BSR reg64 reg mmem64 OF BD r reg mem 4 Af 192 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction S ted Mnemonic Opcode Description uus BSWAP reg32 OF C8 rd Reverse the byte order of reg32 m BSWAP reg 4 OF C8 rd Reverse the byte order of reg64 v he val f th l i BT reg mem16 reg16 OF A3 r Go ee ii Roe Selected SS v he val f th d d BT reg mem32 reg32 OF A3 r m
213. hat will be placed in the menu To the right of the equal sign are two strings separated by a comma The first string is the text that is displayed when the user clicks on the What s This help button and the second string is the list of scan codes that are sent when this menu item is selected The two examples shown can also be generated by the Generate Key Codes menu item on the Special Keyboard menu see Section 5 2 3 Interaction with the Simulated Machine on page 45 All user button definitions are stored in the UserButtons section Each user button definition is defined by a single line This example defines one user button BUTTONO The string to the left of the equal sign is the path including the file name of the icon that will be placed in the toolbar menu To the right of the equal sign is the string that Chapter 2 Installation 5 User Manual November 2010 represents the automation command please refer to Section A 7 Automation Commands on page 230 that will be executes when the user clicks on the defined user button Note that minimal parsing of the text is done so it is important that no spaces exist around the separating comma 2 6 Updates and Questions Please refer to the Release Notes located at SimNow docs to obtain the latest information about the simulator If you have any question regarding the simulator please refer to Section 15 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ on page 179 or co
214. he Close BSD button 41 or click on the File menu item and select Close BSD Please make sure you save any changes that have been made to the system definition file before you click on the Close BSD button l Note when closing the BSD file all changes will be lost If you want to modify the current system definition use the Show Device Window button 9 to display the current system configuration The Show Device Window button is disabled when the simulation is currently running To stop the simulation click on the Stop Simulation button is To open the simulator s integrated debugger click on the Show Debugger button A The Show Debugger button is disabled when the simulation is currently running To stop the simulation click on the Stop Simulation button CS Click on the Best Fit To Window button to reduce or enlarge the size of the simulated display area so that the entire simulated display area will fit into the simulators 8 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 main window If you hold down the CTRL key when clicking on the best Dr button it locks into a state where the simulated display area is resized whenever the simulated graphics display resolution changes To clear this locked condition click on the best fit button again 3 2 Device Window The Devices Window shown in Figure 3 2 is opened by selecting View
215. he Emerald graphics device has a PCI slot PCIe and an AGP bus connection only one of which can be used at any time to connect to PCI slots PCIe or AGP bus ports in other devices Initialization and Reset State Upon initial creation this device initializes the internal registers to VGA standard reset state and creates a display window that acts as the VGA display The Configuration options are initialized to enable both the VGA and Emerald Graphics The frame buffer size 1s initialized to 16 Mbytes and the Bios File memory area is initialized to all ones A reset will re load the default PCI configuration registers and place default values in the Chip and FIFO configuration for the Emerald Graphics device Contents of a BSD The data saved in the BSD depends on the mode the graphics controller was in when the BSD was saved If the graphics controller was in VGA mode the BSD file contains the contents of all VGA registers a copy of the 256 Kbyte VGA frame buffer and all configuration information If the graphics controller was in a high resolution mode non VGA in Windows the frame buffer Emerald Graphics registers and PCI configuration registers are saved in the BSD When the BSD file is reloaded all registers and the frame buffer are restored and a display image is captured and displayed in the display window Configuration Options VGA Sub Device Configuration Chapter 7 Device Configuration 63 User Manual November 2010
216. he device view every device has a context menu right click with Help documentation links and What s this floater text In addition to any other support channel you may have we encourage feedback on any problems encountered Please send an email to simnow support amd com 32 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 4 Disk Images The simulator uses hard drive images to provide simulated hard disks to the simulated computer There are several ways to obtain hard drive images e Install your OS onto a hard drive in a real system then move it to the secondary drive in a system and use DiskTool to copy the contents of the drive to an hdd image file e Make a blank hard drive image and a DVD CD ROM ISO image and install a fresh operating system onto the hard drive image To make the hard drive and DVD CD ROM images refer to Section 4 1 Creating A Blank Hard Drive Image and Section 13 DiskTool on page 167 e To use a physical DVD CD ROM e Click on the l button or select View Show Devices to open the Device Window Figure 3 2 on page 9 e Open the Southbridge s properties window by double clicking on it and choose the HDD Secondary Channel tab e Ona Windows host type D where D is the drive letter for the DVD CD ROM and on a Linux host type dev cdrom in the Master Drive Image Filename field e Check the DVD ROM check box below the Fi
217. hell under which a simulation is executed xtrsvc 0 XTR service which facilitates execution of XTR Playback Debug 0 The SimNow Debugger Cpu 0 AweSim CPU Module There might be more CPUs for XTR MP xtrnb 0 XTR Northbridge In persisted BSD XTRNB which is only used during XTR Playback saves and restores events that have been queued but not triggered yet DIMM image and internal states of the XTRNB Complete XTR Playback setup also includes AweSim and optionally the AMD Debugger Please refer to the documentation of AweSim and AMD Debugger for their respective contents in the BSD file XTR Record does not store any contents in the persistent BSD file Log Messages Messages are logged only by XTRNB which is only used during XTR Playback Some of the following may only be logged when xtrnb debug is set to enable Some of the Log messages are 114 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 XTRNB Attempting to allocate large buffer of size 1074503680 Logged during XTR initialization phase just before XTR tries to allocate memory to simulate DIMM XTRNB Sending APIC initialization data to CPUO Logged during XTR initialization phase just before APIC memory is initialized XTRNB Write to TSC ignored Please use M00000010 for writes to TSC Logged during XTR initialization phase XTRNB CPUO rejected Initialization SREG XXXXXXXXXX with zeros Logged during XTR initialization phase and displayed if the ini
218. her When the Connections tab of Device Properties Window appears shown in Figure 6 2 choose the CPU Bus 0 for both devices and click on Ok The connection appears as a line between the two devices on the Device Window Then create an additional connection between the two devices using the Interrupt IOAPIC Bus on each device The Device Window shows only one line for the two connections between these devices You can view the connections for each device by right clicking on the device and looking at the Connections tab in the Device Properties Window B AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 3 Proper Connections 1 0 Logging Logging Configuration Local Connection Point Remote Device Remote Connection Point CPU Bus 0 AweSim Processor 0 CPU Bus 0 CPU Bus 1 CPU Bus 2 CPU Bus 3 HyperTransport Bus 0 AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel 2 HyperTransport Bus 0 HyperTransport Bus 1 HyperTransport Bus 2 HyperTransport Bus 3 Interrupt IOAPIC Bus Interrupt IOAPIC Bus amp weSim Processor 0 Interrupt IDAPIC Bus Memory Bus Dimm Bank 5 Generic Bus Figure 6 2 Connections Tab of Device Properties Window 8 Add the DIMM Device Connect it to the AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge using the Northbridge s Memory Bus and the DIMM s Generic Bus 9 Add the AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel This is a HyperTransport tunnel and AGP bridge Connect it to the Northbridge using each device s HyperTransport Bus 0 10 Add
219. ice on page 90 Chapter 7 Device Configuration 137 User Manual November 2010 7 30 AMD Sao Paulo Device The AMD Sao Paulo device is a 8 core processor node suitable for a G34 socket It emulates a planned product that derives from a revision of the AMD Family10h product line The device iteself is composed of 8 individual AweSim Processor Devices that are connected to a single AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device For more information on Group Devices see Section 3 3 Device Groups on page 3 3 Interface AMD Sao Paulo has several connection ports It has 4 HyperTransport links split to form 8 sub links Each sub link can connect to a coherent HyperTransport device such as another AMD Istanbul Device or a non Coherent HyperTransport device such as AMD amp 131 PCI X Controller These ports are mutually exclusive and should be connected to only one other device Sao Paulo also exposes two DRAM channel interfaces DCTO and DCT 1 to interface with system memory Contents of a BSD See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Configuration Options See the following sections Section 3 3 Working with Device Groups on page 17 Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on
220. ice CPUO Type SREG Item M0000020F Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000250 Data 1E1E1E1E1E1E1E1E gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000258 Data 1E1E1E1E1E1E1E1E gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000259 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000268 Data 1515151515151515 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000269 Data 1010101010101010 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000026A Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000026B Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000026C Data 0404040404040404 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000026D Data 0404040404040404 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000026E Data 1010101010101010 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000026F Data 1010101010101010 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M000002FF Data 0000000000000C00 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000400 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000405 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000408 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M0000040C Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000410 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Ite
221. ice Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 24 JumpDrive Device The purpose of the JumpDrive device is to allow easy import and export of data between a host system and a simulation environment You can import files from the host system on to the JumpDrive where they will be accessible by the simulated operating system Data can also be exported from the JumpDrive back to the host system after the simulation ended The image file used by the JumpDrive is very different from any other image files that the simulator supports The only image files that can be loaded are those image files that are saved by the JumpDrive itself Section A 7 27 JumpDrive on page 251 describes the JumpDrives automation commands Interface The JumpDrive device has an USB interface that can connect to any USB controller e g you can connect the JumpDrive device to the AMD 8111 I O Hub Initialization and Reset State The JumpDrives initialized state is all zero There is no partition table or any other structure defined It is totally blank The default size is 64 Mbytes The JumpDrive is not modified after a reset Contents of a BSD The JumpDrive device saves its entire state including the contents of its memory to the BSD Any data that exists on the JumpDrive device will be restored when the BSD is reloaded Configuration Options Most of the automation commands will return an error if the JumpDrive is plugged into the simulated computer
222. ice v v Emerald Graphics Device v v t3 Matrox G400 G450 Graphics Device v Xx ro pu v v Pcex Test Device x v ag Winbond W83627HF SIO v v Be Memory Device e e cit _ SMB Hub Device v v e PCA9548 Device v v w PCA9556 Device v v e LTC4306 Device v v af AT24C Device v v USE USB JumpDrive v v Hal Desktop Network Adapter v v EXDI Server x v Compaq SmartArray 5304 Xx v Chapter 7 Device Configuration 51 User Manual November 2010 Symbol Device Public Release Full Release USB Keyboard x v USB Mouse Xx v XTR Device Xx v ITE 8712 SIO v v ATI SB600 RD790 v v ATI SB700 RS780 v v ATI SB800 RS880 x v ATI SB400 RS480 RD890 x v ATI Radeon HD 3870 v v AMD Istanbul AMD Sao Paulo AMD x v Magny Cours AMD DeerHound revB QuadCore Socket v v L1 device Table 7 1 Supported Devices To open a Device Property dialog window open the Device View window View Show Devices or click on the 9 button Then Open the workspace popup menu right click on a device in the workspace area and select Configure Device 52 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 1 AweSim Processor Device The AweSim processor device provides a simulation of an AMD microprocessor Interfaces Three interfaces are used in the AweSim device CPU Bus 0 This interface is used to issue memory and I O read and write
223. ified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 16 bit register or memory 4 Bh EEN D1 location left 1 bit v Shift a 16 bit register or memory SHL reg mem16 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits n d Specified in the CL register Shift a 16 bit register or memory 3 location left the number of bits L 4 em i r SHL reg meml6 imm8 Ge specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 32 bit register or memory 4 SHL reg mem32 1 DiR location left 1 bit v Shift a 32 bit register or memory SHL reg mem32 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits ef specified in the CL register Shift a 32 bit register or memory d j EE location left the number of bits SHD Bea pees inng ROSE specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 64 bit register or memory 4 SHL Ee Du d location left 1 bit v Shift a 64 bit register or memory SHL reg mem64 CL D3 4 location left the number of bits D specified in the CL register Appendix A 213 User Manual November 2010 Instruction S ted Mnemonic Opcode Description DEPO Shift a 64 bit register or memory location left the number of bits SHL reg mem64 imm8 pl 7 4 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift bits of a 16 bit destination register or memory operand to the left the number of bits specified in SHLD reg mem16 reg16 imm8 OF A4 r ib an 8 bit immediate values while d shifting i
224. iguration information When the simulation starts the simulated memory is allocated When the simulation is halted and Chapter 1 Overview 1 User Manual November 2010 saved the bsd file will have grown significantly slightly larger than the size of simulated memory The graphics device supplied with the simulator is a 2D and 3D graphics card with linear frame buffer and DirectX 6 support AMD currently plans to provide a graphics model with the simulator which will also have modern 3D hardware acceleration including Microsoft DirectX 9 10 support The simulator is available in two versions Public Release and Full Release Table 1 1 shows the detailed feature matrix Feature Public Release Full Release DIMM configuration Limited f Available devices Limited m Available platform definition files BSDs Limited m Devices can be added and removed from platform definition files m m Connecting and disconnecting devices f f Ships with a variety of different CPU cores Product Files v wv Full product support Limited A Analyzer support y f Support of simulated multi processor systems up to 16 CPUs v v Table 1 1 Feature Overview Public Release versus Full Release To get more information about how to obtain the full release version of the simulator please send an email to simnow amd com Support of up to two cores 2 Chapter 1 Overview User Manual N
225. imilar to the one shown in Figure 14 3 3 Log messages will only be captured from devices that have a check beside their name If the CPU device does not have a check then check it by clicking its check box 4 Repeatthe steps here 172 Chapter 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide User Manual November 2010 14 7Creating a Floppy Disk Image Use the DiskTool utility to create a floppy disk image file suitable for loading into the simulator DiskTool is located in the SimNow Tools directory To create an image of a physical floppy disk see Section 13 DiskTool on page 167 When the image has been created it can be loaded into the simulation as described in Section 5 1 1 Open a Simulation Definition on page 40 Chapter 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide 173 User Manual November 2010 This page is intentionally blank 174 Chapter 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide User Manual November 2010 15 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ Why is the mouse cursor very difficult to control inside the simulated display area The mouse on the Host and in the Guest do not track each other very well in general We provide another mouse mode to help with this Click on the menu item Special Keyboard Grab Mouse and Keyboard see Section 5 2 3 Interaction with the Simulated Machine on page 45 Please note that this mode has interaction issues with the Exceed X server on Windows if you re running a Linux ho
226. imulated PCI Bus which can connect PCI Bus multiple PCI devices such as bridges and PCI VGA ar Winbond W83627HF SIO SuperlO Chip with keyboard mouse and floppy Memory Device Device that contains a configurable BIOS ROM image Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 13 User Manual November 2010 Symbol Device Short Description The SMB hub device is used to connect SMB Hub Device one SMBus to any of four SMBus SMB branches The PCA9548 is an 8 channel System Management Bus SMB switch The AT24C device is a Serial S AT24C Device EEPROM device The JumpDrive device allows easy import and export of data between a host system and a simulation environment The network adapter device models an Ha Desktop Network Adapter Intel Pro 1000 MT Desktop Network Adapter we PCA9548 Device USB JumpDrive Table 3 1 Cheetah 1p bsd Devices 3 2 4 Device Window Quick Reference Table 3 2 lists common tasks that may be done in the Device Window and describes how to complete them Task Where to Find the Properties Enter the AweSim properties page Processor tab and select a CPU type For more information please refer to Change CPU TYEE Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device Figure 7 1 on page 56 Change Members Dype ore dr Ed to Section 14 2 Changing DRAM Size on Go to the Simulation Display Window File Set IDE Prim
227. in A B C or D The third field is an Enable Slot By default all slots are disabled One cannot disable a slot that has a device connected to it Differences from Real Hardware The PCI Bus device differs from other devices in that it is a generic model We do not simulate PCI down to a clock accurate level so devices do not arbitrate for bus ownership or insert wait states for example Chapter 7 Device Configuration 99 User Manual November 2010 7 14AMD 8131 PCI X Controller The AMD 8131 PCI X Controller is a HyperTransport tunnel that provides two PCI X buses and two IOAPICs These PCI X buses may or may not be configured as hot plug capable depending on the platform Interfaces The AMD 8131 has two types of interfaces HyperTransport and PCI buses It has two HyperTransport links HTO and HT1 that can connected to other non coherent HyperTransport link capable devices The PCI bus interfaces in the AMD 8131 must be connected to a PCI bus device which provides the Slot interfaces with which to connect devices for simulation Initialization and Reset State When first initialized the AMD 8131 tunnel is in its default state This is described in detail in the AMD 8131 datasheets Each bridge defaults with hot plug functionality disabled When reset the AMD 8131 takes on all default register values Contents of a BSD The entire configuration of the AMD 8131 device including all state and registers for its
228. increment or decrement rSI v Load quadword at DS rSI into RAX and LODSO AD then increment or decrement rSI v Decrement rCX and then jump short if LOOP rel amp off E2 cb Eq puc e 202 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Supported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Decrement rCX and then jump short if EE EE rCX is not 0 and ZF is 1 v Decrement rCX and then jump short if BOUES BO cp rCX is not 0 and ZF is 0 v Decrement rCX and then jump short if HOOPNA Ee BONG rCX is not 0 and ZF is 0 v Decrement rCX and then jump short if EE E rCX is not 0 and ZF is 1 v Force strong ordering of serialized MEENE E load and store operations v Move the contents of an 8 bit MOV reg mem8 reg8 88 r register to an 8 bit destination e register or memory operand Move the contents of a 16 bit MOV reg mem16 reg16 89 r register to a 16 bit destination e register or memory operand Move the contents of a 32 bit MOV reg mem32 reg32 89 r register to a 32 bit destination e register or memory operand Move the contents of a 64 bit MOV reg mem64 reg64 89 r register to a 64 bit destination e register or memory operand Move the contents of an 8 bit MOV reg8 reg mem8 8A r register or memory operand to an 8 e bit destination register Move the contents of a 16 bit MOV regl6 reg mem16 8B r register or memo
229. ing sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Configuration Options See the following sections Section 3 3 Working with Device Groups on page 17 Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Log Messages See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Difference from Real Hardware See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Chapter 7 Device Configuration 139 User Manual November 2010 7 32 AMD DeerHound Device The AMD DeerHound device is a quad core processor node suitable for an L1 socket It emulates a production product that derives from a revision of the AMD FamilylOh product line The device itself is composed of 4 individual AweSim Processor Devices that are connected to a single AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device For more information on Group Devices see Section 3 3 Device Groups on page 3 3 Interface AMD DeerHound Device has several connection ports It has 4 HyperTransport links split to form 8 sub links Each sub link can c
230. initions In general address and count values can be specified as constants hex for addresses ports and values decimal for counts and lengths or as register names For addresses the CS DS ES FS GS and SS prefixes are also allowed Address values may be suffixed by L to specify a linear address the default or P to specify a physical address Addresses may also be specified by their symbol name Precede the symbol name with a character to distinguish it from a hex constant 156 Chapter 10 CPU Debugger User Manual November 2010 11 Debug Interface The simualtor supports Linux and Windows based debugging It is recommended to use the GDB interface to debug on Linux based hosts The kernel debugger interface can be used to debug on Windows based hosts 11 1 Kernel Debugger This only applies to the Windows version of the simulator and not to the Linux version The simulator can interact with the kernel debugger through e EXDI interface see Section 7 21 EXDI Server Device on page 112 e Serial port connection The serial ports can be configured so that any data read from or written to the simulated serial ports is made available to the host machine The serial ports can each be configured to do this using either a named pipe or the actual serial port hardware The automation commands GetCommPort and SetCommPort are used for this purpose see Section A 7 11 Serial on page 240
231. ink2 Figure 7 21 Northbridge HT Link Configuration Properties Dialog If the DDR DRAM Controller is selected the device will support DDR DRAM In order to use DDR2 DRAM select the DDR2 DRAM Controller Chapter 7 Device Configuration 89 User Manual November 2010 Each HyperTransport link can be enabled separately Each link can be 8 or 16 bits wide Only the 940 pin AMD Opteron processor can have three links a 754 pin AMD Athlon 64 has one HyperTransport port B AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 1 Properties Ee Connections 120 Logging Logging Configuration DDR2 Traning Name i Max Name i Max Name Max syncLat Oxf WriteDataTiming HiByte Ox2f ReadDQSTiming HiByte DQSReceiverEnable Oxff WriteDataTiming HiByte O x2f ReadDQSTining HiByte DQSReceiverEnable Oxff WriteDataTiming HiByte Ox f ReadDQSTiming HiByte DQ SReceiverEnable loxtt writepataTining HiByte x2t ReadDQSTiming HiByte DQSReceiverEnable T Oxff WriteDataTiming HiByte Ox2f ReadDQSTiming HiByte DQSReceiverEnable Datt WriteDataTiming HiByte OxZt ReadDQSTiming HiByte DQSReceiverEnable JOxff WriteDataTiming HiByte jOx2f ReadDQSTining HiByte DQ SReceiverEnable Datt WriteDataTiming HiByte OxZzf ReadDQSTiming HiByte DQSReceiverEnable lox WriteDataTiming LoByte Ox2zf ReadDQSTiming LoByte WriteDataTiming LoByte Ox2f ReadDQSTiming LoByte WriteDataTiming LoByte Ox2f ReadDQSTiming LoByte WriteDataTiming LoByte l
232. inside it a single child device Dimm Bank 0 that is configured with two dimm s type DDR2 1GB each qe Dimm DDR2 1GBx2 2e nn Configured as DDR2 2 dimm 1GB each Dimm Bank 0 3 D Figure 3 11 Example DIMM Device Group When the user instantiates this theoretical known device Dimm DDR2 IGBx2 as a created device we get a created device Dimm DDR2 1GBx2 0 with a child device Dimm Bank 0 that is already configured as DDR2 2 dimm 1GB each Our resulting main device GUI would look like this 20 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 d gt Machine 1 Drag Icons to insert new devices Shifi drag to add connections Show Deprecated Devices L4 Dimm Bank 2 9 Dimm DDR2 1GBx2 Dimm DDR2 1GBx2 0 Figure 3 12 Created DIMM Device Group The device GUI for the children of Dimm DDR2 1GBx2 0 would look like this a Machine 1 gt Dimm DDR2 1GBx2 0 Drag Icons to insert new devices Shift drag to add connections Show Deprecated Devices X AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Dimm Bank 0 Ree Figure 3 13 Children of DIMM Device Group If we looked at the options and configuration of the device library gt Machine 1 gt Dimm DDR2 IGBx2 0 gt Dimm Bank 0 either from the GUI or from the console we would see that it is already configured as DDR2 with 2 dimm slots 1GB each This example demonstrates a broad concept An
233. install a DVD ROM at any hard disk device location Secondary Master Primary Slave etc turn on the DVD ROM checkbox By default the Secondary Master in all distributed BSDs has DVD ROM checked and is a DVD ROM device Copying files into the simulator corresponds to putting data into some media on the Host which will be inserted into the simulation The choices for doing this are Create an ISO image with the data inside it then get it into your guest OS Use the File Set IDE Secondary Master Image item in the Main Window Menu to insert it into the DVD ROM simulation which is by default on the secondary master position in all BSDs Finally mount it in your guest OS Chapter 5 Running the Simulator 41 User Manual November 2010 e Use a raw floppy disk image in a manner similar to the above It s a lot smaller and a bit more hassle so we don t recommend it e Mount a hard disk image on the host On a Linux host you can use the loopback device e Use the JumpDrive USB device to copy files into the simulator and out of the simulator see Section A 7 27 JumpDrive on page 251 Copying files out of the simulator corresponds to putting some data into some media in the guest which will then be extracted on the host To do this mount a hard drive image on the host after placing the data on it in the guest On a Linux host you can use the loopback device 5 2 2 Run the Simulation Once the disk ima
234. ion User Manual November 2010 7 16PCI X Test Device This PCI X Test Device model provides a simulation of a generic PCI X device Its main purpose is to provide BIOS programmers with a tool to test the PCI X configuration cycle This device is implemented as a single function device Interface The interface varies from system to system In the AMD Athlon 64 or AMD Opteron processor based system configurations it can be connected to AMD 8131 PCI X or AMD 8111 Southbridge devices Initialization and Reset State At creation and reset states the PCI X device registers have the default hard coded values By default the PCI X device is set to have no I O memory space and interrupt capability The PCI X device has a default Device ID and Vendor ID At reset the device configuration does not change and the values from the device configuration will be eventually read into the PCI X registers when the configured system is restarted Contents of a BSD PCI X register and interrupt signals are saved in the BSD Differences from Real Hardware This is a generic PCI X device It doesn t have real a memory buffer and I O buffer For memory and I O space transaction if the transaction belongs to this device s memory or I O address range the PCI X device simply outputs a message to the Log Window which identifies its memory or I O cycle Interrupt can be de asserted by doing an I O transaction Interrupts can also be de asserted manually by u
235. ion device ExternalPortMap Delete out shell SetDeviceGroupOption device ExternalPortMap Rename out out renamed And we can specify whether or not to use the created device child s device state for each child device for if when the group is exported as a known device shell SetDeviceGroupOption device ExportDeviceState optional child device 0 1 There is also a shell command to get the options ie to print them to the console stdout This can print the values for either options ExternalPortMap or ExportDeviceS tate shell GetDeviceGroupOption device group ExternalPortMap ExportDeviceState variable args shell GetDeviceGroupOption device group ExternalPortMap optional child device shell GetDeviceGroupOption device group ExportDeviceState optional child device We can export a created device group including the options we set to a known device file To do this we also specify values for the known device s identity as a device shell ExportDeviceGroupToFile device group name desc icon help flags bsg file path The previous command only exports the created device group to a file as a known device it does not change our existing created device group However after we export our created device to a file we can then replace our created device with an instance of the device we exported By doing this we give our device a new device identity
236. ion register or memory operand to the right the number of bits specified in the CL register while shifting in bits from the second operand SHRD reg mem32 reg32 imm8 OF AC r ib Shift bits of a 32 bit destination register or memory operand to the right the number of bits specified in an 8 bit immediate value while shifting in bits from the second operand SHRD reg me326 reg32 CL OF AD r Shift bits of a 32 bit destination register or memory operand to the right the number of bits specified in the CL register while shifting in bits from the second operand SHRD reg mem64 reg64 imm8 amp OF AC r ib Shift bits of a 64 bit destination register or memory operand to the right the number of bits specified in an 8 bit immediate value while shifting in bits from the second operand amp SHRD reg mem16 reg16 CL OF AD r Shift bits of a 64 bit destination register or memory operand to the right the number of bits specified in the CL register while shifting in bits from the second operand STC F9 Set the carry flag CF to 1 STD FD Set the direction flag DF to 1 STOS reg8 Store the contents of the AL register to ES rDI and then increment or decrement CDI STOS regi AB Store the contents of the AX register to ES rDI and then increment or decrement CDI STOS reg32 AB Store the contents of the EAX registe
237. is c EE v BT reg mem64 reg64 OF A3 r mo uu uu M uec BT reg mem16 imm8 OF BA 4 ib eL puce PEEHoD E re e BT reg mem32 imm8 OF BA 4 ib en aaa phere tececo bre ES Yd BT reg mem64 imm8 OF BA 4 ib eee i Ene Serected DIE ED Ff Copy the value of the selected bit to BTC mem mem16 reg16 OF BB r the carry flag and then complement Af the selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTC mem mem32 reg32 OF BB r the carry flag and then complement D the selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTC mem mem64 reg64 OF BB r the carry flag and then complement Af the selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTC reg mem16 imm8 OF BA 7 ib the carry flag and then complement e the selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTC reg mem32 imm8 OF BA 7 ib the carry flag and then complement ei the selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTC reg mem64 imm8 OF BA 7 ib the carry flag and then complement v the selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTR reg memi6 regi6 OF B3 r the carry flag and then clear the n d selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTR reg mem32 reg32 OF B3 r the carry flag and then clear the n d selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTR reg mem64 reg64 OF B3 r the carry flag and then clear the ef selected bit Copy the value of the selected bit to BTR reg mem16 imm8 OF BA 6 ib the carry flag and then clear the Af selected bit
238. itialized to all ones A reset will re load the default PCI configuration registers and place default values in the Chip and FIFO configuration for the Matrox G400 graphics device Contents of a BSD The data saved in the BSD depends on the mode the graphics controller was in when the BSD was saved If the graphics controller was in VGA mode the BSD file contains the contents of all VGA registers a copy of the 256 Kbyte VGA frame buffer and all configuration information If the graphics controller was in Matrox Power Graphics Mode non VGA in Windows the linear frame buffer Power Graphics registers and PCI configuration registers are saved in the BSD When the BSD file is reloaded all registers and the frame buffer are restored and a display image is captured and displayed in the display window Configuration Options Figure 7 10 shows the Information tab The following information describes the active configuration of the Matrox G400 graphics device The Graphics Hardware Model can be set to one of the following models e Matrox Millennium G400 PCI e Matrox Millennium G400 AGP Currently there is only support for the Matrox G400 chip with SingleHead feature support available The Graphics BIOS version is the version of the BIOS that is assigned and used by the graphics device If you flash the BIOS the version number will change For more information about flashing the graphics device BIOS see Figure 7 11 The Graphics Memory sec
239. ix A 239 User Manual November 2010 LoadAnalyzer lt analyzer_file gt lt args gt Loads the analyzer arguments args analyzer_file with specified ShowAnalyzers Shows all loaded analyzers EnableAnalyzer num lt 011 gt Enables 1 or disables 0 analyzer specified by num UnloadAnalyzer lt num gt Unloads analyzer specified by num MCAFault lt bank gt Causes a generic MCA fault if GenerateMCAFault is lt GenerateMCAFault 0l1 gt Status true 1 at specified Bank AddressReg and status Reg gt lt Address Reg gt ProductFile lt FileName gt Use product file to set fuses and configure CPU and Northbridge CodeGen lt command gt lt args gt Sets or disables and enables code generator settings and options Command must be one of the commands shown in Table 15 13 Args depends on the command parameter see Table 15 13 DumpProfile lt blocks to dump gt This command is limited to showing a profile of blocks without symbols based on the current epoch For more information please refer to Section A 7 18 1 Profiling in SimNow A 7 18 1 Profiling in SimNow Technology Here is an example use of the profiling command and its output 1 simnow gt dumpprofile 3 34962861 000000 instructions executed since the last epoch Executed 3571672 times CS D 0 LongBit 0 00000000000041de 00000000000041e3 0000000000000000 Executed
240. kConnect auto to restart link negotiation Similarly in a multi machine setup the first simulator session will also need to perform a linkConnect auto to ensure that the initial guest sees that other simulator peers have been connected When neither of the above conditions is met the link appears disconnected in the guest It may be necessary to re start link negotiation via linkConnect auto This will cause Chapter 7 Device Configuration 127 User Manual November 2010 the NIC model to retry a mediator connection or search for any simulator peers running in the same process 7 25 2 The Mediator Daemon The mediator provides several services for the simulator session e Access to real network resources DHCP servers etc Note that the mediator will need to be run with supervisor privileges in order to snoop network traffic on its host e Bridge communication to other simulator sessions e Group individual sessions into domains so that identical BSD s with identical MACIIP pairs can be run simultaneously in separate domains e Provides an optional gateway to block broadcast traffic and to perform Network Address Translation NAT on identical BSD s in different domains The mediator can route traffic to and from the real network This operation requires low level kernel actions so the mediator must be run by a supervisor with sufficient OS privileges Users may want to have one machine on the subnet dedicate
241. kspace Popup Menu Figure 3 3 on page 10 Select the tab for the DIMM slot that you wish to alter Chapter 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide User Manual November 2010 4 Select an SPD byte description from the large list box The corresponding data byte will be shown as two hex digits in the small edit box to the right of the list box 5 Type anew hex value in the edit box 6 Optionally the altered SPD data can be saved to a file by clicking the Export SPD button 7 Click OK to close the configuration property sheet and accept the changes If the contents of SPD byte 0 Number of SPD Bytes Used is set to zero the DIMM will not respond to any SMBUS accesses This allows simulation of a DIMM module that does not include an SPD ROM 14 4 Clearing CMOS View the Devices Window and double click on the Southbridge Choose the CMOS tab 1 Save the current CMOS to disk and call it blank cmos Open the file in Notepad and change all the data fields from their current values to the desired fill pattern usually 0x00 or OxFF do not include the h character in the file Save the file These first three steps are needed only once 3 Reload the file into the simulator whenever you wish to clear CMOS 4 View the Diagnostic Port Output in the Main Window as shown in Figure 14 2 Diagnostic Ports 00 00 00 00 83 80 00 00 00 00 87 84 00 00 00 00 e3 e0 Figure 14 2 Diagnostics Display The Diagnostic Display
242. lator and gdb The current implementation requires the simulator to be started and told to be ready for gdb to connect and then having gdb connect As long as the gdb command target remote is issued last the interface should be established It has been observed that after shutting down the simulator the port used by the gdb interface may not become immediately available for reuse If this happens just shut down both the simualtor and gdb and start again and the problem should go away 11 2 1 Simple Approach This assumes you are running the simulator and gdb on the same machine e Start the simualtor 158 Chapter 11 Debug Interface User Manual November 2010 e Run the following automation command 1 simnow gt shell gdb lt ENTER gt e Start gdb gdb gt set architecture 1386 x86 64 lt ENTER gt gdb gt target remote 2222 ENTER 11 2 2 Alternate Approach This assumes you are running the simualtor and gdb on the same machine e Start the simulator e Run the following automation command 1 simnow shell gdb ENTER e Add the following to your gdbinit file define simnow set architecture i1386 x86 64 target remote 2222 end e Start gdb gdb gt simnow lt ENTER gt 11 2 3 Using Another Port on the Same Machine The simualtor defaults to using port 2222 but can be directed to use another port e Start the simulator e Run the following autom
243. lavelOl1 offlonlOl1 Set master or slave to BD ROM device Blu ray 232 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description SetConnectable offlonlOl1 Sets whether the ide port is available to connect a drive on the platform Disable clears the drive image and prevents executation of other automation commands For IDE aka PATA this is for both master and slave drives GetConnectable Returns whether we can connect a drive A 7 3 SATA 1 simnow gt sata usage Automation Command Description Image lt filename gt Creates a volume for the given disk image For e g sata image i cOd0 img GetImage Displays the disk image for the given volume Journal offlonlOl1 Turns journaling on or off for the drive SATA has one drive per channel JournalStatus Returns enabled or disabled if journaling is enabled or disabled for the drive JournalSize Returns the journal size for the dirve JournalSave filename Saves the contents of the disk journal to a file JournalLoad filename Loads the contents of the disk journal from a file Commits the contents of the disk journal on the foumalen t drive to the disk image Toural Clears the journal discards any changes made to the drive This may no longer do anything it originally Tournal bng enabled a debug verification mode DVDROMStatus Displays the sta
244. ldren of a device group External Connection A connection between a device s parent group and a sibling of the parent group Under the hood a connection to a device group is routed to one of its children via an internal to external port mapping between the child device s port and the parent device s port 3 3 2 Concept Diagrams A device group is a device with its own identity name description icon help file etc But it is also like a BSD in fact every BSD has a single created device group called the Machine device Tthe default user s view into SimNow is from the context of looking inside the Machine device This encapsulation of devices inside device group s results in a hierarchy tree with a Machine device group as the root node In this way a device group tree is like a folder directory tree folder is to device group as file is to device library as demonstrated in Figure 3 6 Figure 3 6 Device group BSD with one machine group and three child devices Any device can also connect to its sibling devices Figure 3 6 does not depict any port connections Figure 3 7 depicts the same example device tree but with a different conceptual view devices are inside groups arrows represent possible port connections between sibling devices 16 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 oe 1 lm Figure 3 7 Device group different conceptual view devices are inside groups The previous diagrams
245. lename field The simulator can access media via the following mechanisms e IDE Hard Disk e DiskTool IDE hard disk image is a flat file consisting of a 512 byte header the IDE probe sector and a raw image of data from the hard disk if the raw data is cut off before the end of the disk the disk image from there on will just read as Zero e IDE DVD ROM The simulator does not simulate DVD ROM insert events e DVD ROM disk image is a flat file of the raw image of a data DVD CD ROM These correspond exactly to ISO file images for example e IDEDVD ROM direct access e Floppy Disk e Floppy disk image a flat file of the raw image of a floppy disk e Floppy direct access Please refer to Section 13 DiskTool on page 167 to find out how to set up a Windows or Linux hard drive image for the simulator 4 1 Creating A Blank Hard Drive Image To create a hard drive image use DiskTool You can start DiskTool by launching disktool exe in your install directory For convenience you can create a desktop shortcut to launch DiskTool When you run DiskTool you will see the DiskTool dialog Chapter 4 Disk Images 33 User Manual November 2010 window as shown in Figure 4 1 It will also open a shell window as shown in Figure 4 2 that is used to inform the user about all physical drives which DiskTool has detected ll SinNow DiskTool Physical Drives Create Disk Image From Host Disk H PHYSICALDRIVED C GE
246. ler creating device PCI Bus creating device PCI Bus creating device 12 Emerald Graphics allocate map memory creating device 13 PCA9548 Device creating device 14 AT24C Device creating device 15 USB JumpDrive creating device 16 Intel R gt Pro 1666 MT Desktop Network Adapter BSD Load completed Figure 3 15 Console Window 3 4 1 SimStats and Diagnostic Ports The SimStats and Diagnostic Ports numeric displays appear in the Main Window when a Southbridge device is added to the workspace The SimStats display shows host and simulation elapsed time and a simulation MIPS counter that is updated as the simulation runs The simulator effectively has a built in POST card output ports 80h to 87h and eOh to e3h You can see these codes on the right upper part of the Main Window in the Diagnostic Ports section 28 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 Host Seconds shows the number of user and system seconds of host CPU time the These three lines of four bytes each show the values written to the diagnostic programmed l O ports Mostly these simulator has uses since it etarted Simulator Stats Diagnostic Ports ports are written by the 354 00 Host Seconds 00 02 00 0383 80 BIOS and low level Sim Seconds is the 6 70 Sim Seconds 00 00 00 00 87 84 diagnostic software number of seconds of simulated time that 10 8 Avg MIPS 00 00 00 CA e3 e0 has past since th
247. loppy Disk Jaeger ieee le oot darlene 177 15 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ eese eeeeee entente ennt 179 Al ice iiio RN 183 Al Format of Floppy and Hard Drive Images 183 A25 Ehe cona geegent Eer 184 A 2 1 Computer Platform Files BSD i e eth enero eir ces 184 A22 Device Files BSL iis csuetaeeta ese PATHS ESI SES eves 184 A 2 3 Product Files CD ote REND EE EA 184 A 2 4 Image Files HDD FDD ROM SPD BIN 185 AQAA Hard Disk Image Files eee esee tate to neenon pass 185 A 2 4 2 Memory SPD as actis iet A NEET 186 A3 Supported Guest Operating Systems geesde edel 187 AAS CRUD EE 188 A 4 1 CPUID Standard Feature Support Standard Function 0x01 188 A 4 2 CPUID AMD Feature Support Extended Function 0x80000001 188 f EN do UIN IS NETT PEE 190 A 5 1 FSAVE FRSTOR and FSTENV FLDENYV eee 190 A 5 2 Triple Panne T 190 A 5 3 Performance Monitoring Counter Extensions eese 190 A 5 4 Microcode PatehinS tee ebe oe a Re dp ee 190 A 5 5 InStr ction CONGO GY eode ue fo DE MS secuta tuit pee 190 A6 Insteuctioir Referente ues ee 192 A 6 1 horum 192 A 6 1 1 Mnemonic SVX EE 192 Ao liz Opcode Syniaxos aun ted AE redes 194 A 6 2 General Purpose Instructions 2 ssscsct gsveechdeseaeneadseqedadesoadeds gei eade ee punt AR 195 A 6 3 System Diste ollolls TEE 223 A 6 3 1 INT Interrupt to Veolor
248. loxz ReadDQSTiming LoByte WriteDataTiming LoByte j0x2f ReadDQSTiming LoByte WriteDataTiming LoByte Ox2f ReadDQSTiming LoByte WriteDataTiming LoByte Ox2f ReadDQSTiming LoByte WriteDataTiming LoByte Ox2f ReadDQSTiming LoByte Figure 7 22 Northbridge DDR2 Training Properties Dialog When the DDR2 DRAM Controller is selected and DDR2 DRAM is being used you can manually modify these values to verify the correctness of the DDR2 training algorithmn The DDR2 Training Properties Dialog contains the lowest and highest values that the BIOS can program into these registers While these registers are programmed out of bounds DRAM access will be corrupted Note the DDR2 Training Properties Dialog is only useful for BIOS developer and the values should only be modified and used by BIOS developers Log Messages If Log PCI Configuration Cycles is selected the device produces log messages whenever the PCI configuration data register OxCFC is accessed Log files can get very large Reads from this I O mapped register produce PCI CONFIG READ messages and writes to the register produce PCI CONFIG WRITE messages The formats of the PCI CONFIG READ and PCI CONFIG WRITE messages are as follows PCI CONFIG READ Bus a Device b Function c Register d Data e PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus a Device b Function c Register d Data e where a b c d and e are all hexadecimal numbers 90 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November
249. lt SlotID gt Returns the DeviceID of specified slot SlotID BaseIRQ lt SlotID gt alblcld Sets the Base IRQ of slot SlotID to A B C or D GetBaseIRQ lt SlotID gt Returns the Base IRQ of slot SlotID Slot lt SlotID gt 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 slot wit specified S otID SlotStatus lt SlotID gt Returns enabled if slot SlotID is enabled otherwise it returns disabled GetConfig Displays PCI Bus configuration information 242 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 A 7 22 SIO 1 simnow gt sio usage Automation Command Description The Lock 1 or Unlock 0 Registers option activates BreakOnLock 011 the breakpoint anytime the lock or unlock sequence is hit GetLockStatus Returns enabled if BreakOnLock is enabled otherwise it returns disabled BreakOnRead 011 Enable 1 or disable 0 breakpoints whenever any of the device configuration registers is read GetReadStatus Returns enabled if BreakOnRead is enabled otherwise it returns disabled BreakOnWrite 011 Enable 1 or disable 0 breakpoints whenever any of the device configuration registers is modified GetWriteStatus Returns enabled if BreakOnWrite is enabled otherwise it returns disabled GetConfig Displays SIO configuration information A 7 23 Memory Device 1 simnow gt memdevic usag Automation Command Description Save filename Creates file filename and saves the c
250. m M000001D9 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M000001DB Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M000001DC Data 0000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M000001DD Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M000001DE Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000277 Data 0007010600070106 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000174 Data 0000000000000008 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000175 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000176 Data 000000008052D480 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item MXCSR Data 0000000000001F80 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMOO Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMOO Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMO1 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMO2 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMO3 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Chapter 7 Device Configuration 121 User Manual November 2010 Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMM04 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item XMMO5 Data 00000000000000000000000000000000
251. mand Description SetLoopback 0l1 0 disables loop back 1 enables loop back GetLoopback EH true if loop back is enabled otherwise it returns 236 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description GetCommPort Returns information regarding how the simulated serial port is configured The result will be either pipe SimNow COMn This indicates that data is being transported through a named pipe with the given name The n will be either 1 for the first serial port or 2 for the second serial port COMn 57600 This indicates that data is being transported through the given serial port on the host machine using a baud rate of 57600 none This indicates that data written to the simulated serial port is discarded and no data is ever received SetCommPort none pipe COMn BAUD gt Sets the mode of communication you want to use with the simulated serial port pipe Tells the simulator to use a named pipe as the method of transport for serial data to from the simulated machine The pipe name will be of the form pipe SimNow COMn where n will be 1 for serial port 1 and 2 for serial port 2 The name is not user configurable COMn Tells the simulator to use one of the host serial ports identified by n as the transport for data to and from the simulated machine n can be any value between 1 and 255 and must be an actual COM port that is present on the host s
252. me CPU execution This will execute the debugger s Go command returning the CPU to continuous execution If a breakpoint is hit the simulation will pause and the debugger will gain attention Command Description Break on the next execution of the instruction located at linear address 0x1234ABCD Break on the third execution of the instruction located at linear address 0x1234ABCD Break on the fourth read of the memory location OxABCD1234 linear Break on the fourth access read or write of the memory location OxABCD 1234 linear BR c001001f r V1 Break on write of value 1 to the MSR C001 001F BI 80 w 3 Break on the fourth write to I O address 0x80 BX 1234abcd BX 1234ABCD 2 BM abcd1234 r 3 BM abcd1234 3 Table 10 1 Debugger Breakpoint Command Examples 10 1 2 Single Stepping the Simulation 1 Stop the simulation as described in Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on pags 7 2 Open the Debugger Window View Show Debugger or click on gt The simulation will pause and the Debugger Window will appear 3 The bottom pane in the Debugger Window is the debugger command line When the Debugger Window has attention enter T on the debugger command line The debugger Trace command will execute causing the CPU device to execute one instruction and then return attention to the debugger 4 The debugger will repeat the last entered command if you just type Enter
253. mem64 AF register with the quadword at ES rDI d and then increment or decrement rDI Compare the contents of the AL SCASB AE register with the byte at ES rDI and d then increment or decrement rDI Compare the contents of the AX SCASW AF register with the word at ES rDI and d then increment or decrement rDI Compare the contents of the EAX a register with the doubleword at SE AR ES rDI and then increment or v decrement rDI Compare the contents of the RAX SCASQ AF register with the quadword at ES rDI ei and then increment or decrement CDI SETO reg mem8 OF 90 Set byte if overflow OF 1 ef SETNO reg mem8 OF 91 Set byte if not overflow OF 0 ef SETB reg mem8 OF 92 Set byte if below CF 1 v SETC reg mem8 OF 92 Set byte if carry CF 1 e SETNAE reg mem8 OF 92 Ss byte if not above or equal CF A 212 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Grane Mnemonic Opcode Description PP SETNB reg mem8 OF 93 Set byte if not below CF 0 ef SETNC reg mem8 OF 93 Set byte if not carry CF 0 A SETAE reg mem8 OF 93 Set byte if above or equal CF 0 A SETZ reg mem8 OF 94 Set byte if zero ZF 1 m SETE reg mem8 OF 94 Set byte if equal ZF 1 v SETNZ reg mem8 OF 95 Set byte if not zero ZF 0 v SETNE reg mem8 OF 95 Set byte if not equal ZF 0 A Set byt
254. mit Data 00000000000007FF gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item GDTBase Data 000000008003F000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item GDTLimit Data 00000000000003FF gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DRO Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DR1 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DR2 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DR3 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DR6 Data 00000000FFFFOFFO gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item DR7 Data 0000000000000400 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CRO Data 0000000080010031 gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CR2 Data 000000000000000C gt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CR3 Data 000000000043D000 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CR4 Data 00000000000006D9 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type CPU Item CR8 Data 0000000000000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item TSC Data 00000000000000E3 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item M00000010 Data 00000000000000E3 gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0010111 Data 0000000001000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0000080 Data 00000000 gt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0000100 Data 000000007FFDEOOO gt lt Init Device CPUO Type SREG Item MC0000101 Data 0000000000000000 gt lt
255. more correctly detects that the DVD CD image has changed For example press Stop button 1 simnow ide l image 0 off press go button wait 5 seconds press Stop button 1 simnow gt ide l image 0 c fc3 x86 64 disc2 iso The serial connection to Microsoft s KLernel Debugger seems to be unstable What can I do See Section 11 1 Kernel Debugger on page 161 How can I obtain the full release version of the simulator See Section 1 Overview on page 1 Why doesn t the OS find a connected USB device The USB port may not be soft enabled For example to soft enable USB port Chapter 15 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 177 User Manual November 2010 1 simnow usb 0 Port enable O0 178 Chapter 15 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ User Manual November 2010 A Appendix A 1 Format of Floppy and Hard Drive Images The floppy disk format assumes a standard 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk consisting of 80 cylinders 2 heads and eighteen 512 byte sectors per head 36 sectors per cylinder The image file consists simply of each sector starting with the first sector of the first cylinder on the first head and proceeding sequentially through the last sector of the last cylinder on the second head The total size of the image file is identical to the total capacity of a 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk or 1 474 560 bytes The hard disk image is formatted in a similar fashion with the exception that the t
256. n eese 152 10 1 3 Stepping Over an Instruction ace deeded 152 10 1 4 Skipping an Instruction eesseeeeseeeerennner enne enne enne 153 10 1 5 Viewing a Memory ReglOD oie etre erre edes de eau eas eb neos aote eudds 153 10 1 6 Reading PCI Configuration Registers 154 10 1 7 Reading CPU MSR COHtenls iiie eise Seege 154 10 1 8 Find Pattern in Memory EE 155 10 2 Debugger Command Reference sssessssssesssesesseetsstesseesseessetesseeesseessresseessee 155 tI Debug ee n e o oie esed eae Rania ade 161 Contents v User Manual November 2010 HELL Kerel Debugger 5i t ONERE EH RUE EOS TURN UE PIE 161 LII GDB Interface E 162 IEZI Simple EE 162 T122 Alternate Approach acoso reos eoe eoa EE E EAE eens 163 11 2 3 Using Another Port on the Same Machine ees 163 11 2 4 Using Two Separate Machines ioo die dose eh 163 11 3 Linux Host Serial Port Communieation etre 163 129 Command API EE 165 13 Disk To D 167 I3 L Command Line Mode uet e 167 19 2 GULMOde cadena clei Sete erneut Nate chit teehee E LE KE 168 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide AA 173 14 k ssen ed 173 DE Changing DRAM SIZE ot nee ose eere eg 173 14 3 Changeme SPD Data rece ove d ee 174 144 Cleanng CMOS ED 175 14 5 Logging PCI Configuration Cycles esee 175 14 6 Aspe ping CPU Cycle Siy sinos sereen a a E aT E aS aan 176 14 7 Creating a F
257. n bits from the second operand Shift bits of a 16 bit destination register or memory operand to the SHLD reg mem16 reg16 CL OF A5 r left the number of bits specified in n d the CL register while shifting in bits from the second operand Shift bits of a 32 bit destination register or memory operand to the A left the number of bits specified in SHLD reg mem32 reg32 imm8 OF A4 r ib aa 8 bit imediate valus while e shifting in bits from the second operand Shift bits of a 32 bit destination register or memory operand to the SHLD reg me326 reg32 CL OF A5 r left the number of bits specified in d the CL register while shifting in bits from the second operand Shift bits of a 64 bit destination register or memory operand to the left the number of bits specified in SHLD reg mem64 reg64 imm8 OF A4 r ib an 8 bit inmediate SE while ei shifting in bits from the second operand Shift bits of a 64 bit destination register or memory operand to the SHLD reg mem16 reg16 CL OF A5 r left the number of bits specified in Af the CL register while shifting in bits from the second operand Shift an 8 bit register or memory SHR SE Donya operand right 1 bit v Shift an 8 bit register or memory SHR reg mem8 CL D2 5 operand right the number of bits Af specified in the CL register Shift an 8 bit register or memory operand right the number of bits SHR reg mem8 imm8 Go Te S08 specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 16 bit register
258. n both simplify adding a quad core node and present the user with a hierarchical view So we will give some examples with quad core processor nodes A device group is not required to specify archive data for its child devices When such a known device group is instantiated as a created device it simply lets its children use their own default and initial configuration state We can create an abstract or generic 4 core Node device group that does not represent a particular hardware implementation just like a non configured Dimm Bank does not represent a particular hardware implementation until it is configured ap core Node f e MN AweSim Processor 0 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 4 A device group can optionally specify initial and default archive data device state for each of its child devices A device group with five children could specify archive data for 0 1 2 3 4 or all 5 children We could have an AMD 4 core CPU xxxx that specifies archive data for all five of its children configured with the theoretical product ID file amd xxxx id ag 4 core CPU vwau Configured with product ID file amd xxxx id AweSim Processtwg u weg AweSim Processor 1 AMD 8th Generation egrated Northbridge 4 This is not the only way we could create a theoretical AMD 4 core CPU xxxx A cleaner idea would be to reuse the non configured abstract and generic 4 core Node 22 Chapter 3
259. n is a call software interrupt or repeated string instruction in which case this command sets a temporary execution breakpoint at the instruction sequentially following the current instruction and starts simulation r regname lt value gt Displays and optionally alters the contents of various CPU registers For a list of register names that are supported type R Normally the display is in the current CPU mode To force 16 bit 32 bit or 64 bit register display type R16 R32 or R64 respectively R16 Display 16 bit registers until the next instruction R32 Display 32 bit registers until the next instruction R64 Display 64 bit registers until the next instruction s lt Bus gt lt Device gt lt Function gt Displays the PCI configuration registers associated with the given Bus Device and Function number t count Executes count instructions The default value for count is 1 u address range Disassembles instructions starting at the given address and continuing for length instructions Instructions are disassembled using the current CPU execution mode Displays the version number information for the attached processor device q xa 1 noncase lt StartAddress gt llp lt L Length EndAddress gt lt Pattern gt Search physical default or linear Memory for pattern and display all or only first occurrence s Table 10 7 Debugger Commands and Def
260. n page 1 and Section 7 4 Emerald Graphics Device on page 65 What about networking See Section 7 25 E1000 Network Adapter Device on page 128 How does the simulator access media What are Hard Disk DVD CD ROM Disk or Floppy Disk images See Section 4 Disk Images on page 35 How do I create Disk images What is DiskTool See Section 4 Disk Images on page 35 How do I attach to a Hard Disk DVD CD ROM Disk or Floppy Disk image All three kinds of images including blank Hard Disk images of the desired size can be created on both Windows 64 Beta and Linux 64 Hosts with our DiskTool program provided in the simulator release package The usage is relatively self explanatory from its GUI and it can also be run from the command line Check out the command line options via DiskTool h So this file allows you to save a running simulation to a file At any later time you can open this file in SimNow to restore the simulation to the same point where you left off How do I access the integrated Debugger See Section 10 CPU Debugger on page 151 How do I copy files into the simulator See Section 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Image on page 42 How do I copy files out of the simulator See Section 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Image on page 42 Where can I find the POST codes Diagnostic port values of the simulation See Section 3 4 1 SimStats and Diagnostic Ports on page 26 How do I edit device configu
261. n the 64 bit MMX registers Most of the instructions operate in parallel on sets of packed elements called vectors although some operate on scalars The instructions define both integer and floating point operations and include the legacy MMX instructions and the AMD extensions to the MMX instruction set Instruction S Ted Mnemonic Opcode Description ds Converts packed double precision floating point values in an XMM CVTPD2PI mmx xmm2 m128 66 OF 2D r register or 128 bit memory location to n d packed doubleword integers values in the destination MMX register Converts two packed doubleword integer values in a MMX register or 64 bit CVTPI2PD xmm mmx m64 66 OF 2A r memory location to two packed double Af precision floating point values in the destination XMM register Converts packed doubleword integer values in a MMX register or 64 bit CVTPI2PS mmx xmm2 m128 OF 2A r memory location to single precision Af floating point values in the destination XMM register A 6 6 3DNow Instruction Set This chapter describes the 3DNow Instruction Set that the simulator supports and simulates 3DNow Technology is a group of new instructions that opens the traditional processing bottlenecks for floating point intensive and multimedia applications Instruction Siipported Mnemonic Opcode Description PP Fast Enter Exit of the MMX or paid ds floating point state v 22
262. nal port name to an external port name a port for the device group Since existing external connections are maintained we automatically require an internal to external port mapping for an existing external connection To finish the wizard requires that the 24 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 external port names are unique to the device group since a device must have unique port names Child Device Name External Port Names known device s archive dat V Save Device State all AweSim Processor 3 7 Save State V Save State HyperTransport Bus 0 HyperTransport BY 0 Internal Port J HyperTransport Bus 1 HyperTransport Bus 1 Names Memory Bus ory Bus 1 Memory Bus 1 AweSim Processor 13 V Save State AweSim Processor 14 Add Remove Ports V Save State AweSim Processor 15 Add Remove Ports V Save State The external ports device state page shows you all the internal to external port mappings which are currently specified for the device group You can also click the Add Remove Ports button for a particular child device to open a sub page that allows you to add and remove particular port mappings for the child device In a child device sub page each checkbox turns a particular port mapping on or off If a checkbox is grayed out it is because the device has an existing external connection thus requiring
263. napshot file The file name includes the full pathname for the file any valid path drive names C or server names servername can be used If a pathname is not given the current default path is used Format must be one of the formats that GetScreenShotFormats returns e g BMP or PNG GetScreenShotFormats This command gives the list of supported formats that can be used LogConsoleStdErr LogConsoleStdErr reports if stderr logging is currently enabled SetLogConsoleStdErr lt 0 1 gt SetLogConsoleStderr cause console logging to go to stderr 1 or stdout 0 The default is the current behavior of logging to stderr ForceSingleStep 0 1 gt Enabled 1 or disables 0 single stepping XTRInstDmpFile lt FileName gt Dumps instruction to file lt FileName gt LogIO device all feature reset lt 0 1 Enables 1 or disables 0 IO logging feature for device or all devices Supported IO logging features are PCI IO IOfpdis MEM MEMfpdis and GETMEMPTR The reset options sets the selected feature on device or all devices to its default value 230 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description GetLogIO device Returns IO logging status of device For example GetLogIO USB Jumpdrive returns the following information PCI Disabled IO Disabled IOfpdis Enabled MEM Disabled
264. nce a second If this value exceeds what can be displayed on this graph the graph line turns red It shows the instantaneous MIPS i e how many millions of instructions per host CPU second at which the simulator is running A value of zero will appear as a one pixel high horizontal line Full scale represents 100 MIPS Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 29 User Manual November 2010 Real MIPS Graph Million of Exceeds 100 Instructions per MIPS Host CPU second Figure 3 18 CPU Real MIPS Graph 3 4 2 3 Invalidation Rate Graph The nvalidation Rate Graph updates once a second If this value exceeds what can be displayed on this graph the graph line turns red A rate of zero will appear as a horizontal line one pixel high Full vertical scale represents one invalidatated translation per thousand simulated instructions The lower darker color represents plain invalidations The upper lighter color represents range invalidations This upper lighter color is a minimum of one pixel high i e a value of zero range invalidations still results in a one pixel high line of the lighter color Plain Invalidations Invalidation Rate Graph Range Invalidations Exceeds what can be displayed Figure 3 19 CPU Invalidation Graph 3 4 2 4 Exception Rate Graph The Exception Rate Graph updates once a second If this value exceeds what can be displayed on this graph the graph line turns red A rate of zero appears as a horizon
265. ned and received to and from the CPU Ia is for Interrupt Acknowledgement and D1 is the vector XTRNB Time Resync Adjusting time by 271 Logged during execution when there is a timing discrepancy detected between an event in XTR XML and that received from the CPU XTRNB adjusts to this discrepancy In ideal environment this should not occur XTRNB Queuing event CPUO DMAW for time 8403 Logged during execution when a DMAW event is queued so that it could be triggered at a later point 8403 is the time when this event should be triggered Chapter 7 Device Configuration 115 User Manual November 2010 XTRNB Setting event trigger delay for CPUO DMAW to 1205 Logged during execution DMAW event is setup to be triggered at a later point 1205 is the difference between NOW and event time XTRNB Processing queued event CPUO DMAW ICount 8403 ShelllCount 8403 Logged during execution Trigger for event setup earlier is invoked CPUO and DMAW could have different values depending on which CPU it is MP XTR only and which event is processed Interfaces XTRNB has eight CPU interfaces and an IO Interrupt APIC interface to connect to the AweSim s CPU Bus and IO Interrupt APIC interface respectively For XTR UP only one CPU interface may be used 7 23 2 XTR Structure 7 23 2 1 XML Structure XTR is a text file that contains XML elements for initialization elements events and instructions The XML schema or DTD is not
266. nitialized the Northbridge device is in the default state This is described in detail in the 8 generation processor PCI register specification When reset the Northbridge device takes on all default register values Contents of a BSD The BSD file contains the contents of all Northbridge registers It also saves the contents of any tables and the states of all internal devices the memory controller HyperTransport table contents etc When the BSD file is read in all tables are filled with past data and all states are restored to their saved states Configuration Options Figure 7 20 and Figure 7 21 show configuration options for the Northbridge 88 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 B AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 3 Proper Connections 1 0 Logging Logging Configuration C Log PCI Configuration Cycles C Log HyperTransport Message Routing Figure 7 20 Northbridge Logging Capabilities Properties Dialog If Log PCI Configuration Cycles is selected the device will produce log messages whenever PCI configuration registers are accessed If Log HyperTransport Message Routing is selected the device will log HyperTransport messages D AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 3 Proper Connections 1 0 Logging Logging Configuration DDR w DRAM Controller Link 0 Enable 15 C Link 1 Enable C Link 2 Enable Opteron Only 16 L
267. not carry CF 0 m JAE rel8off T3 eb Jump if above or equal CF 0 m JAE rell6 off OF 83 cw Jump if above or equal CF 0 v JAE rel32off OF 83 cd Jump if above or equal CF 0 m JZ rel8off 74 cb Jump if zero ZF 1 m JZ rell6 off OF 84 cw Jump if zero ZF 1 Af JZ rel32off OF 84 cd Jump if zero ZF 1 ef JE rel8off 74 cb Jump if equal ZF 1 v JE rell6 off OF 84 cw Jump if equal ZF 1 m JE rel32off OF 84 cd Jump if equal ZF 1 m JNZ rel8off 75 cb Jump if not zero ZF 0 m JNZ rell6off OF 85 cw Jump if not zero ZF 0 m JNZ rel32off OF 85 cd Jump if not zero ZF 0 m JNE rel8off 75 cb Jump if not equal ZF 0 m JNE rell6 off OF 85 cw Jump if not equal ZF 0 ef JNE rel32off OF 85 cd Jump if not equal ZF 0 v JBE rel8off 76 cb ei if below or equal CF 1 or ZF Af JBE rell6off OF 86 cw Jump if below or equal CF 1 or ZF v JBE rel32off OF 86 cd dr Pus below or equal CF 1 or ZF e JNA rel8off T6 Cb Jump if not above CF 1 or ZF 1 ef JNA rell6 off OF 86 cw Jump if not above CF 1 or ZF 1 m JNA rel32off OF 86 cd Jump if not above CF 1 or ZF 1 m JNBE rel8off 71 cb E SE below or equal CF 0 or v JNBE reli6off OF 87 cw ee nm below or equal CF 0 or v JNBE rel320ff OF 87 cd ds E below or equal CF 0 or v JA rel8off 77 cb Jump if above CF 0 or ZF 0 m JA rell6 off OF 87 cw Jump if above CF 0 or ZF 0 v JA rel32o0ff OF 87 cd Jump if above CF 0 or ZF 0 m
268. nse POL O high 0 255 255 low 0 255 D Figure 7 6 DIMM Module Properties Dialog The two DIMM module configuration dialogs shown in Figure 7 6 DIMMO DIMM 1 provide module specific setup options for each simulated DIMM The two DIMM module configuration dialogs share the same format The upper part of the dialog lists some summary information This information which is derived from the SPD data gives a quick indication of the type of device being simulated Chapter 7 Device Configuration 61 User Manual November 2010 The center section of the dialog lists all 256 bytes of data held in the simulated SPD ROM The list box provides a description of each byte index in the ROM If a description is selected the corresponding data byte is displayed in the text box to the right The Import SPD and Export SPD buttons provide the option of loading and saving SPD ROM data The file format is an unformatted binary image with an extension of spd The bottom section of the dialog is used to configure DDR PDL Response ranges for the simulated DIMM PDL response ranges can be individually set for each of 16 PDLs Adjusting the Low and High value modifies the response range for a particular PDL When an appropriate response range is set for one PDL the same range can be applied to all 16 PDLs by clicking on the Match PDLs button The Reset PDLs button sets all 16 PDL response ranges to their maximum
269. nt2 AvailablePorts lt Device Name gt Lists available ports of device Device Name Disconnect lt Device Name gt Disconnects all connections of device Device Name DeleteDevice lt Device Name gt Deletes device Device Name from simulated system and removes it from device window KnownDevices Lists all devices that are known by the simulator These devices are stored in devices MoveDevice lt Device Name gt lt x gt lt y gt Moves the specified device Device Name to x y coordinates in device window This command only work when GUI mode is active New Creates a new BSD file Returns the location postion x y of the device Device Name in the device window x and y are pixel coordinates inside the device Location window For example Location USB JumpDrive returns USB JumpDrive 152 382 where 752 is the x coordinate and 382 is the y coordinate DumpRegistry Displays all information stored in SimNow s registry SetMPQuantum lt time nanoseconds gt Sets the time in nanoseconds for a CPU before switching to next CPU in a MP system Modifying the MP Quantum might have a huge impact on the simulated MP system GetMPQuantum Returns the current MP Quantum value see also SetMPQuantum GDB d udpltcp lt port gt Sets up the simulators gdb interface The default protocol is tcp and the default port is 2222 If
270. ntact your AMD account representative Appendixes are provided that describe Format of Floppy and Hard Drive Images page 183 Bill of Material page 184 Supported Guest Operating Systems page 186 CPUID page 188 Known Issues page 190 Instruction Reference page 192 Automation Commands page 230 6 Chapter 2 Installation User Manual November 2010 3 Graphical User Interface The simulator has a cross platform GUI that uses the Qt toolkit We welcome bug reports and usability feedback on the simulator Menu Bar Main Window Tool Bar Numeric Display Components TZ1 AMD SimNow Main Window File View Special Keyboard Help Js Wda wgussiuud e Graphs amp Numeric Display s estie d A Simulator Stats IDE Primary Display IDE Secondary Display Floppy Display Diagnostic Ports 1 311 61 Host Seconds 134 263 808 master read D master read 490 read 0200 03 83 80 00 L 26 76 Sim Seconds 22 332 928 master witten D master witten 172 written 00 00 00 Q0 87 64 15 0 Avg MIPS Reset Ava D slave read D slave read 00 00 00 CB e3 e0 D slave written D slave written 8 91 MIPS M DMA PIO mode PIO PIO mode Real MIPS Graph 4 System Properties System Restore Automatic Updates General Invalidation Rate Graph Eoneute Name hadia System ly Compute Microsoft Windows XP n Professional x64 Edition Version 2003 Ex
271. ntegrated Northbridge 0 AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 0 AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel 0 AweSim Processor 0 Debugger 0 Dimm Bank 0 Emerald Graphics 0 iv Log to Window 100 Buffer Size D lines Fast DMA 0 Log to File simnow dog Log to Console mirau vuo or cars aes A wee ay yee varz ey ee viz vuvu vuvvvooec 1 Register 58 ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 1 Register 5C ByteCount 04 Data 00000003 1 Register 60 ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 1 Register 64 ByteCount 04 Data 00000004 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device Function 1 Register 68 ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 i 1 1 Le 1 Fast DMA 1 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device Function Fast DMA 2 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device Function Fast DMA 3 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device Function Fas DMA A PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 18 Function Fast DMA 5 Fast DMA 6 Gei PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 18 Function ontroller 0 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device Function Keess PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 18 Function 1 Register 78 ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 IDE Drive 1 PCI CONFIG WRITE Bus 0 Device 18 Function Register 7C ByteCount 04 Data 00000007 IDE Drive 2 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 18 Function 0 Register 00 ByteCount 04 Data 00000022 IDE Drive 3 PCI CONFIG READ Bus 0 Device 18 Function 0 Register 60 ByteCount 04 Data 00000000 10 Logger AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 0 PCI CO
272. ntents of an 8 bit MOVZX reg64 reg mem8 OF B6 r register or memory operand to a 64 e bit register with zero extension Move the contents of a 16 bit MOVZX reg32 reg mem16 OF B7 r register or memory operand to a 32 e bit register with zero extension Move the contents of a 16 bit MOVZX reg64 reg mem16 OF B7 r register or memory operand to a 64 ef bit register with zero extension Multiplies an 8 bit register or memory operand by the contents of the MUT eg meme SE AL register and stores the result in v the AX register Multiplies a 16 bit register or e memory operand by the contents of the MUL reg memi6 GE AX ena aan and STEEN the result in v the DX AX register Multiplies a 32 bit register or D memory operand by the contents of the MUL reg mem32 Pus EAX register and stores the result in v the EDX EAX register Multiplies a 64 bit register or e memory operand by the contents of the MUL reg mem64 F7 4 RAX ionic er ahd Stance the result in v the RDX RAX register Performs a tow s complement negation NEG reg mem8 S 3 on an 8 bit register or memory e operand Performs a tow s complement negation NEG reg mem16 F7 3 on a 16 bit register or memory e operand Performs a tow s complement negation NEG reg mem32 F7 3 on a 32 bit register or memory e operand Performs a tow s complement negation NEG reg mem64 F7 3 on a 64 bit register or memory e operand NOP 90 Performs no operation A 5 Complements the bits in an 68 bit NO
273. o DimmNo from the file specified by fullpath The file format is an unformatted binary image with an extension of spd ExportSPD lt DimmNo gt lt fullpath gt ExportSPD provides the option of saving SPD ROM data from DimmNo to the file specified by fullpath The file format is an unformatted binary image with an extension of spd ResetPDL sets all 16 PDL response ranges to their ResetPDLs lt DimmNo gt maximum range 0 255 PDLRespRange DimmNo Sets the PDL Response Rage of memory module PDLNo High Low DimmNo and PDL PDLNo to High and Low GetPDLRespRange lt DimmNo gt lt PDLNo gt Returns the PDL response range of memory module DimmNo and PDL PDLNo GetPDLData lt DimmNo gt Lists the PDL data of memory module DimmNo Displays DIMM configuration details like GetConfig PdlRespRange MBBaseAddr OutOfRangeResp and PdlErrorSim Returns the maximum number of DIMMs that can be GetMaxDimms simulated SetMaxDimms num Sets the maximum number of DIMMs that can be simulated GetDimmDescription lt DimmNo gt Returns a short description of the memory module DimmNo It displays memory type total size number of banks and device data width in bits GetDimmType lt DimmNo gt Returns the DIMM type of memory module DimmNo GetDimmSize lt DimmNo gt Returns th
274. o set memory configurations that would be far too large to simulate conveniently The memory size set here is allocated by SimNow directly in Host memory If you lack sufficient memory in your host then SimNow may hang 512 Megabytes _ iv Set Memory Config Figure 14 1 Memory Configurator If you want specific or non symmetric DIMM configurations please follow these steps 1 Use View Show Devices to show the Devices Window Right click on the DIMM memory device icon in the Device Window and select the Configure Device option on the Workspace Popup Menu Figure 3 3 on page 10 3 Select the tab for the DIMM slot that you wish to alter 4 Click the Import SPD button and browse for an appropriate SPD file The SPD files should be stored in the Images directory The SPD filename should give an indication of the size of the DIMM that it represents 5 A DIMM can be eliminated from the system by changing the contents of SPD byte 0 Number of SPD Bytes Used to zero 6 Click OK to close the configuration property sheet and accept the changes 14 3 Changing SPD Data Any byte of SPD data can be altered in order to model DIMM configurations that do not currently exist The process for modifying a SPD data byte is as follows 1 170 Use View Show Devices to show the Devices Window Right click on the DIMM Memory device icon in the Device Window and select the Configure Device option on the Wor
275. oc oe trece NEG 225 vi Contents User Manual November 2010 A 6 3 2 IRET Return from TEE i o eo Seres 225 A 6 4 Virtualization Instruction Reference sese 226 A 6 5 64 Bit Media Instruction Reference essere 226 A 6 6 3DNow Jnstruction Set Goose pe ee 226 A 6 7 Extension to the 3DNow Instruction Set 227 A 6 8 Prescott New InsttichGns oo tonon cance torrie aa a ae as 227 A 6 8 1 MONITOR Setup Monitor Address 228 A 6 8 2 MWAIT Monitor Wait seen 229 A 7 Automation Commands eeseeeseeeesee seen eee tne nennen enne tenent enne E 230 A 7 1 Sy LEE 231 AGI IDE spas ated tet itu Sire Ral lu E 235 A 7 3 eege dee 237 AULA Reeg pasture ved mc tbe dte di 238 A 7 5 CMOS c X 238 ee ACPI eis fo cer PE NM x p EE 239 A 7 7 NERD POD Een 239 A 7 8 KT 239 A79 SNMDESISIIV AGPOBEISQu eie th bte t iod debitus 240 A T10 VGA ee core tna gah gale pec PO E lem ences Nds colto e haa 240 A Serial tesa e ia Gas alu EE 240 A 7 12 HyperTransport Technology Configuration sssssssss 242 A 7 13 8 Generation Northbridge etees 242 BI DBC uentum be 242 AZIS MNIDESTIT eegal 243 ATIG EE 243 ATA lt ee oes EE 243 ARIE GIU PM NI 243 A 7 18 1 Profiling in SimNow Technology 244 A 7 18 2 CPU Code Generator Commandes 245 A 7 19 Emerald Graphics iiie se te oerte e eR ER IST R
276. ock Size Set the parameters for disk block cache For e g raid setdbc 32768 5 512 SetJournalParameters Super Block Set the Journal Parameters For e g Size Index Block Size Index raid setjournalparameters 8192 512 5 512 Levels DiskBlock Size GetJournalParameters Displays the Journal parameters A 7 25 DIMM 1 simnow dimm usage Automation Command Description Appendix A 245 User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description Enables 1 or disables 0 the PDL Error Simulation If PdlErrorSim 011 enabled then the DIMM device monitors PDL settings for all RAM reads GetPdlErrorSim Returns enabled if PdlErrorSim is enabled otherwise it returns disabled OutOfRangeResp OxFF invert The Out of Range Response selection specifies how the data should be altered if a PDL is out of range The OxFF option specifies that the return data should be forced to all ones The Invert option specifies that the return data should be a bitwise inversion of the valid data GetOutOfRangeResp Returns the specified options set by OutOfRangeResp The SMB Base Address entry selects the 8 bit address SMBBaseAddr lt addr gt that this DIMM device responds to The SMB address is used for the reading of DIMM SPD data GetSMBBase Returns the specified SMB Base address ImportSPD lt DimmNo gt lt fullpath gt ImportSPD provides the option of loading SPD ROM data t
277. odes Table 7 3 shows the supported custom VESA mode numbers Chapter 7 Device Configuration 65 User Manual November 2010 Mode Number Resolution Color depth 140h 320x200 32 bit 141h 640x480 32 bit 142h 800x600 32 bit 143h 1024x768 32 bit 144h 1280x720 16 bit 145h 1280x720 32 bit 146h 1280x960 16 bit 147h 1280x960 32 bit 148h 1280x1024 32 bit 149h 1600x1200 16 bit 14Ah 1600x1200 32 bit 14Bh 1920x1080 16 bit 14Ch 1920x1080 32 bit 14Dh 1920x1200 16 bit 14Eh 1920x1200 32 bit 14Fh 2048x1536 16 bit 150h 2048x1536 32 bit Table 7 3 Supported Custom VESA Modes Improve Graphics Performance When you run Windows in simulation and you open a menu list box tool tips or other screen element the object may open very slow To disable this option use the following steps 1 Click Start point to Settings and then click Control Panel Double click Display 3 Click Effects clear the Use the following transition effects for menus and tooltips check box click ok and then close Control Panel 66 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 5 Matrox MGA G400 PCI AGP The Matrox G400 graphics device provides a high performance PCI AGP VGA compatible video device The device provides a fully functional set of PCI configuration registers and a 2D drawing engine The AGP interface is currently somewhat minimal and is not capable of genera
278. og options 1 simnow shell GetLogIO 4 core Node 0 RCIE Disabled TOR Disabled Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 19 User Manual November 2010 Jr Ostjexoli ez Mixed MEM Disabled MEMfpdis Mixed GETMEMPTR Disabled 1 simnow shell GetLogIO Machine 1 PCI Disabled et Disabled Jt Ostjexoli S g Mixed MEM Disabled MEMfpdis Mixed GETMEMPTR Disabled 3 3 5 Device Group Examples Device groups can be a powerful building block for SimNow users These next examples should help give further understanding about device groups and demonstrate some practical uses 3 3 5 1 Example 1GB DDR2 memory When you instantiate a Dimm Bank known device into a created device you get its default state of 8 empty dimm s with no configuration You can then configure the Dimm Bank such as by opening the device s GUI configuration properties to specify general options such as max number of dimm s and to configure each dimm such as by importing an SPD You could configure it for example to emulate a dimm bank with 2 DDR2 dimm s 1GB each Device groups offer us a potentially simpler alternative for the user to instantiate a preconfigured device group For example we could have a device group Dimm DDR2 1GBx2 which has inside it only one child and default archive data state for that child The figure below shows that the theoretical known device Dimm DDR2 IGBx2 has
279. ole using shell KnownDevices Created Device An instantiation of a known device All devices in a BSD are created devices Created devices appear in the right hand pane of the Device Viewer window and on the console using snell CreatedDevices Device grouping tree node relationships Because of device grouping created devices in a BSD are nodes in a tree with parents and children siblings and end root tree node relationships Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 15 User Manual November 2010 Device connection relationships Because of device connections a sibling device can be connected to another sibling device at a connection port of each device Machine Device Group Just a device group but it is special since it is the root node of a machine tree it has no parent it can t be deleted it has no ports and it has no sibling devices each machine in a BSD has a single machine created device group Archive Data or Device State A known device group has archive data for its child devices which specifies the default and initial state for when a known device group is instantiated as a created device A known device library also has default and initial state for when it is instantiated as a created device When a BSD is saved each device s current state archive data which may be different than the original known device s archive data is saved to the bsd file Internal Connection A connection between two chi
280. on exact TLB walking behaviors may not function correctly Chapter 7 Device Configuration 55 User Manual November 2010 7 2 Debugger Device The debugger allows debugging tasks such as break pointing single stepping and other standard tasks Interfaces The debugger has no interfaces the debugger is present if it is in the Device Window To add the Debugger Device follow these steps 1 Select View Show Devices 2 Click and drag the Debugger Device icon from the device list on the left side into the workspace area on the right side of the Device Window 3 Add an additional debugger for each processor you wish to debug Initialization and Reset State The debugger initially is disabled and attached to processor 0 Configuration Options In the Main Window select View Show Debugger Click the Attach button to configure which processor is being debugged To use the CPU Debugger please refer to Section 10 1 Using the CPU Debugger on page 151 Log Messages This device does not create log messages 56 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 3 DIMM Device The DIMM device provides a simulation model of an array of up to four dual inline memory modules DIMMs The model provides RAM storage and serial presence detect SPD ROM access for each DIMM Bytes 0 5 13 and 31 zero based of the SPD data are used to configure the DIMM model The remaining SPD entries are
281. on of up to eight individual DIMMs If the CPU type is something other than AMD Opteron then the DIMM device assumes a 64 bit memory interface and accepts configuration for only four DIMMs It isn t until the simulation is started that the DIMM Device can determine what type of CPU is present For this reason the DIMM Device will initially display configuration tabs for 8 DIMMs even when used with a CPU that is not based on the AMD Opteron processor After the simulation is started the DIMM device will remove and ignore any configuration of DIMMs 4 7 if a processor other than the AMD Opteron is detected 58 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Once the simulation is started the DIMM Device allocates memory arrays to hold the DRAM data One array is allocated for each bank or virtual bank In the case of 64 bit memory interfaces memory arrays are allocated to match the size of the physical banks on each DIMM If the memory interface is 128 bits then the memory arrays are sized to the sum of the physical bank pairs that make up the virtual banks For example Virtual bank is the combination of physical bank on DIMMO and physical bank on DIMMI If physical bankO on each DIMM is 32MB in size then the array allocated for virtual bankO is sized at 64MB Each virtual bank is handled like it is one large bank rather than two combined smaller banks The model does not distinguish between addresses that hit in the upper
282. ondary Master and insert the next ISO image using File Set IDE Secondary Master In case you are using a physical DVD CD ROM drive for the OS installation eject the media and insert the next media The disk images are now assigned to the device that is connected to the IDE Primary Master and IDE Secondary Master connector of the hard disk controller as shown in Figure 7 25 on page 97 The IDE controller has two important features All disk devices Primary Master etc by default have the disk journaling feature turned on which allows simulations to write to the disk image during normal operation and not affect the contents of the real disk image This is useful for being able to kill a simulation in the middle for multiple copies of the simulator running at the same time etc Journal contents are saved in BSD checkpoint files but lost if you don t save a checkpoint before exiting To change journal settings or commit journal contents to the hard disk image go to the Device View Window then the AMD 8111 Southbridge then the configuration for the hard disk in question on either the Primary or Secondary IDE controller Here you can either commit the contents of the journal to the hard disk image or turn off journaling for the hard disk image in question Turning off journaling is recommended during the installation process for an operating system DVD ROM support is provided through an option in the BSD platform checkpoint file To
283. onnect to a coherent HyperTransport device such as another AMD Istanbul Device or a non Coherent HyperTransport device such as AMD 8131 PCI X amp Controller These ports are mutually exclusive and should be connected to only one other device DeerHound also exposes two DRAM channel interfaces DCTO and DCTI to interface with system memory Contents of a BSD See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Configuration Options See the following sections Section 3 3 Working with Device Groups on page 17 Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Log Messages See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Difference from Real Hardware See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 140 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 8 PCI Configuration Viewer The PCI Config Viewer can be used to scan PCI buses and report information about the configuration space settings for each PCI device PCI Config View
284. onnected to a single AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device For more information on Group Devices see Section 3 3 Device Groups on page 3 3 Interface AMD Istanbul Device has several connection ports It has 4 HyperTransport links split to form 8 sub links Each sub link can connect to a coherent HyperTransport device such as another AMD Istanbul Device or a non Coherent HyperTransport device such as AMD amp 131 PCI X Controller These ports are mutually exclusive and should be connected to only one other device Istanbul also exposes two DRAM channel interfaces DCTO and DCT 1 to interface with system memory Contents of a BSD See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Configuration Options See the following sections Section 3 3 Working with Device Groups on page 17 Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Log Messages See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Difference from Real Hardware See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Dev
285. ons v v v v Machine Check Exception v v v v CMPXCHGSB Instruction v v v v APIC v v v v SYSCALL and SYSRET v v v v Memory Type Range Registers ef v v ef Page Global Extension v v v v Machine Check Architecture v v v v Conditional Move Instruction v v v v Page Attribute Table v v v v Page Size Extensions PSE 36 A ef v v No execute page protection v v v v SEM x 26 X X AMD extensions to MMXTM v v v v MMX v v v v FXSAVE FXRSTOR v v v v Fast FXSAVE FXRSTOR X X X X 1 GB Paging feature X X Ed Ed RDTSCP X X X X Long Mode X v v v v v v v v v v v X x X v Table 15 7 CPUID Extended Feature implementation Only read and write to debug registers is supported side effects are not implemented Controlled by FUSE state Appendix A 185 User Manual November 2010 A 5 Known Issues A 5 1 FSAVE FRSTOR and FSTENV FLDENV When the simulator is executing FSAVE FRSTOR and FSTENV FLDENV in real mode it is using the 16 bit protected mode memory format A 5 2 Triple Faulting If the processor encounters an exception while trying to invoke the double fault DF exception handler a triple fault exception occurs This can rarely occur but is possible For example if the invocation of a double fault exception causes the stack to overflow then this would cause a triple fault When this happens the CPU will triple fault and cause a shutdown cycle to occur This special cycle should be interpreted by the motherboard hardware
286. ontents of the currently loaded ROM to filename Load filename Loads the specified MemDevice filename to defined address BaseAddress BaseAddress lt value gt Value is the base address of the device in hex GetBase Address Returns the base address of the device in hex SizeInBlocks lt value gt Value is the total size of the memory device given in decimal value for the number of 32 Kbyte blocks 32 Kbyte blocks are used because not initialized memory is dynamically allocated when addressed in 32 Kbyte chunks GetSizeInBlocks Returns the number of 32 Kbyte blocks allocated by this device InitFile lt filename gt filename is the name of the binary file that is used to initialize the memory contents Note that the device initializes memory for the content length of the file If you specify a 512 Kbyte ROM and use a 256 Kbyte image file the first 256 Kbytes are initialized GetInitFile Returns the path and name of the init file see above InitFile ReadOnly 0l1 Turns 1 the memory device into a ROM Writes to the device are ignored when the read only option is selected Appendix A 243 User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description GetReadOnly Returns true if memory is read only otherwise it returns false SystemBios Oll Tells 1 the memory device that it is the system BIOS GetSy
287. op Network Adapter 16 Emerald Graphics 12 PCA3548 Device 13 AT24C Device 14 To open the workspace popup menu right click on any icon in the workspace area Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface System Configuration User Manual November 2010 The Device List located on the left side of the Device Window describes all devices available in the simulator along with their configuration options For further information please refer to Section 7 Device Configuration on page 53 The Show Deprecated Devices checkbox is not checked by default This checkbox gives the user the opportunity to show or hide deprecated devices It is not recommended to use deprecated devices in simulation To show deprecated devices this checkbox must be checked The Show Deprecated Devices checkbox does not disable the ability to connect or create deprecated devices Also the automation interface of deprecated devices and loading BSDs which contain deprecated devices are both unaffected 3 2 1 Add a New Device You can add devices to the workspace by dragging a new device from the Device List on the left side of the workspace window to an appropriate location within the workspace on the right side Some devices produce additional windows or dialogs when you add them to the workspace These windows provide an interface to the device during simulation For example adding the Winbond WB83627HF SIO device see Section 7 5 on page 69 to th
288. or decrement rSI and rDI CMPSQ A7 Compare the quadword at DS rSI with the quadword at ES rDI and then increment or decrement rSI and rDI CMPXCHG reg mem8 reg8 OF BO r Compare AL register with an 8 bit register or memory location If equal copy the second operand to the first operand Otherwise copy the first operand to AL KS amp amp CMPXCHG reg mem16 reg16 OF Bl f x Compare AX register with a 16 bit register or memory location TE equal copy the second operand to the first operand Otherwise copy the first operand to AX amp CMPXCHG reg mem32 reg32 OF Bl E Compare EAX register with a 32 bit register or memory location If equal copy the second operand to the first operand Otherwise copy the first operand to EAX CMPXCHG reg mem 4 reg 4 OF Bl E Compare RAX register with a 64 bit register or memory location If equal copy the second operand to the first operand Otherwise copy the first operand to RAX CMPXCHG8B CT 1 m64 64 bit set the Compare EDX EAX memory location If equal zero flag ZF to 1 and copy the ECX EBX register to the memory location Otherwise copy the memory location to EDX EAX and clear the zero flag register to amp CPUID A2 Executes the CPUID function number is in the EAX register whose DAA Decimal adjust AL DAS Decimal adjusts AL after subtraction
289. or later resolves this problem The simulator may stress the system more than most applications including the base operating system AMD has received reports that the simulator has caused some systems to crash and in general this has been traced to unstable hardware Hardware instability can also crash applications or operating systems inside the simulator 2 2 Installation Procedure Insert the CD ROM into your system s CD ROM drive or download the simulator program and its data files from http developer amd com simnow aspx Browse to the root directory of the CD or to the path where the downloaded simulator is stored and Chapter 2 Installation 3 User Manual November 2010 begin the installation as follows To install under Windows double click on the self extracting executable To install under Linux extract the zipped tar file as shown below tar xzf Simnow Linux64 lt version gt tar gz 2 3 Directory Structure and Executable After the opening screen and license agreement are displayed you will be prompted to choose an installation directory When you select this the install program will copy the executable files and device models to the selected directory and setup the registry entries necessary to run the simulator The install program will create the following subdirectories under the install directory Ceo SimMow Contains the simulator s executable DiskTool libraries and BSD files o analyzers Contains
290. or memory SHR reg mem16 1 D1 5 operand right 1 bit v Shift a 16 bit register or memory SHR reg mem16 CL D3 5 operand right the number of bits ei specified in the CL register Shift a 16 bit register or memory operand right the number of bits SHR reg mem16 imm8 C1 5 ib specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 32 bit register or memory SHR reg mem32 1 DR operand right 1 bit v Shift a 32 bit register or memory SHR reg mem32 CL DS ZS operand right the number of bits ef specified in the CL register Shift a 32 bit register or memory i 3 operand right the number of bits SHR reg mem32 imm8 cl ye specified by an 8 bit immediate v value Shift a 64 bit register or memory SHR reg mem64 1 AL 5 operand left 1 bit v Shift a 64 bit register or memory SHR reg mem 4 CL D3 5 operand right the number of bits e specified in the CL register Shift a 64 bit register or memory operand right the number of bits SHR reg mem64 imm8 EE specified by an 8 bit immediate v value 214 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Mnemonic Opcode Description Supported SHRD reg mem16 reg16 imm8 OF AC r ib Shift bits of a 16 bit destination register or memory operand to the right the number of bits specified in an 8 bit immediate value while shifting in bits from the second operand v SHRD reg mem16 reg16 CL OF AD r Shift bits of a 16 bit destinat
291. or the given disk image For e g ide image 0 i cOd0 img GetImage masterlslavelOl1 Displays the disk image for the given volume Journal masterlslavelOl1 offlonlOl1 Turns journaling on or off for specified drive For instance ide journal master on turns on journaling for master drive Appendix A 231 User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description JournalStatus masterlslavel0I1 Returns enabled or disabled if journaling is enabled or disabled for specified drive JournalSize masterlslavelOl1 Returns the journal size for specified dirve JournalSave masterlslavelOl1 filename Saves the contents of the primary or slave disk journal to a file JournalLoad masterlslavelOl1 filename Loads the contents of the primary of slave disk journal from a file JournalCommit masterlslavelOl1 Commits the contents of the disk journal on the master or slave drive to the disk image that drive represents JournalClear masterlslavelOl1 Clears the journal discards any changes made to the drive JournalDebug masterlslavelOl1 This may no longer do anything it originally enabled a debug verification mode DVDROMStatus masterlslavelOl1 Displays the status for the DVD ROM device or a particular volume SetDVDROM masterlslavel0l1 offlonlOI1 Sets master or slave to DVD ROM device Eject masterl
292. ork traffic Requires supervisor privileges d DeviceNum Tells the mediator which host adapter to use when snooping real 128 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 network traffic This device number will need to be one listed using the I command V v v Turns on verbose output The verbosity level gets noisier with the number of v on the command line m XX XX Denotes the two high bytes used to classify the simulator s MAC addresses By default these values are FA CD but can be configured to avoid collisions with real hardware Table 7 9 Mediator Command Line Switches 7 25 3 MAC Addresses for use with the Adapter The MAC address that the simulated adapter is using determines the level of visibility that the model will have with other simulator sessions and with the real network The mediator routes packets to simulator sessions that have FA CD in the high two bytes of the MAC address The simulator sessions that have anything other than FA CD can only communicate with other simulator sessions in the same process space using a multi machine approach MAC Address beginning with FA CD and having a third byte between 0x00 and 0x20 are classified as absolute Simulated adapters using this class of MAC Address are logically equivalent to plugging a real computer into a real network These sessions can see real network traffic and are visible to all
293. otal number of cylinders heads and sectors per head varies Because of this the hard disk image file contains a 512 byte header before the raw data This 512 byte header is identical to the information provided by the drive in response to the ATA command IDENTIFY Following the 512 byte header is the data for each sector from the device As with the floppy the data starts with the first sector of the first cylinder on the first head Unlike floppies however the image file may end before the last sector of the last cylinder on the last head If an attempt is made by the simulator to access data on the drive image that is beyond the end of the available data but still within the bounds defined by the geometry of the device the simulator will extend the image file dynamically The BSD file contains the contents of all Viper Plus registers It also saves the contents of any buffers and the states of all internal devices HDD controllers PIT PIC etc When the BSD file is read in all buffers are filled with past data and all states are restored to their saved states The symbol files that the debugger uses are in a simple text format Each line contains an address length and symbol name Any line that starts with a semicolon is considered a comment Following is a sample file SimNow Debugger Symbol File Format Address Length Symbolic Name 004011f0 SHE main 00401a3c 0 GetModuleHandleA 4 00401a42 0 GetCommandLineA Q0 The ad
294. ovember 2010 2 Installation 2 1 System Requirements The AMD SimNow simulator runs on both Linux 64 for AMD systems and Windows for 64 bit AMD systems The requirements for each system are as follows Linux 64 for AMD64 Windows XP 64Bit Edition for AMD64 Any of the following 64 Bit Windows XP x64 Edition or Linux distributions for AMD64 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition for AMD64 OS Distribution e SuSE 9 Pro and newer e RedHat 64Bit Enterprise 3 and above e Fedora Core 2 and newer Recommended SuSE 9 1 or newer for AMD64 Build 1218 or newer Approx 64MB of memory plus Memory Approx 150 MB of memory for each simulated processor plus the amount of simulated RAM Processor AMD Athlon 64 or AMD Opteron 1 Gigabyte of free hard disk space for the simulator and devices plus 3 Gigabytes free space for disk file images 3 5 inch 1 44 MB floppy drive CD ROM Drive Table 2 1 Software and Hardware Requirements Hard Disk Space Other Hardware Running the simulator on a Linux kernel prior to version 2 6 10 may cause the simulator to malfunction The bug is in the 64 bit path only and the symptom is in signals that are not associated with system calls still being treated as system calls as they go back to user space i e in certain cases it tries to restart the system call even when it did not come from a system call Updating the Linux kernel to kernel version 2 6 10
295. page 90 Log Messages See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 Difference from Real Hardware See the following sections Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device on page 55 Section 7 11 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Device on page 90 138 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 31 AMD Magny Cours Device The AMD Magny Cours device is a 12 core processor node suitable for a G34 socket It emulates a planned product that derives from a revision of the AMD FamilylOh product line The device iteself is composed of 12 individual AweSim Processor Devices that are connected to dual AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge Devices For more information on Group Devices see Section 3 3 Device Groups on page 3 3 Interface AMD Magny Cours has several connection ports It has 4 HyperTransport links split to form 8 sub links Each sub link can connect to a coherent HyperTransport device such as another AMD Istanbul Device or a non Coherent HyperTransport device such as AMD amp 131 PCI X Controller These ports are mutually exclusive and should be connected to only one other device Magny Cours also exposes four DRAM channel interfaces DCTO DCT1 DCT2 and DCT3 to interface with system memory Contents of a BSD See the follow
296. page 94 Addittionaly these SouthBridge devices contain a SATA configuration page to attatch images to the individual SATA ports 134 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 SB600 LO Hu roperties sx aging Options PCIIRG Mapping Primary HDD Channel SATA Drives cmos gt P Drive 0 Image Filename DVD ROM Eject Joumal import export commit V Connectable Drive 1 Image Filename aaa DVD ROM Eject Joumal import export commit V Connectable Figure 7 39 ATI SB600 SATA Configuration Dialog Log Messages These SouthBridge devices have the ability to log messages to the Message Log Window as specified by the options in the Logging Option tab These devices can log I O mapped Transactions Memory mapped Transactions and SMI and SCI assertions Difference from Real Hardware These Southbridge devices differ from other devices mainly in those items that deal with real time operation Those items cannot be modeled in the current simulator The functionality of the USB 2 0 controller is also absent PCI registers and memory mapped registers are the only portion present Hardware supporting HD Audio is also not modelled in SimNow Chapter 7 Device Configuration 135 User Manual November 2010 7 28 ATI RS480 RS780 RD790 RD890 Northbridge Devices The ATI RS480 RD790 RS780 feature set includes an upstream
297. pen dev ttyS0 or dev ttyS1 depending on wether it is COMI or COM2 Note that the user will need to be running the simulator with root privelages to avoid an access denied error when the simualtor attempts to open the device The simulator can communicate with external applications such as a kernel debugger in this mode 160 Chapter 11 Debug Interface User Manual November 2010 12 Command API The CMDAPI cmdapi dll gives Windows users a way to script the simulator using any scripting language that can interface with the Microsoft Component Object Model COM It gives you the opportunity to create scripts that instantiate a simulator object You can use this instantiated object to execute any of the SimNow M automation commands see Section A 7 Automation Commands on page 230 CMDAPI is installed and registered whenever a SimNow release package has been installed successfully After instantiating a SimNow Command object you can use the following methods to execute automation commands and retrieve status Exec The Exec method executes the automation command that arg contains bool Exceeiangdgilye ag Parameters argl A string that contains the SimNow automation command to execute For example debug 0 execcmd t arg2 An input string buffer in which SimNow is to place the response from the command in arg Return Value Returns true if command completed successfully otherwise it returns false GetLas
298. physical bank and addresses that hit in the lower physical bank Memory read and write messages sent to the DIMM Device use the same structure for both 128 bit and 64 bit interfaces Each message includes a bank select field an address field and a data size field The bank select field implements the CS7 0 lines while the address field specifies the beginning offset within the bank virtual bank and the data size field specifies the size of the datum Interfaces The DIMM device is implemented as a single interface device However the device accepts two distinct classes of messages RAM read write messages and SMBUS reads of SPD data In most system configurations the DIMM device is connected to a Northbridge devices DIMM interface as well as a Southbridge devices SMBUS interface Initialization Reset State On creation of the DIMM device all RAM arrays are set to all ones and SPD ROM arrays are cleared Reset initializes the RAM arrays to all ones but does not alter the SPD ROM arrays Configuration options are not affected by reset Contents of a BSD The RAM arrays SPD ROM arrays and all configuration option settings are saved in the BSD Configuration Options Chapter 7 Device Configuration 59 User Manual November 2010 D Dimm Bank 5 Properties Connections 120 Logging Options Dimm 0 Dimm 1 PDL Error Simulation Control C Enable PDL Error Simulation DIF Invert System Management Confi
299. ppears which enables you to select the appropriate interface You must choose an interface on either device even if one or both of the devices has only one interface type Generally you shouldn t connect different types of interfaces For example interface Type A of Device 1 should only be connected to interface Type A of Device 2 E AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 4 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Logging Device Options Primary HDD Chann Local Connection Point Remote Device Remote Connection Point HyperTransport Bus 0 AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel 2 HyperTransport Bus 1 Interrupt IOAPIC Bus AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel H2 Interrupt IOAPIC Bus LPC Bus LPC Bus Memory Device 8 Generic Bus LPC Bus Winbond W83627HF SIO 7 Generic Bus PCI Bus 0 PCI Bus 6 PCI Bus 0 System Management Bus 0 System Management Bus 0 Dimm Bank 5 Generic Bus System Management Bus 1 USB Port 0 USB Port 1 USB Port 2 USB Port 3 USB Port 4 USB Port 5 Figure 3 4 Add Connection Dialog of Device Properties Window A device s connection appears in the Connections tab of the Device Properties window for each device as shown in Figure 3 4 When you add a connection the simulator shell sends a reset message to all of the devices in the workspace The global reset is equivalent to power cycling the simulated computer system Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 11 User Manual November 2010 3 2 2 2 Configure Device Most devi
300. ps dll When running the Windows kernel debugger you must provide command line information that tells the debugger how to attach to the EXDI Server The command line for this is ke ke exch elek POSE 7 18S feglDIC 40272 7 28 118 5 95 970 30 IDIDALIL 3 110 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 22USB Keyboard and USB Mouse Devices USB legacy emulation is not yet supported by the simulator model USB 2 0 support is very limited only basic PCI configuration and memory read and write functionality is available By default the simulator uses the keyboard device model to send user s keystrokes to the simulation For example when the user presses Enter with the host mouse on the graphics display window the simulator sends the internal command keyboard key 0x10 0x80 to its command interpreter If the user has a USB keyboard or mouse in his simulation he can redirect the simulator to use these USB devices for keyboard and mouse input He does this by modifying the following simulator registry keys Gui_Key_Device usbkey and Gui_Mouse_Device usbmouse from the top level View Registry With these changes when the user presses the Enter key in simulation the simulator will send the internal command usbkey key 0x10 0x80 to its command interpreter When the user moves the mouse around the simulator display the simulator will send commands such as usbmouse mousemouve 10 10 to the int
301. r to ES rDI and then increment or decrement rDI STOS reg64 AB Store the contents of the RAX register to ES rDI and then increment or decrement rDI STOS B AA Store the contents of the AL register to ES rDI and then increment or decrement CDI STOS W AB Store the contents of the AX register to ESirDI and then increment or decrement CDI STOS D AB Store the contents of the EAX register to ES rDI and then increment or decrement rDI STOS Q AB Store the contents of the RAX register to ES rDI and then increment or decrement rDI SUB AL imm8 26 ib Subtract an immediate 8 bit value from the AL register and store the result in AL AX imm16 2D iw Subtract an immediate 16 bit value from the AX register and store the result in AX EAX imm32 2D id Subtract an immediate 32 bit value from the EAX register and store the result in EAX RAX imm32 2D id Subtract a sign extended immediate 32 bit value from the RAX register and store the result in RAX reg mem8 imm8 80 5 ib Subtract an immediate 8 bit value from an 8 bit destination register or memory location KISIS ISIS SS SS Sn Se Se SS S Appendix A 215 User Manual November 2010 Instruction Mnemonic Opcode Description Supported reg mem16 imm16 81 5 iw Subtract an immedia
302. r to a 32 bit general purpose register or memory location MOVD reg mem64 mmx Move 64 bit value from an MMX TE Ze register to a 64 bit general purpose register or memory location Move sign bits 127 and 63 in an XMM MOVSX reg32 reg mem16 BF r register or memory location to a 32 bit register with sign extension MOVSX reg64 reg mem16 Move the contents of a 16 bit BF r register or memory location to a 64 bit register with sign extension MOVSXD reg64 reg mem32 v v v v v v MOVMSKPD reg32 xmm 66 OF 50 r register t0 a 32 bit general purpose e register Move sign bits 127 95 63 31 in an MOVMSKPS reg32 xmm OF 50 r XMM register to a 32 bit general ei purpose register Stores a 32 bit general purpose MOVNTI mem32 reg32 OF C3 r register value into a 32 bit memory D location minimizing cache pollution Stores a 64 bit general purpose MOVNTI mem64 reg64 OF C3 Ar register value into a 64 bit memory ef location minimizing cache pollution Move byte at DS rSI to ES rDI and MOVS mem8 mem8 A4 then increment or decrement rSI and ef CDI Move word at DS rSI to ES rDI and MOVS mem16 mem16 A5 then increment or decrement rSI and n d rDI Move doubleword at DS rSI to ES rDI MOVS mem32 mem32 A5 and then increment or decrement rSI n d and rDI Move quadword at DS rSI to ES rDI MOVS mem 4 mem 4 A5 and then increment or decrement rSI n d
303. r16 16 Far pointer with 16 bit selector and 16 bit offset pntr16 32 Far pointer with 16 bit selector and 32 bit offset reg Operand of unspecified size in a GPR register reg Byte 8 bit operand in a GPR register reg16 Word 16 bit operand in a GPR register reg16 32 Word 16 bit or doubleword 32 bit operand in a GPR register reg32 Doubleword 32 bit operand in a GPR register reg64 Quadword 64 bit operand in a GPR register reg mem Byte 8 bit operand in a GPR register or memory reg mem16 Word 16 bit operand in a GPR register or memory reg mem32 Doubleword 32 bit operand in a GPR register or memory reg mem64 Quadword 64 bit operand in a GPR register or memory Appendix A 189 User Manual November 2010 relSoff Relative address in the current code segment in 8 bit offset range rell6off Relative address in the current code segment in 16 bit offset range rel32off Relative address in the current code segment in 32 bit offset range segReg or sReg Word 16 bit operand in a segment register ST 0 x87 stack register 0 ST i x87 stack register i where i is between 0 and 7 xmm Double quadword 128 bit operand in an XMM register xmm1 Double quadword 128 bit operand in an XMM register specified as the left most first operand in the instruction syntax e xmm2 Double quadword 128 bit operand in an XMM register specifie
304. range 0 255 Log Messages This device does not produce log messages Difference from Real Hardware The DIMM device does not simulate timing related issues except for PDL error simulation The performance of real DIMM hardware is highly dependent on timing and loading issues ECC simulation is not provided 62 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 4 Emerald Graphics Device The Emerald graphics device provides an industry standard PCI AGP VGA compatible video device The device provides a fully functional set of PCI configuration registers The AGP interface is currently somewhat minimal and is not capable of generating AGP cycles nor AGP specific modes at this time The Emerald graphics device is comprised of a standard VGA and the Emerald Graphics sub device The graphics display engine automatically switches between the Emerald Graphics sub device and the VGA as necessary to display the selected video modes with only one being able to display at a time The VGA sub device provides an industry standard VGA interface used by BIOS and DOS The Emerald Graphics device provides an AGP and PCI graphics device interface controllable either by VESA BIOS extensions or a video driver In addition to the VGA standard modes Emerald Graphics supports a wide range of graphics modes from 320x200 at 16 bit color up to 2048x1536 at 32 bit color with either the VESA BIOS extensions or a video driver Interfaces T
305. rations in SimNow See Section 3 2 Device Window on page 9 How do I change a BIOS in a BSD See Section 7 8 Memory Device Configuration Options on page 85 176 Chapter 15 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ User Manual November 2010 How do I change the amount of system RAM installed in a BSD See Section 7 3 DIMM Device on page 59 How do I change the processor type of a processor in a BSD See Section 7 1 AweSim Processor Device Configuration Options on page 55 How do I enable or disable IDE Hard Disk image journaling See Section 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Image on page 42 or A 7 2 IDE on page 235 Why does Windows Server 2003 crash See Section A 3 Supported Guest Operating Systems on page 187 DiskTool displays an Operation failed message box See Section 13 2 GUI Mode on page 168 Why doesn t the simulator work on Linux kernels prior to version 2 6 10 See Section 2 1 System Requirements on page 3 Why is the graphics performance in simulation so slow See Section 7 4 Emerald Graphics Device Improve Graphics Performance on page 68 Why doesn t the simulated Operating System correctly recognize the DVD CD after I changed the DVD CD image When changing DVD CD images clear the old image allow the simulation to run for a couple of seconds and then set the new image This gives the Operating System a chance to see that the DVD CD ROM is not ready and it
306. reg mem32 imm8 B3 1 ib or memory operand and a sign extended d immediate 8 bit value OR the contents of a 64 bit register OR reg mem64 imm8 83 1 ib or memory operand and a sign extended e immediate 8 bit value OR the contents of an 8 bit register OR reg mem8 reg8 0B r or memory operand with the contents e of an 8 bit register OR the contents of a 16 bit register OR reg mem16 reg16 09 r or memory operand with the contents d of a 16 bit register OR the contents of a 32 bit register OR reg mem32 reg32 09 r or memory operand with the contents ef of a 32 bit register OR the contents of a 64 bit register OR reg mem64 reg64 09 r or memory operand with the contents ei of a 64 bit register OR the contents of an 8 bit register OR reg8 reg mem8 0A r with the contents of an 8 bit e register or memory operand OR the contents of a 16 bit register OR regl6 reg mem16 OB r with the contents of a 16 bit e register or memory operand OR the contents of a 32 bit register OR reg32 reg mem32 OB r with the contents of a 32 bit ei register or memory operand OR the contents of a 64 bit register OR reg64 reg mem64 OB r with the contents of a 64 bit D register or memory operand Output the byte in the AL register to OUT imm8 AL E6 ib the port specified by an 8 bit v immediate value Output the word in the AX register to OUT imm8 AX E7 ib the port specified by an 8 bit Af immediate value Output the doubleword in the EAX OUT imm8 EAX E7 ib r
307. rel320ff OF 8C cd EC if not greater or equal SF lt gt v JNL rel8off 7D cb Jump if not less SF OF e JNL rell6off OF 8D cw Jump if not less SF OF v JNL rel32off OF 8D cd Jump if not less SF OF v JGE rel8off 7D cb Jump if greater or equal SF OF m JGE rell 6off OF 8D cw Jump if greater or equal SF OF v JGE rel32off OF 8D cd Jump if greater or equal SF OF v Jump if less or equal ZF 1 or SF JLE rel8off 7E cb e UB v m Jump if less or equal ZF 1 or SF JLE rell6off OF 8R cw SS DET e JLE rel32off OF 8R cd ded less or equal ZF 1 or SF v JNG rel8off JE cb ae if not greater ZF 1 or SF lt gt v JNG reli6off OF 8E cw ds if not greater ZF 1 or SF lt gt v JNG rel32off OF 8E cd as if not greater ZF 1 or SF lt gt v JNLE rel8off 7F cb TE 2 not less or equal ZF 0 or v JNLE rell6off OF 8F cw E RT not less or equal ZF 0 or v JNLE rel320ff OF 8F cd A a not less or equal ZF 0 or v JG rel8off 7F cb Jump if greater ZF 0 or SF OF m JG rell6off OF 8F cw Jump if greater ZF 0 or SF OF v JG rel32off OF 8F cd Jump if greater ZF 0 or SF OF v Jump short if the 16 bit count Ee BI register CX is zero v Jump short if the 32 bit count e B9 ga register ECX is zero v Jump short if the 32 bit count HERO eer Pa pH register RCX is zero v Short jump with the target specified JMP GEOR BS RB by an 8 bit signed displacement v Appendix A 201
308. ridge devices have several connection points Possible connection points include a PCI bus an SMB bus an LPC bus and an upstream PCIe link The PCI bus acts as a host bus and should connect to a PCI Bus Device The SMB connects to devices such as the DIMM an SMB hub device or another SMB compatible endpoint The LPC bus provides connectivity to devices such as Super IO chips and BIOS ROMs The PCIe port is used for connectivity upstream to a compatible Northbridge Device See Section 7 28 ATI RS480 RS780 RD790 RD890 Northbridge Devices on page 138 for more information Initialization and Reset State When first initialized the Southbridge devices are in the default state This is described in detail in the respective datasheets The legacy CMOS sub device initializes to all zeroes When reset a Southbridge device takes on all default register values as above The exception to this is that the CMOS contents remain the same Contents of a BSD The BSD file contains the contents of all registers It also saves the contents of any buffers and states of all internal devices HDD controllers PIT PIC etc When the BSD file is read in all buffers are filled with past data and all states are restored to their saved states Configuration Options These Southbridge devices share many configuration properties with the AMD 8111 Southbridge For more information please refer to Section 7 12 AMD 8111TM Southbridge Devices IO Hubs on
309. rites to the flash ROM to update the ROM image ncHTMode lt 01 1 gt Enables 1 or disables 0 decoding of HyperTransport messages ForcelnitFile filename The ForcelnitFile command allows the user to change the BIOS ROM path once the simulation has already started This is legitimate only when the new BIOS ROM is a byte for byte copy of the initial BIOS ROM that simulation began with i e same file different path GetCommandSequence Prints which of the two command sequences the flash device is programmed to CommandSequence lt 0 1 gt 0 SST 1 ATMEL Allows to set the command sequence to SST or ATMEL GetFlashMode Tells you if the device is configured to act as a flash memory FlashMode 011 Allows the user to set the memory device as flash memory 244 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 A 7 24 Raid 1 simnow gt raid usage Automation Command Description Noise enableldisable Enable to print debug messages otherwise disable RomImage File name gt Allows a boot ROM image to be supported at the moment the emulation does not work with any known ROM images SetVolume Vol gt Image file gt Journal file This was the original way to setup the image and journal files rather than having two separate commands DeleteVolume Vol gt Undoes the Image or Journal commands and puts the volume back in an
310. rive Any subdirectories are also copied 1 simnow gt jumpdrive importdir c tmp lunexoiimej 8 Emmer aoia gt ieesicl te 62 89 Mbytes Available This example shows how to import all exe files from C tmp into the root of the JumpDrive 1 simnow jumpdrive importdir c tmp exe V Importing c tmp appl exe gt appl exe Importing c tmp app2 exe gt app2 exe 62 60 Mbytes Available This example shows how to export the appl exe file from the root of the JumpDrive into C tmp on the host 1 simnow jumpdrive exportfile appl exe c tmp Exporting appl exe gt c tmp appl exe To find out what is already stored in the root of the JumpDrive device enter the following 1 simnow gt jumpdrive dir Dinecirory Os AN Appendix A 249 User Manual November 2010 lt DIR gt tmp 103936 tegit ite 103936 appl exe 103936 app2 exe 62 60 Mbytes Available To get information about how much space is left on the JumpDrive device enter the following 1 simnow gt jumpdrive free 62 60 Mbytes Available To save the contents of the JumpDrive to the image file C test img on the host s hard disk enter 1 simnow jumpdrive saveimage c test img This example shows how to load the saved JumpDrive image C test img from the host s hard disk into the JumpDrive 1 simnow gt jumpdrive loadimage c test img A 7 28 E1000 The NIC device provides the following automation
311. rol the level of acceleration and performance supplied by Default Monitor o your graphics hardware Use the Display Troubleshooter to assist you in making the change Screen resolutio Less Hardware acceleration All accelerations are enabled Use this setting if your computer has no problems Recommended Enable write combining Figure 7 12 Enable Full Hardware Acceleration on WindowsXP guest Enabling Hardware Cursor Support Please follow the following steps to enable native hardware cursor support on Windows platforms 1 Install latest Matrox G400 drivers 2 Reboot computer 3 Right click on My Computer and select Properties 4 Click on Advanced Performance and then on Settings 5 Uncheck Show shadows under mouse pointer checkbox 6 Click on Apply Chapter 7 Device Configuration 75 User Manual November 2010 7 6 ATI Radeon HD 3870 The ATI Radeon HD 3870 device model provides a simulation of an ATI Radeon HD 3870 GPU and is the foundation for the new graphics architecture Microsoft DirectX 10 11 The functionality of this device model supports full OpenGL 2 0 DirectX 9 and will support all required features of DirectX 10 1 This device model implements a small subset of 3D features which are used by operating systems to render graphical user interface components and it does not support enough features to run most modern 3D applications and games corre
312. rrow Subtract the contents of an 8 bit SBB reg mem6 reg8 18 r register from an 8 bit register or d memory location with borrow Subtract the contents of a 16 bit SBB reg mem16 reg16 19 r register from a 16 bit register or Af memory location with borrow Subtract the contents of a 32 bit SBB reg mem32 reg32 19 r register from a 32 bit register or ei memory location with borrow Subtract the contents of a 64 bit SBB reg mem 4 reg 4 19 r register from a 64 bit register or e memory location with borrow Subtract the contents of an 8 bit register or memory location from the BES zege reg memg Ce ean eencs of an SE register with v borrow Subtract the contents of a 16 bit register or memory location from the SBB reg16 reg mem16 LB fe SE of a 1 bit register with v borrow Subtract the contents of a 32 bit register or memory location from the SBB regier TOM NNUS HS die Eua of a PM register with v borrow Subtract the contents of a 64 bit register or memory location from the SBB reg64 reg mem64 IB r Se of a 64 bit register with v borrow Compare the contents of the AL SCAS mem8 AE register with the byte at ES rDI and d then increment or decrement rDI Compare the contents of the AX SCAS meml6 AF register with the word at ES rDI and ei then increment or decrement CDI Compare the contents of the EAX register with the doubleword at Bene UMEN AE ES rDI and then increment or v decrement rDI Compare the contents of the RAX SCAS
313. rt EDID Vendor Product ID EDID Structure Version EDID Extensions Vendor ID A405 Version i Number of extensions 0 Product ID 0001 Revision 3 Serial Number 7 Mig Week 7 Mfg Year 2009 EDID Checksum Sbit Checksum D5 Figure 7 14 Display Device configuration 78 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Le a ATI Radeon HD 3870 14 Properties P Connections 1 0 Logging Configuration DVIO u General Basic Display Parameters Standard Timings Color Established Timings Raw Data Display Device Model AMD SimNow Display Device AMD001W Flat Panel TFT digital EN Import EDID Extended Display Identification Data EDID 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB IC OD OE OF 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 05 A4 01 00 01 00 00 OO 01 13 01 03 80 24 1D 78 2A 16 76 A2 SA 4B 97 24 18 4F 54 BF EF 00 45 40 01 01 O1 O1 01 O1 O1 O1 01 01 01 01 O1 01 AO OF 20 00 31 58 1C 20 28 80 14 00 00 1E O1 00 00 1E 00 00 00 FF 00 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 OA OA OA OA OA OA OO 00 00 FD 00 32 4B 1E 53 OF 00 OA 20 20 20 20 20 20 00 00 00 FC 00 41 4D 44 30 30 31 OA OA OA OA OA OA OA 00 DS Figure 7 15 Extended Display Identification Data Viewer Difference from Real Hardware The ATI Radeon HD 3870 device model is a faithful simulation of the software
314. ry operand to a 16 e bit destination register Move the contents of a 32 bit MOV reg32 reg mem32 8B r register or memory operand to a 32 e bit destination register Move the contents of a 64 bit MOV reg64 reg mem64 8B r register or memory operand to a 64 ef bit destination register Move the contents of a segment register to a 16 bit 32 bit or 64 MOV reg 6 32 64 mem1 6 segReg 8C r bit destination register or to a 16 v bit memory operand Move the contents of a 16 bit MOV segReg reg mem16 BE r register or memory operand to a e segment register Move 8 bit data at a specified memory HOW SL MOE FREES BH offset to the AL register v Move 16 bit data at a specified MON AE HHODDSeUUR d memory offset to the AX register v Move 32 bit data at a specified ON EOE ERE ES AT memory offset to the EAX register v Move 64 bit data at a specified MOV EIUS INGERHORUS AT memory offset to the RAX register v Move the contents of the AL register MOV moffset8 Al EE to an 8 bit memory offset v Move the contents of the AX register MOV moffseti 6 AX A3 to a 16 bit memory offset v Move the contents of the EAX register FOX mottsevder nue A3 to a 32 bit memory offset v Move the contents of the RAX register ee A3 to a 64 bit memory offset v e Move an 8 bit immediate value into an MOV reg8 imm8 BO rb 8 bit register d e Move a 16 bit immediate value into a MOV regl16 imm16 B8 rw 16 bit register e Move a 32 bit immediate value into a MOV reg3
315. s consisting of the carry flag and a 64 bit register or Bee eee g CU De ie memory location left the number of v bits specified in the CL register Rotate the 65 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 64 bit register or RCL reg mem64 imm8 Cl 2 ib memory location left the number of bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value Rotate the 9 bits consisting of the RCR reg mem8 1 DO 3 carry flag and an 8 bit register or memory location right 1 bit Rotate the 9 bits consisting of the carry flag and an 8 bit register or RCR reg mem8 CL D2 3 memory location right the number of v bits specified in the CL register Rotate the 9 bits consisting of the carry flag and an 8 bit register or RCR reg mem8 imm8 CO 3 ib memory location right the number of bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value Rotate the 17 bits consisting of the RCR reg mem16 1 Di 3 carry flag and a 16 bit register or memory location right 1 bit Rotate the 17 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 16 bit register or REP ee mee apes D3 3 memory location right the number of v bits specified in the CL register Rotate the 17 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 16 bit register or RCR reg mem16 imm8 Cl 3 ib memory location right the number of bits specified by an 8 bit immediate value Rotate the 33 bits consisting of the RCR reg mem32 1 Di 3 carry flag and a 32 bit register or memory location right 1 bit Rotate the 33 bits consisting of the carry flag and a 32 bit register
316. s for HyperTransport request and response packets The Base ID must be 00 or 01 GetBaseID Returns the HyperTransport base unit ID BUID HtInterrupts 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 HyperTransport interrupts HintStatus Returns enabled if HyperTransport interrupts are enabled otherwise it returns disabled IoLog OI1 Enables 1 or disables 0 IO logging Returns enabled if IO Logging is enabled otherwise it returns disabled MemLog 0I1 Enables 1 or disables 0 IO logging Returns enabled if Memory Logging is enabled Memos stats otherwise it returns disabled i M SmiSciLog 0l1 Enables 1 or disables 0 IO logging Returns enabled if SMI SCI Logging is enabled IoLogStatus EE otherwise it returns disabled GetConfig Displays the current AMD 8111 configuration A 7 16 EHC 1 simnow gt ehc usage Automation Command Description los enable disable imp Enables or disables Memory m and PCI Configuration p logging A 7 17 Journal 1 simnow gt journal usage Automation Command Description Returns Super Block Size Index Block Size Index GetParam Levels Disk Block Size and Maximum Disk Size SetParam lt Super Block Size gt lt Index Block Size gt lt Index Sets journal parameters Levels Disk Block Size A 7 18 CPU 1 simnow cpu usage Automation Command Description Append
317. s under development There are two modes of XTR XTR Record and XTR Playback The simulator supports both modes and one mode does not necessitate the other The simulator could be used to record XTR traces only or playback XTR traces generated from other sources as far as the XTR specification is followed correctly see Section 7 23 4 Limitations on page 121 An XTR XML file contains Initialization Data Events and Instructions XTR Initialization data stores the state of CPU just before XTR recording is initiated This data is used to initialize the CPU and memory parameters during Playback the memory itself is initialized from the contents of the binary file Any register that does not have corresponding initialization data in XTR XML file will be initialized with zero XTR events fall into two categories e Dormant Events which record an event occurrence but do not trigger an event during playback e Active events that are recorded in XTR file and are actively triggered during playback IOR IOW MEMR MEMW RDMSR are examples of dormant events and INTR APIC DMAW EOT are examples of Active events XTR Instructions are commands that are injected in the XTR trace to give special instructions during XTR playback FJMP Force Jump is an XTR Instruction 112 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 23 1 Using XTR No special setup for XTR Record is required XTR can be recorded by using the appropria
318. s via PCIINTD The AMD 8111 device doesn t support PCI Express This limits the number of distinct requester ID s available Three requester ID s legacy LPC legacy PCI internal IDE controller There are no SimNow PCI models that implement MSI This means the only APIC style interrupts the IOMMU can intercept are from a single requester ID the AMD 8111 device s internal IOAPIC Chapter 7 Device Configuration 97 User Manual November 2010 7 13PCI BUS Device The PCI Bus device enables you to add PCI devices to the system You can configure the PCI Bus device to provide any number of PCI slots for one to six connections You configure each PCI slot on the PCI Bus by setting its device number and base IRQ routing pin Interfaces The PCI Bus device has two types of interfaces a bus interface and one or more slot interfaces The bus interface connects to a device that provides a PCI bus such as a Northbridge Each PCI slot interface is capable of connecting to a PCI device such as a PCI video controller The PCI bus behaves somewhat differently than other AMD SimNow devices First the connection points are not all centered in the middle of the icon instead each connection point has a discrete location around the perimeter of the icon to provide a visual indication that each PCI device is connected to a different PCI slot Second the connection points are exclusive that is only one device can connect to each connection poin
319. simulator sessions running via the mediator In addition all broadcast traffic including ARP s are routed to this class of MAC addresses Allocations of absolute MAC addresses need to be coordinated such that they are not replicated on the same host subnet MAC addresses beginning with FA CD and having a third byte between 0x21 and 0x80 are Classified as fixed The simulator adapters using this class of MAC address can access the real network but cannot be seen by other simulator sessions outside of its domain This class of MAC address allows a user to simultaneously run identical BSD s using unique domains This class of MAC addresses will not receive broadcast traffic such as ARP s Allocations of fixed MAC addresses need to be coordinated such that they are not replicated in the same mediator domain 7 25 4 Example Configurations MAC address assignment was designed to satisfy many usability needs Table 7 10 shows a list of possible usage models for the simulator and MAC Address assignments 7 25 4 4 Absolute NIC This configuration mimics plugging in a physical computer into whatever network your mediator is running on The user must select a MAC Address that is not duplicated anywhere else on the mediator s subnet All broadcast and targeted network traffic will be routed to a simulator session using this classification of MAC Address This provides maximum visibility for the simulator session Example M
320. sing the debugger Chapter 7 Device Configuration 103 User Manual November 2010 7 17 AMD 8151 AGP Bridge Device The AMD 8151 AGP Bridge Device tunnel is a HyperTransport tunnel that provides an AGP bridge In general AMD 8151 would be connected in a non coherent HyperTransport chain between the host bridge and the Southbridge Interface The AMD 8151 has three types of interfaces HyperTransport AGP and INT IOAPIC buses The AMD 8151 has two HyperTransport links HTO and HT1 that can connect to other non coherent HyperTransport link capable devices HTO should be connected to the upstream link the one closest to the host bridge and HyperTransport should be connected to the downstream link The AGP interface should be connected to an AGP graphics device The INT_IOAPIC bus should be connected to the Southbridge it routes interrupt signals from the AGP bus to the Southbridge Initialization and Reset State When first initialized or reset the AMD 8151 registers are set to their default state This is described in detail in the AMD 8151 datasheet Contents of a BSD The current state of all PCI configuration registers and any internal state variables are saved in the BSD Configuration Options The AMD 8151 device allows you to set its Revision number as shown in Figure 7 32 E AMD 8151 AGP Tunnel 2 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging 8151 Rev H 8151 Rev 18 Figure 7 32 AMD 8151 Device Properties Dialog
321. sking and memory is non cacheable options 9 Click OK to close the configuration dialog and accept the changes 14 2 Changing DRAM Size There are two ways to configure the simulated memory size For generic memory size configuration in powers of two you can use the Memory Configurator see Figure 14 1 and for specific or non symmetric DIMM configurations please follow the steps on page 174 n To open the Memory Configurator dialog click on the main menu item View and then choose Show Memory Configurator View Show Memory Configurator The Memory Configurator populates each DIMM device with two DIMMs of all identical size and type It accounts for DDR and DDR2 and registered or unregistered memory types as required The SPD files are loaded using the default path for SPD files Images lt spdfile gt Please be advised that memory configurations that are too large will slow down the simulation significantly and may also confuse some BIOS s Chapter 14 BIOS Developer s Quick Start Guide 169 User Manual November 2010 lil Memory Configurator Choose an available memory configuration from list below then press the Set Memory Config button to perform the change This is only for generic memory size configuration in powers of 2 For specific or non symmetric DIMM configurations please go to the DIMM device s configuration page s and load or clear individual SPD ROM files as necessary CAUTION It is easy t
322. slavelOl1 offl lt filename gt This command is valid only for drives configured as ATAPI The command will set the Media Ejected flag to true and will optionally set a new image file to File Use the special name off without the quotes if you want to leave the drive without an image file i e empty after the eject DMADelay masterlslavelO0l1 usec delay gt Sets the DMA delay for specified drive master or slave to usec delay Noise offlonlOl1 Turn on to print debug messages SetImageType masterlslavel0I1 ID RAW AUTO This command is used to tell SimNow which type of hard disk image is used ID indicates that the hard disk image contains an ID block RAW indicates that the hard disk image is a sector by sector copy identical to the source AUTO indicates that SimNow will try to identify the used type of hard disk image automatically GetImageType masterlslavel0I1 Returns the current image type setting ID RAW or AUTO See SetImageType JournalResize masterlslavelOl1 Old Journal gt lt New Journal gt Migrate journal to a new location Status masterlslavelOI1 If connected to a drive image gives status About the disk image writable block size And about the disk journal path size writable super block bits idx levels index bits data bits BDROMStatus masterlslavel0I1 Returns whether the drive is a BD ROM device SetBDROM masterls
323. sm is an instruction all instructions execute in the same amount of time and are one tick in length This tick time is scaled and used by the rest of the system Long latency events like disk or floppy access have some minimum latency built in because we found legacy software that relied on the physical latency of these peripherals The simulator contains all the classic pieces of a PC system CPU memory Northbridge Southbridge display IDE drives floppy keyboard and mouse support Images hard disk DVD CD ROM and floppy can be created in custom sizes with the DiskTool program Section 13 DiskTool on page 167 that is provided with the simulator A simulation can be saved at any point in the simulation to a media file from which the simulation can be re run at a later time A simple diagnostic port model known as Port80 device displays values written by the BIOS in a pane of the simulator s main window Other panes display guest simulated machine and simulator host processor times The simulator requires several files to be specified Binary files containing the BIOS and disk images are stored in the images directory The simulator home directory stores bsd files which contain the configuration of the system how models are connected together and their settings and the logical state of all the devices in the simulator When starting a simulation from reset the bsd file is rather small and only contains the conf
324. ssage In case you have difficulties to establish a connection or the connection is unstable or KD has difficulties to stay in sync with the simulated OS You can set a multiplier to delay the baud rate The baud rate is normally modeled based on the time elapsed on the simulated system The simulated system may be running at 1 100 of normal time which will give longer time delays than the kernel debugger can tolerate Consequently we provide a way to speed up the modeled baud rate by up to 100 times For example to delay the baud rate by 1 100th of normal you would use the following automation command Serial 1 SetMultiplier 1 By default the multiplier is 100 which means the modeled rate is unchanged The user may set it in the range 1 to 100 When set to 1 the modeled rate is 100 times faster than the baud rate so the system delays will be that much shorter See also Section A 7 11 Serial on page 240 The following command will connect the kernel debugger to the simulator using a pipe as communication channel C Program Files Debugging Tools for Windows G bit ke k com pipe port pipe SimNow Com1 We recommend not starting the kernel debugger too early To achieve best results launch the kernel debugger after the O S kernel has loaded and it is trying to establish a connection with the kernel debugger 11 2GDB Interface Getting the gdb interface in the simulator to work involves a sequence of commands in both the simu
325. starting at physical address OxF0000 and ends at OXF0000 0xFFFF Table 10 6 Find Pattern Example qi 0x1000 L 0x2000 PCI qa noncase 0x1000 L 0x2000 PCI qa OxF0000 P OxFFFF 0x55 OxAA 10 2Debugger Command Reference The CPU Debugger Window consists of five areas as shown in Figure 10 1 The top most area displays the current CPU integer registers in 16 32 or 64 bit mode depending on the current mode of the CPU The next area displays a disassembly of the next six instructions starting at the current CS RIE IP The next area displays 128 bytes of memory as bytes words dwords or qwords The address size and physical or virtual attributes are based on the most recent D command The next area is a general message window where messages and information are displayed The bottom area is the command area where debugger commands are entered Table 10 7 lists the debugger commands and their definitions Debugger Command Definition Chapter 10 CPU Debugger 153 User Manual November 2010 Definition Debugger Command Displays an abbreviated list of the available commands and their syntax lt blank line gt Repeat of previous command lt automation command gt Execute an automation command P Path lt Path gt Sets the file search path L lt Symbol File gt Address Load Loads the named symbol file optionally offsetting each address by the giv
326. sted version of the simulator and displaying it over a network to a Windows PC desktop Why does the on line help not work on Linux Quit any local Mozilla browsers before clicking on the on line help menu items or buttons in the simulator What is SimNow software See Section 1 Overview on page 1 Is SimNow faster than my old Vax 780 See Section 1 Overview on page 1 What is a BSD file See Section 6 1 BSD Files on page 49 What do you need to run the simulator See Section 2 Installation on page 3 What generic BSD files are provided with the simulator See Section A 2 1 Computer Platform Files on page 164 How do I load a BSD file See Section 5 1 1 Open a Simulation Definition File on page 40 How do I Start Stop Reset Press Soft Sleep or Press Soft Power for simulations See Section 3 1 Tool Bar Buttons on page 7 What kind of hardware does the simulator require See Section 2 1 System Requirements on page 3 What host operating systems can the simulator be run on See Section 2 1 System Requirements on page 3 What Guest operating systems are supported See Section A 3 Supported Guest Operating Systems on page 186 Chapter 15 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 175 User Manual November 2010 What devices are supported See Section 7 Device Configuration 3 on page 53 What about graphics video adapter See Section 1 Overview o
327. stemBios Returns true if memory is used as a System BIOS otherwise it returns false MemAddrMask 0l1 Enables 1 or disables 0 memory address masking If enabled 1 it indicates that the address received by the memory device is masked by a bit mask with the same number of bits as the size of the memory device e g a 256 Kbyte ROM uses an 18 bit mask or it is masked by 0x003FFFF This enables the ROM to be remapped dynamically into different memory address ranges in conjunction with the aforementioned chip select GetAddrMask Returns true if memory address masking is enabled otherwise it returns false InitValEnable 0l1 Enables 1 or disables 0 the initialized unwritten memory option If enabled the memory is initialized using a specified byte see below nitVal otherwise the memory is not initialized InitVal lt hex value gt Sets byte initializer for memory that needs to be initialized InitValStatus Displays information if the initializer is used and if the memory initialization is activated DisableCache lt 011 Sets memory region to cacheable 0 or non cacheable 1 GetCacheDisabled Returns true if non cacheable otherwise it returns false GetConfig Displays Memory configuration information FlashMode lt 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 this device to be used as a flash ROM FlashUpdateFile lt 0 1 gt Enables 1 or disbales 0 w
328. sub devices is saved in the BSD Configuration Options The only configuration options for AMD 8131 are to enable or disable hot plug for each of its PCI X bridges as shown in Figure 7 29 You cannot enable or disable hot plug after a simulation has already begun D 44 8131 PCI X Controller 10 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Hot Plug Hot Plug Bridge A Enable C Hot Plug Bridge B Enable Figure 7 29 AMD 8131 Device Hot Plug Configuration Differences from Real Hardware Clock sensitive functionality like setting bus speeds is not supported Neither are system errors or power management 100 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 7 15 AMD 8132 PCI X Controller The AMD 8132 PCI X Controller is a HyperTransport tunnel that provides two PCI X buses and two IOAPICs These PCI X buses may or may not be configured as hot plug capable depending on the platform Interface AMD 8132 has two types of interfaces HyperTransport and PCI buses It has two HyperTransport links HTO and HTI that can connect to other HyperTransport link capable devices Either HyperTransport link can be set to be the upstream HyperTransport link The PCI bus interfaces in the AMD 8132 must be connected to a PCI Bus device which provides the Slot interfaces with which to connect devices for simulation Initialization and Reset State When first initialized AMD 8132 device is in its default state This is describe
329. t lt Data Length 64 Value 00005f5e5d5b64890d0000000081c414040000c218008bff293b47003b3b47003b3b4700 4d3b47004d3b47004d3b4700568bf18b460c85c0c706f4eb5b007406 gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type DMAW ICount 23921 Address 000000000c254340 Length 64 gt lt Data Length 64 Value 6d00005f5e5bc3909ac04600b7c04600d4c04600eec0460008c1460022c146003cc14600 2fc2460067c2460085c24600a3c24600909090909090909090909090 gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type PIN ICount 326462 Name INTR Level A gt Event Device TO_DO_IN_NB Type APIC I Count 326462 Name EXTINT DestinationMode F DeliveryMode 07 Level F TriggerMode F Vector 00 Destination 00 gt lt Event Device CPUO Type PIN ICount 326462 Name INTR Level D gt Event Device CPUO Type INTACK ICount 326462 Vector 00000000000000d1 gt Event Device CPUO Type IOW ICount 326532 Address 70 Size 1 gt Data Length 1 Value 0c gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type IOR ICount 326536 Address 71 Size 1 gt Data Length 1 Value cO gt lt Event gt lt Event Device CPUO Type IOW ICount 326541 Address 70 Size 1 gt Data Length 1 Value 0c gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type IOR ICount 326545 Address 71 Size 1 gt lt Data Length 1 Value 00 gt lt Event gt Event Device XTR Type EOT ICount 400967 gt lt AmdEventTrace gt 124 Chapter 7 Dev
330. t 588 Address a037 Size 1 gt Data Length 1 Value 0c gt lt Event gt INSTR Device CPUO Type FJMP ICount 6778 JMP 1 RIP f86b0619 gt INSTR Device CPUO Type FJMP ICount 6797 JMP 1 RIP f86b0619 gt Event Device CPUO Type IOW ICount 6817 Address a038 Size 2 gt Data Length 2 Value 40af gt lt Event gt INSTR Device CPUO Type FJMP ICount 7081 JMP 1 RIP f86b0317 gt INSTR Device CPUO Type FJMP ICount 7099 JMP 1 RIP f86b0317 gt lt Event Device CPUO Type IOR ICount 7110 Address a037 Size 1 gt Data Length 1 Value Od gt lt Event gt lt Event Device CPUO Type IOR ICount 7121 Address a037 Size 1 gt Chapter 7 Device Configuration 123 User Manual November 2010 Data Length 1 Value Od gt lt Event gt lt Event Device CPUO Type IOR ICount 7137 Address a03e Size 2 gt lt Data Length 2 Value 0000 gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type IOW ICount 7198 Address a03c Size 2 gt Data Length 2 Valuez 5fcO gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type DMAW ICount 8403 Address 000000000c254340 Length 64 gt lt Data Length 64 Value 6d00005f5e5bc3909ac04600b7c04600d4c04600eec0460008c1460022c146003cc14600 2fc2460067c2460085c24600a3c24600909090909090909090909090 gt lt Event gt Event Device CPUO Type DMAW ICount 18228 Address 000000000e67dc00 Length 64 g
331. t NS e mE 121 1 29 Example Sors XM DE EE 121 T 4 J mpDriv Device siis e E RUIN E A ENEE 127 7 25 E1000 Network Adapter Device eese eene enne 128 7 25 1 Simulated Link Negotiation eege eenegen 129 7 23 2 The Mediator Daemon 2 21 24 002c eA Rede 130 7 25 3 MAC Addresses for use with the Adapter esesseess 131 7294 Example Confisurati ns E 131 E WT 131 7 25 4 2 Client Server simulated netbwork AA 132 7 25 4 3 Isolated Client Server simulated network Same process 132 ys _ Visibility Cruci Up 133 7 26 Plug and Play Monitor DeVICG iai echt sere ose NUES da Ese POE Eed 134 7 237 ATI SB400 SB600 SB700 SB800 Southbridge Devices 136 7 208 ATI RS480 RS780 RD790 RD890 Northbridge Devices 138 4 299 AMD Istanbul Device tee nmt SEENEN 139 T30 AMD Sa Paulo Device inpri incre ntg aige a i ssa tuin 140 T1 AMD Masny Co rs E 141 7 32 SXMD DeerHo nd Device coco di viet presume Toii dts 142 Se PCLConfig ta tion MIER Ee 143 8 1 Scanning PCT BUSES erenneren SE EREE NS A ESES 143 8 2 Modifying the PCI Configuration content 143 DMG EE 145 9 1 MESSAGE EE 145 9020 ETOT Ee Eeer 147 9 3 VO WEE 148 I9 C PE Debug BOT o ceste ede E eve E E A 151 EL Using th CPU Heger uec eie De Ee e stiis 151 1031 1 Setting a Breakpoitnt s oacosee eene tenda era de sone e adda dei 151 10 1 2 Single Stepping the Simulatio
332. t i ead s 30 Contents lii User Manual November 2010 3 4 2 6 MMIO Ee NEE 31 DAES Simulated et EE 31 3 4 4 Hard Disk and Floppy Display S2 ensi geed unl de podus ur esed edendis 31 3 4 5 Using Hard Drive DVD CD ROM and Floppy Images 32 3 4 6 Help Problems and Bug Reports eese 32 4 lt ee 35 4 1 Creating A Blank Hard Drive Image isso un etr entre etna eege eegene 35 5 Running the Simulators so euh ils eiie Ee Eege 39 5 1 Command Line Arguments ssesssesesseeesseessetsseeeseetsseeesstesstesseessseessseesseesseesset 39 5 1 1 Open a Simulation Definition Fe eee eene dario tds a edge deiude 40 5 2 Installing an Operating S ystetm anie NEE 42 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Images ot scihivis te e ted dd dE E LU daos 42 20 2 Run Ne EE 44 5 2 3 Interaction with the Simulated Machine 45 2 2 4 3S BU aH OD Eeer Eed ee ati y 45 5 3 M lti Machine Suppor EE 45 6 Create a Simulated Computer sssseseeeseseeseeesseessetsseeeseeessseesstesserssersseeessseesseessesset 49 6 1 BSD FUES onines Eed 49 G2 Device Placements EE 49 6 3 Solo bsd Device Configuration sssessesssesssesessseessresseesseeessetsssressesseesseeesseee 51 6 4 Saye and EE 52 T Device CO BUT ALON sosie ori ode lon ea EEA E EE E Aa 53 7 1 AWweSim Processor DeVIGE soe io ani SE ET E eur Maa bine 55 42 Debugger DEVICE Eden 58 d DIMM Device P 59 TA vEmerald
333. t on the PCI bus because in a real system one cannot install two PCI cards into a single PCI slot It is planned that these new behaviors will be used in other devices when required Initialization and Reset State The default state of the device has all slots disabled This is because each platform configures its PCI Buses in specific ways that make it impossible to provide a generic default Since the PCI Bus device does not include any state that is altered during the course of a simulation after a reset the PCI Bus device remains unchanged Contents of a BSD The configuration of the PCI bus including which slots are enabled the device ID for each slot and the base IRQ routing pin for each slot and the connection points are saved in the BSD Configuration Options Figure 7 28 shows the PCI Bus configuration options 98 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 B Pci Bus 6 Properties Connections 10 Logging PCI Bus Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI Slot 2 PCI Slot 3 PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 PCI Slot 6 Device ID 0 31 Base IRQ Pin 4 PCIIRG A v 5 PCIIRQ B ze iB PCIIRG C 7 PCIIRG D 0 Enable Slot Hew Kg ao Figure 7 28 PCI Bus Properties Dialog The first field is the Device ID of the slot This value may range from zero to 31 The second field is the Base IRQ Pin for the slot You can choose from p
334. tError The GetLastError method returns the last error code If Exec returns false you can call GetLastError to retrieve the error code void GetLastError argl Parameters argl An input string buffer in which SimNow will place the last error that was recorded from the automation interface The Perl code in Example 12 1 shows how to instantiate a SimNow Command object and how to interact with the SimNow CMDAPI interface perl w Chapter 12 Command API 161 User Manual November 2010 WSS Wims2 LR D use JL EE 8 WelieiLeualic p mias s SONS seu 3p cmd Win32 OLE gt new SimNow Command or die Cannot open SimNow Command n MyResponse Variant VT_BSTR VT BYREF do Drine eigene Ug Xem eum o lt gt chomp CmdLine xit SCS naa if S cmd gt Exec CmdLine MyResponse H print SMyResponse n else Scmd gt GetLastError MyResponse print Cannot Exec SMyResponse n while CmdLine joue moer ist p Example 12 1 Perl Sample CMDAPI Source Code 162 Chapter 12 Command API User Manual November 2010 13 DiskTool Use the DiskTool utility to create hard disk images DiskTool copies byte for byte the contents of a secondary hard disk into an hdd file This hdd file can be loaded as a disk image in the simulator DiskTool runs in two modes GUI mode and command line mode Double clicking on
335. table register to A memory SGDT mem16 64 OF 01 0 Store global descriptor table register to v memory SIDT mem16 32 OF Ol 1 Store interrupt descriptor table register to v memory SIDT mem16 64 OF 01 1 Store interrupt descriptor table register to v memor Store the segment selector from the local SLDT regl6 OF 00 0 descriptor table register to a 16 bit v register Store the segment selector from the local SLDT reg32 OF 00 0 descriptor table register to a 32 bit e register Store the segment selector from the local SLDT reg64 OF 00 0 descriptor table register to a 64 bit ei register Store the segment selector from the local SLDT mem16 OF 00 0 descriptor table register to a 16 bit memory e location SMSW regl6 OF Ol 4 Store the low 16 bits of CRO to a 16 bit v register SMSW reg32 OF Ol 4 Store the low 32 bits of CRO to a 32 bit v register 220 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction EE Mnemonic Opcode Description pp SMSW reg64 OF O1 4 Store the entire 64 bits of CRO to a 64 bit v register SMSW memi6 F 01 4 Store the low 16 bits of CRO to memory m STI FB Set interrupt flag IF to 1 v Store the segment selector from the tas STR regl6 OF 00 1 register to a 16 bit general purpose e register Store the segment selector from the tas STR reg32 OF 00 1 register to a 32 bit general purpose ei register Store the se
336. tal line one pixel high Full vertical scale represents a rate of one exception taken by the simulator per ten simulated instructions These exceptions may be internal to the simulator and not turn into exceptions in the simulated machine The lower darker color represents all such exceptions other than segmentation violation SEGV exceptions The upper lighter color represents all the SEGV exceptions This upper lighter color is a minimum of a one pixel high line i e a value of zero SEGV exceptions still shows a one pixel high line of the lighter color Exception Rate Graph All exceptions other than segmentation violations SEGV Exceeded what can be displayed Segmentation violations SEGV Figure 3 20 CPU Exception Rate Graph 3 4 2 5 PIO Rate Graph The PIO Rate Graph updates once a second If the port I O PIO rate exceeds what can be displayed on this graph the graph line turns red A rate of zero will appear as a horizontal line one pixel high Full scale represents one PIO per ten simulated instructions Darker color on the bottom of the graph represents the read PIO s the lighter color represents the write PIO s 30 Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface User Manual November 2010 Write PIO s Eege PIO Rate Graph what can be displayed Read PIO s Figure 3 21 CPU PIO Rate Graph 3 4 2 6 MMIO Rate Graph The MMIO Rate Graph updates once a second If the memory mapped I O MMIO rate exceeds what
337. te 16 bit value from a 16 bit destination register or memory location v reg mem32 imm32 81 5 id Subtract an immediate 32 bit value from a 32 bit destination register or memory location reg mem64 imm32 81 5 id immediate 64 bit memory Subtract a sign extended 32 bit value from a destination register or location reg mem16 imm8 83 5 ib Subtract a sign extended immediate 8 bit value from a 16 bit register or memory location reg mem32 imm8 83 5 ib Subtract a sign extended immediate 8 bit value from a 32 bit register or memory location reg mem64 imm8 83 5 ib Subtract a sign extended immediate 8 bit value from a 64 bit register or memory location reg mem8 reg8 28 E Subtract the contents of an 8 bit register from an 8 bit destination register or memory location reg mem16 reg16 29 fr Subtract the contents of a 16 bit register from a 16 bit destination register or memory location reg mem32 reg32 29 E Subtract the contents of a 32 bit register from a 32 bit destination register or memory location reg mem64 reg64 29 r Subtract the contents of a 64 bit register from a 64 bit destination register or memory location reg8 reg mem8 2A E Subtract the contents of an 8 bit register or memory operand from an 8 bit destination register regi6 reg memi 2B fr Sub
338. te automation commands as described in Section A 7 29 XTR on page 255 The XTR XML file can easily exceed five Gbytes in size Please make sure you have enough physical storage before you start XTR Record 7 23 1 1 Recoding XTR Trace To record XTR please enter the following commands in the simulator s console window 1 simnow xtrsvc xtrfile lt filename xml gt 1 simnow xtrsvc xtrenable 1 1 simnow go or hit Run on the shell 7 23 1 2 Stop XTR Record To stop XTR record please enter the following commands in the simulator s console window 1 simnow stop Stop the simulation 1 simnow xtrsvc xtrenable 0 7 23 1 3 XTR Playback For XTR Playback XTR Northbridge XTRNB replaces all the devices including any other Northbridge in the system Hence for UP XTR Playback only AweSim and XTRNB are required Please refer to Section 7 23 1 3 XTR Playback on page 115 on how to connect AweSim and the XTRNB device It is recommended to also include the Debugger device for debugging or logging needs To playback XTR please enter the following commands in the simulator s console window new adddevice Debugger adddevice Awesim Processor cpu type K8 cpu setname Athlon64 cpu setnumcores 1 cpu forcefinegrainedevents 1 cpu SetStartUpFID 12 adddevice xtrnb euer ives Processor s CRU I OY Mxacicials 42 V IX Iu 9 connect Awesim Processor 40 Interrupt IOAPIC Bus xtrnb 42 Interrupt
339. terfaces The Super IO device model has a single interface connection and is connected to the LPC connection of the Southbridge device Initialization and Reset State The following conditions represent the keyboard and or mouse during initialization and reset state A20 and reset released Mouse scaling set to 1 Mouse resolution set to 4 Stream mode off Mouse sample rate set to 100 All sticky keys released Keyboard output port set to OxDF The floppy is initialized with no drive image present Reset clears the controller to an idle state If an image is loaded reset does not unload the image COMI and COM2 are initialized with 9600 Baud no parity 8 bit words 1 stop bit and interrupts off The parallel port initializes with the data and control ports set to zero Reset clears these ports to their initial values The following devices have no functionality behind them at this time with the exception of their configuration registers These registers are initialized and reset to the values specified in the Super I O specification IR GPIO MIDI Joystick Fan Contents of a BSD e Keyboard and Mouse 80 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Floppy COMI and COM2 LPTI IR GPIO MIDI Joystick Fan All devices store their current state in the BSD files as well as any data that may be buffered at the time of the save Register content is also saved for all devices Configuration Op
340. tes a left mouse button down event MouseRightDown Generates a right mouse button down event MouseLeftUp Generates a left mouse button up event MouseRightUp Generates a right mouse button up event MouseMoveAbs X Y Moves the mouse cursor to absolute x y position Log enableldisable id Enables or disables logging This command injects keyboard input from the command line It takes basic text such as keyboard text Text dirv This command can handle more complex sequences with other NV prefixed strings see Table 15 14 Table 15 14 shows the currently defined prefix sequences Prefix Action Prefix Action Nr RETURN 8 lt FUNCTION KEY 8 gt t lt TAB gt 9 lt FUNCTION KEY 9 gt lt BACKSLASH gt 10 lt FUNCTION KEY 10 gt Nr DOUBLE QUOTE NV tab TAB V lt SINGLE QUOTE gt del lt DELETE gt esc ESCAPE up UP ARROW gt 1 lt FUNCTION KEY 1 gt down lt DOWN ARROW gt 2 lt FUNCTION KEY 2 gt left lt LEFT ARROW gt 3 lt FUNCTION KEY 3 gt right lt RIGHT ARROW gt 4 lt FUNCTION KEY 4 gt ctrl m CONTROL make 5 lt FUNCTION KEY 5 gt ctrl b CONTROL BRAKE Appendix A 247 User Manual November 2010 Prefix Action Prefix Action 6 FUNCTION KEY 6 N alt m ALT MAKE 7 lt FUNC
341. the file does not exist or if its contents cannot be parsed the device will not be listed The buttons on the right side of the DiskTool Window correspond to the four command line options listed above In addition there are About and Exit buttons that perform the obvious function When creating a new blank image or when getting an image from a physical device to an image file an additional dialog is presented that allows you to select how large the new image file should be The options in this dialog mirrors the mage Size options for the equivalent command line commands After launching DiskTool you are presented with the interface shown in Figure 13 2 Chapter 13 DiskTool 165 User Manual November 2010 L SimNow DiskTool Physical Drives Create Disk Image From Host Disk PHYSICALDRIVEDO C GEI PHYSICALDRIVE1 D Copy Disk Image To Host Disk PHYSICALDRIVE2 E Create Blank Disk Image Drive Information Floppy Disk A Erase Host Disk No disk present Figure 13 2 DiskTool GUI Window You may select any physical drive in your system including floppy drives Selecting a drive updates the Drive Information list box as shown in Figure 13 3 Note DiskTool does not support Serial ATA SATA drives E SimNow DiskTool Physical Drives A H PHYSICALDRIVET D Copy Disk Image To Host Disk PHYSICALDRIVE2 E Create Disk Image From Host Disk Create Blank Disk Image Drive Informa
342. the port to be mapped for the device group Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 25 User Manual November 2010 Turn This Row s Port Internal Port Names External Port Names Mapping On Off Le a Remove Internal to External Lonnection Port Mappings for AMD 8fh Generation Integr 9 AMD 8th Generation Integrated Northbridge 33 Gerfration Ftegraed preka 30 ax on edemdpotforaudece gm i HyperTransport Bus 0 HyperTransport Bus 0 HyperTransport Bus 1 HyperTransport Bus 1 Memory Bus Memory Bus Memory Bus 1 Memory Bus 1 CPU Bus 4 strExtemal P CPU Bus5 strExtemal Die o Die Communication Link strExtemal E HyperTransport Bus 0 Sublink 1 strExtemal HyperTransport Bus 1 Sublink 1 strExtemal HyperTransport Bus 2 strExtemal HyperTransport Bus 2 Sublink 1 strExtemal E HyperTransport Bus 3 strExtemal HyperTransport Bus 3 Sublink 1 strExtemal Clicking ol 7 Interrupt IOAPIC Bus strExtemal So if you aq CT MBLA strExtemal state page mee etrEvtamal When you are done defining the device group then simply click the Finish button This causes the device group to get created A known device group file is created using the bsg file you specified for Export to file and loaded as a known device The devices you grouped are swapped deleted and replaced with a created device instance of your new device group Its internal connections
343. the signed v result in RDX RAX Multiply the contents of a 16 bit destination register by the contents MUL regl6 reg mem16 OF AF r of a 16 bit register or memory ei operand and put the signed result the 16 bit destination register Multiply the contents of a 32 bit destination register by the contents IMUL reg32 reg mem32 OF AF r of a 32 bit register or memory ef operand and put the signed result the 32 bit destination register Multiply the contents of a 64 bit destination register by the contents IMUL reg 4 reg mem 4 OF AF r of a 64 bit register or memory ei operand and put the signed result the 64 bit destination register Multiply the contents of a 16 bit register or memory operand by a sign IMUL regl16 reg mem16 imm8 6B r ib extended immediate byte and put the Ff signed result in the 16 bit destination register Multiply the contents of a 32 bit register or memory operand by a sign IMUL reg32 reg mem32 imm8 6B r ib extended immediate byte and put the e signed result in the 32 bit destination register 198 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 Instruction Mnemonic Opcode Description Supported IMUL reg64 reg mem64 imm8 6B Ze ib Multiply the contents of a 64 bit register or memory operand by a sign extended immediate byte and put the signed result in the 64 bit destination register v IMUL regl6 reg meml imm16 69 E iw Multiply the
344. tialization data is invalid for the SREG This may or may not be an error in the initialization data XTRNB CPUO rejected Initialization of SREG XXXXXXXXX with specific value Logged during XTR initialization phase XTRNB Skipping write to Code patch MSR C0010020 Logged during XTR initialization phase XTRNB Processing GETMEMPTR request for XXXXXXXXXXX Denied Logged during XTR execution phase where XXXXXX is the physical address of page requested The request may be denied if it is requested for a MMIO region DEVMC READMEM 800000007F 1CAD00 296 55 8B EC 51 56 8B 75 0C DEVMC WRITEMEM 400000007F294FD4 523 A9 17 53 80 Logged during XTR execution phase 800000007F1CAD00 is the address 296 is the instruction count The data following the is the data that returned and received to and from the CPU This message is logged for a READ WRITE MEMORY request but no record is present in XTR XML file for this read The data is hence served and written from and to backing store whose contents were originally initialized from the XTR binary file XTRNB Ir AOSE w event time 326 Consume time 597 CPU ICount 99 01 00 XTRNB Iw AO3E w event time 345 Consume time 616 CPU ICount 118 00 00 XTRNB la D1 w event time 326462 Consume time 326462 CPU ICount 326235 Logged during XTR execution phase when IOR IOW message is received by XTRNB AO03E is the address of IOR IOW and the data after the is the data that is retur
345. ting neither AGP cycles nor AGP specific modes at this time High performance device drivers are available for most operating systems Windows Linux and Solaris The Matrox G400 supports full acceleration of all GDI and DirectDraw functions Figure 7 9 shows the integrated components of the Matrox G400 graphics device Features and components which are currently not supported by the Matrox G400 graphics device model have a G symbol in the following block diagram High Resolution Color Monitor Up to 2056 x 1536 at 32b i NV Not Supported RAMDAC Floating Point P VMI Por Setup Engine Second CRTC CODEC Port Primary CRTC Programmable CPU Graph Area Ultra pipelined Video Scaling Unit k MAFC Port Advanced 3D Texturing and Rendering Engine 16 or 32 Mbytes SGRAM or SDRAM Interfaces Local Frame Buffer Memory Chapter 7 Device Configuration 67 User Manual November 2010 The Matrox G400 graphics device has both a PCI bus and an AGP bus connection only one of which can be used at any time to connect to PCI bus or AGP bus ports in other devices Initialization and Reset State Upon initial creation this device initializes the internal registers to Matrox G400 standard reset state and creates a display window that acts as the VGA display The Configuration options are initialized to enable both the VGA and Matrox Power Graphics Mode The frame buffer size is initialized to 32 Mbytes and the Bios File memory area is in
346. tion Physical Drive 0 WDC WD1200BB 00DAA1 pase cles Dice 48Bit LBA LBA Sectors 234375000 Total Capacity 111 8 GB Figure 13 3 DiskTool Drive Information 166 Chapter 13 DiskTool User Manual November 2010 When a drive is selected you have the option to get an image from the drive put an image onto the drive or erase the contents of the drive If you erase the contents of the drive a dialog will ask for confirmation that you actually wish to permanently destroy the contents of that hard disk In case DiskTool displays an Operation failed message box DiskTool was unable to lock or unlock the drive This can happen if for example any files or explorer windows are open on any of the partitions on the selected drive For example if the drive that DiskTool is trying to access has partitions for C and D and an explorer window is open on any path within D then DiskTool won t be able to lock or unlock that drive and DiskTool will display an Operation failed message box If you put an image onto the drive a dialog will again ask for confirmation that you actually wish to permanently destroy the contents of that hard disk Then a dialog prompts for the location of the image file that should be placed on that hard disk A progress bar Figure 13 4 will inform you of the progress being made If you get an image from a drive a dialog window will prompt for the path of file that will store the disk image
347. tion shows information about the current memory configuration of the graphics device Currently supported memory configurations are e 32 16 MB SGRAM with 300 MHz RAMDAC e 32 16 MB SDRAM with 300 MHz RAMDAC 68 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 D Matrox R MGA G400 Graphics Adapter 9 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Information Configuration Graphics Hardware Model Matrox Millennium G400 AGP Graphics chip Matrox G400 DualHead support No Serial Number PBIO8418 Graphics BIOS v 2 1 Build 35 Graphics Memory Memory type SGRAM Amount of memory 32 MB Maximum RAMDAC speed 300 MHz Figure 7 10 Matrox G400 Information Property Dialog The Configuration tab displays details about the active configuration of the Matrox G400 graphics device If you want to change the active configuration click on the Configuration Tab see Figure 7 11 Chapter 7 Device Configuration 69 User Manual November 2010 D Matrox R MGA G400 Graphics Adapter 9 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Information Configuration Settings BIOS ROM File Images g400 837 21 bin Millennium G400 Adapters Millennium G400 Max DualHead 32 MB SGRAM 360 MHz RAMDAC Millennium G400 SingleHead 32 MB SGRAM 300 MHz RAMDAC Millennium G400 SingleHead 32 MB SDRAM 300 MHz RAMDAC Millennium G400 DualHead 16 MB SGRAM 300 MHz RAMDAC Millennium G400 Single
348. tions The Super I Os have the capability of setting device breakpoints on an event basis In this case the event is the sequence of writes to access the Super I O s device configuration registers Selecting the PNP Lock Unlock Registers option in Figure 7 16 activates the breakpoint anytime the lock and unlock sequence is hit The other option is to set breakpoints to trigger whenever any of the device configuration registers are accessed D Winbond W83627HF SIO 47 Properties Connections 1 0 Logging Super IO Device Breakpoints C PNP Lock Unlock Registers C Read Device Registers C Write Device Registers Floppy amp Data File me Floppy B Data File o Figure 7 16 Super IO Properties Dialog Winbond W83627HF Chapter 7 Device Configuration 81 User Manual November 2010 Floppy Configuration Options The floppy is capable of reading disk images of real floppies created with the DiskTool Utility described in Section 13 on page 167 To use an image first create an image file with DiskTool and then specify the floppy image file in the Super I O configuration dialog page Difference from Real Hardware Keyboard Mouse Floppy COMI and COM2 differ from real hardware Baud rate parity and stop bits are ignored Communication is always available Baud rate timing is approximate Modem status and line status always show the device is ready The default values of the control registers are read
349. to their saved states Common Configuration Options The USB dialogue window shown in Figure 7 23 gives the user the ability to enable or disable USB ports of the USB controller USB devices which are connected to disabled USB ports won t be identified and detected by an operating system For instance in Figure 7 23 the USB Port 0 is disabled and USB Port 1 and 2 are enabled 92 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 D AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 4 Properties Primary HDD Channel Secondary HDD Channel CMOS USB 0 USB1 4 USB Port Configuration Port Number Enabled USB Device Port D None Port 1 None Port 2 None Figure 7 23 USB Properties Dialog AMD 8111 Southbridge The CMOS dialogue window shown in Figure 7 24 gives the user the ability to change the contents of CMOS When first created the CMOS contains all zeroes to force a CMOS checksum error resulting in the default settings being loaded by BIOS The alternative to this is loading a binary file containing the CMOS desired data The user can create this file by entering changes and using the save feature to create the binary file Chapter 7 Device Configuration 93 User Manual November 2010 D AMD 8111 1 0 Hub 4 Properties Primary HDD Channel Secondary HDD Channel CMOS USB 0 Current Values Value 10x18 0x00 0x14 0x00 0x12 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x05 0x05 0x26 nun Cal Ces Cea E Figure
350. tract the contents of a 16 bit register or memory operand from a 16 bit destination register reg32 reg mem32 2B E Subtract the contents of a 32 bit register or memory operand from a 32 bit destination register SUB reg64 reg mem64 2B jr Subtract the contents of a 64 bit register or memory operand from a 64 bit destination register TEST AL imm8 AB Xb AND an immediate 8 bit value with the contents of the AL register and set rFLAGS to reflect the result TEST AX imm16 AQ iw AND an immediate 16 bit value with the contents of the AX register and set rFLAGS to reflect the result TEST EAX imm32 AQ id AND an immediate 32 bit value with the contents of the EAX register and set rFLAGS to reflect the result TEST RAX imm32 AQ id AND a sign extened immediate 32 bit value with the contents of the RAX register and set rFLAGS to reflect the result TEST reg mem8 imm8 F6 0 ib AND an immediate 8 bit value with the contents of an 8 bit register or memory operand and set rFLAGS to reflect the result TEST reg mem16 imm16 F7 0 iw AND an immediate 16 bit value with the contents of a 16 bit register or memory operand and set rFLAGS to reflect the result TEST reg mem32 imm32 F7 0 id AND an immediate 32 bit value with the contents of a 32 bit register or memory operand and set rFLAGS to reflect
351. turns the processor number which the debugger is currently attached to EnableStatus Returns enabled if debugger is enabled disabled if debugger is disabled GetConfig Displays the current configuration Appendix A 235 User Manual November 2010 A 7 9 AMD 8151 AGP Bridge 1 simnow amd8151 usage Automation Command Description Sets the internal Chip revision number of the AMD 8151 AGP device value must be between 1 and 255 Gets the internal Chip revision number of the AMD 8151 AGP SetRev Rev GetRev device A 7 10 VGA 1 simnow vga usage Automation Command Description Bios filename Loads the specified BIOS file GetBios Returns the active BIOS file name VGA 0l1 1 enables the VGA 0 disables it GetVGA Returns current status of the VGA registers true if enabled and false if disabled GetConfig Displays VGA configuration A 7 11 Serial 1 simnow gt serial usage Previous versions of the simulator always used only the named pipe format Because of this the named pipe was created as soon as the BSD was loaded Because the new version allows you to dynamically alter the communications method the transport is not created until you hit go for the first time or after making any change to the transport method What this means is that if you are using a named pipe you will have to press go before the named pipe is actually created Automation Com
352. tus for the DVD ROM device or a particular volume SetDVDROM offlonl0l1 Sets the drive to DVD ROM device Eject offl lt filename gt This command is valid only for drives configured as ATAPI The command will set the Media Ejected flag to true and will optionally set a new image file to File Use the special name off without the quotes if you want to leave the drive without an image file i e empty after the eject DMADelay masterlslavelOl1 usec delay gt Sets the DMA delay for the drive to usec delay Noise offlonlOl1 Turn on to print debug messages Appendix A 233 User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description SetImageType ID RAW AUTO This command is used to tell SimNow which type of hard disk image is used ID indicates that the hard disk image contains an ID block RAW indicates that the hard disk image is a sector by sector copy identical to the source AUTO indicates that SimNow will try to identify the used type of hard disk image automatically GetImageType Returns the current image type setting ID RAW or AUTO See SetImageType JournalResize Old Journal New Journal Migrate journal to a new location If connected to a drive image gives status About the disk image writable block size And SS about the disk journal path size writable super block bits idx levels index bits data bits B
353. u want to store the blank image file and then enter the image filename Click on the Save button An additional dialog see Figure 4 3 is presented that allows you to select how large the blank image file should be WW New Image Size x Options Entire Drive Stop after partition 1 Stop after partition 2 Stop after partition 3 Stop after partition 4 Custom tt of Sectors 9388608 Image Size MB 4094 Figure 4 3 New Image Size Before you start creating a new blank disk image make sure that the image will be large enough to install Windows or Linux on it You can enter the image size in MB or in number of sectors We recommend an image size of 4 GB Increase the value of Image Size MB to 4096 and then click on the Ok button to create the image file A progress bar will inform you of the progress being made see Figure 4 4 iil Blank Image Aen windows xp professional 64 hdd AAAA AAA 7 Cancel Figure 4 4 Create Blank Image Once the image is created successfully DiskTool will display a message box as shown in Figure 4 5 Click on the Ok button Chapter 4 Disk Images 35 User Manual November 2010 lil Blank Image iD Operation Successful Figure 4 5 DiskTool Operation Successful To exit DiskTool click on the Exit button on the right side of the DiskTool dialog window see Figure 4 1 36 Chapter 4 Disk Images User Manual November 2010 5 Running
354. up disk images see Section 4 1 Creating A Blank Hard Drive Image on page 35 Section 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Images on page 42 and Section 13 DiskTool on page 167 and run the simulation 50 Chapter 6 Create a Simulated Computer User Manual November 2010 7 Device Configuration Each section in this chapter provides a description of how to configure device models in the simulator s Device Properties window These device models include the CPU CPU debugger Northbridge DIMM memory modules AMD graphics device Southbridge Super IO memory device PCA9548 and PCA9556 SMB PCI bus AMD 8131 PCI X device PCI X test device AMD 8132 PCT X2 device Raid device SMB Hub device EXDI server and the USB keyboard and mouse devices These sections should be considered as a reference for how to configure a device model and are not intended to document how to use the model within the simulator The full release version of the simulator ships with more devices then the public release version Table 7 1 gives an overview of supported devices depending on the simulators version Symbol Device Public Release Full Release AMD Debugger v v AweSim Processor e e DIMM Device e e AMD 8 Generation Integrated Northbridge v v AMD 8111 Southbridge v v AMD 8131 PCI X Controller v v AMD 8132 PCI X Controller v v AMD 8151 AGP Bridge Dev
355. ure 5 5 The simulator superimposes a small square over the screen at the position of the host mouse You can also allow the simulator to take complete control of the mouse and keyboard by selecting Special Keyboard Grab Mouse and Keyboard To return from this mode press and hold Ctrl then Alt and then release them in reverse order A Special Keys Generator mm Generate Special Key ur e 7 Selected Special Keys used more often Cti AltsDel v Press Key No key pressed Figure 5 5 Special Keys Generator 5 2 4 Simulation Reset To reset the entire simulator stop the simulation with the Stop button P then press a the Reset button which is to the right of the Stop button At this point hard drive images may be changed as described in 5 2 1 Assigning Disk Image on page 42 5 3 Multi Machine Support The multiple machine concept allows the simulator to create multiple simulation machines within the same process space and to load and execute these machines independently The default shell provided with the simulator includes three new commands that allow the user access to the multiple machine functionality The newmachine command creates a new emtpy simulation machine The created new machine is in no way related to the current machine Tou can load BSDs edit device Chapter 5 Running the Simulator 43 User Manual November 2010 configurations
356. urns the link status of link 0 1 or 2 LinkWidth 01112 8116 Sets link width to 8 or 16 bit of link 0 1 or 2 GetLink Width 01112 Returns link width in bits of link 0 1 or 2 GetConfig Displays LDT configuration LogDMA 0l1 Enables 1 or disables 0 DMA logging DMALogStatus Returns enabled if logging is enabled otherwise it returns disabled A 7 13 8 Generation Northbridge 1 simnow gt sledgenb usage Automation Command Description LogHT 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 logging Returns enabled if logging is enabled otherwise it EE returns disabled LogPCIConfig 011 Enables 1 or disables 0 PCI Config logging Returns enabled if PCI Config logging is enabled Pe oer otherwise it returns disabled GetConfig Displays Northbridge logging configuration ProductFile lt FileName gt Loads the specified product file FileName A 7 14 DBC 1 simnow gt dbc usage Automation Command Description GetParam Returns disk block cache parameters size depth and bits SetParam lt size gt lt depth gt lt bits gt Sets disk block cache parameters 238 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 A 7 15 AMD 8111 Device 1 simnow 8111 usage Automation Command Description This specifies the HyperTransport protocol base unit ID The IC s logic uses this value to determine the unit PASE W0 ID
357. v ADD reg mem8 imm8 80 0 ib Add imm8 to reg mem8 v ADD reg mem16 imm16 81 0 iw Add imm16 to reg mem16 v ADD reg mem32 imm32 81 0 id Add imm32 to reg mem32 v ADD reg mem 4 imm32 81 0 id Add sign ext imm32 to reg mem64 v ADD reg mem16 imm8 83 0 ib Add sign ext imm8 to reg meml6 v ADD reg mem32 imm8 83 0 ib Add sign ext imm8 to reg mem32 v ADD reg mem 4 imm8 83 0 ib Add sign ext imm8 to reg mem 4 v ADD reg mem8 reg8 00 r Add reg8 to reg mem8 ei ADD reg mem16 reg16 0l Ze Add regl16 to reg memi v ADD reg mem32 reg32 0l r Add reg32 to reg mem32 v Appendix A 191 User Manual November 2010 Instruction SupDoricd Mnemonic Opcode Description PP ADD reg mem 4 reg 4 01 r Add reg64 to reg mem 4 m ADD reg8 reg mem8 02 Ze Add reg mem8 to reg amp v ADD regl 6 reg memi6 03 r Add reg mem16 to regl6 v ADD reg32 reg mem32 03 x Add reg mem32 to reg32 m ADD reg64 reg mem64 03 r Add reg mem64 to reg 64 v AND the contents of AL with an AND AL imm8 24 ib immediate 8 bit value and store the e result in AL AND the contents of AX with an AND AX imm16 25 iw immediate 16 bit value and store the e result in AX AND the contents of EAX with an AND EAX imm32 25 id immediate 32 bit value and store the e result in EAX AND the contents of RAX with a sign AND RAX imm3
358. vent Name could be EOI INIT STARTUP SMI NMI INTR REMOTE READ EXTINT LPARB and Unknown Device can be the name of the device that issues the interrupt Current XTR implementation ignores the name of the device Event Devicez CPUO Type INT ACK ICount 325496 Vector 00000000000000d1 gt Defines an INTACK cycle event Event Device XTR Typez EOT ICount 400001 gt Defines an End of Trace EOT event Event Devicez CPUO Typez RDMSR ICount 1404861740 Address 00000010 Data 0000000053BC7D2C gt Defines a RDMSR event Event Devicez CPUO Type MEMR ICountz 3133971257 Address 00000000000A88B2 Size 1 gt lt Data Length 1 Value FF gt lt Event gt Chapter 7 Device Configuration 117 User Manual November 2010 Event Devicez CPUO Type MEMW ICount 3133971259 Address 00000000000A88B2 Size 1 gt lt Data Length 1 Value 01 gt lt Event gt Defines a Memory Read or Memory Write event MEMR and MEMW are recorded for MMIO ranges 7 23 2 2 XTR Binary File Contents XTR Binary file contains the memory image of the system just before the XTR Record started The binary file contains multiple records where each record contains has the following structure Physical Address Of the Page 8 bytes Count of Bytes in this Page 4 Bytes Data Of the Page Count of Bytes earlier Currently XTR only supports page size of 4096 bytes Both the DIMM and MMIO may be present in the X
359. vice To the user the composite device will look and feel no different than a normal device library and for the most part the two should be indistinguishable A device group can consist of one or more child devices with some optional initialization state associated with each child device and those devices can optionally be connected to each other It may be helpful to think of a device group as a BSD within a BSD However a device group also has its own identity as a device and it can support external connection ports that allow it be connected to other devices in the same manner as a traditional device library 3 3 1 Terms If any of the language and wording used in these Device Groups sections is unclear it may help to refer to this list of terms Device A device library or device group also a known device or created device Device Library Contains binary implementation of device functionality has no child devices associated with a bsI Windows or xz bel Linux file Device Group Grouping of one or more devices libraries and groups into a single device gets its functionality through aggregation of its children and from its group specific properties aspects associated with a bsg file Known Device A device that the shell knows about i e the shell has all the necessary information to create an instance of this device Known devices appear in the left hand pane of the Device Viewer window and on the cons
360. which then pulls RESET which ultimately resets the CPU and the computer However the simulator does not simulate triple faults In case a triple fault occurs the simulator stops the simulation The simulation cannot be restarted until a reset is asserted but the simulation state can be inspected with the simulator s debugger A 5 3 Performance Monitoring Counter Extensions Setting CR4 PCE bit 8 to 1 allows software running at any privilege level to use the RDPMC instruction Software uses the RDPMC instruction to read the four performance monitoring MSRs PerfCTR 3 0 Clearing PCE to 0 allows only the most privileged software CPL 0 to use the RDPMC instruction The simulator does support the RDPMC instruction but there is no logic behind the simulated performance counter MSRs A 5 4 Microcode Patching Microcode patches do not affect the simulated machine behavior This may have unintended consequences A 5 5 Instruction Coherency Instruction coherency does not work when code pages have multiple virtual mappings Here is an example that would not work right There is an x86 physical page that has code on it This page is mapped by two different virtual addresses A and B There is a store to virtual page A We execute code from page B We store again to A modifying some of the x86 code that we executed in step 4 We execute the code from step 4 again Qv a Se 186 Appendix A User Manual November 2010 The code w
361. y LFS reg32 mem16 32 OF B4 r Load FS reg32 with a far pointer from v memory LGS reg16 mem16 16 OF BS r Load GS regl6 with a far pointer from v memor LGS reg32 mem16 32 OF BS r Load GS reg32 with a far pointer from v memory LSS reg16 mem16 16 OF B2 r Load SS regl6 with a far pointer from o d memory LSS reg32 mem16 32 OF B2 r Load SS reg32 with a far pointer from v memory LEA regl6 mem 8D r Store effective address in a 16 bit v register Store effective address in a 32 bit LEA reg32 mem 8D r register e LEA reg64 mem 8D r Store effective address in a 64 bit v register Set the stack pointer SP to the value LE A AVE di in the BP register and pop BP amp Set the stack pointer ESP to the LEAVE C9 value in the EBP register and pop amp EBP Set the stack pointer RSP to the LEAVE C9 value in the RBP register and pop a RBP LFENCE OF AE E8 Force strong ordering of serialize v load operations Load byte at DS rSI into AL and then iam AG increment or decrement rSI v Load word at DS rSI into AX and then KODS E MEMER AD increment or decrement rSI v Load doubleword at DS rSI into EAX e n and then increment or decrement rSI v Load quadword at DS rSI into RAX and LODS memea AD then increment or decrement rSI v Load byte at DS rSI into AL and then DRE increment or decrement rSI v Load word at DS rSI into AX and then mn AD increment or decrement rSI v Load doubleword at DS rSI into EAX dein AD and then
362. y drive This computer also comes with a USB JumpDrive and NIC device Right clicking on any icon brings up a Workspace Popup menu Figure 3 3 that allows access to the Device Property window which includes a list of all components that the selected component is connected to An example Device Property window is shown in Figure 3 4 The right click Workspace Popup menu also allows you to delete or disconnect the selected device from all its connections Table 3 1 lists each component in the cheetah_Ip bsd computer For more information about devices and possible device configuration please refer to Section 7 Device Configuration on page 53 Symbol Device Short Description AMD Debugger Standard debugging support AweSim Processor Simulated Processor DIMM Bank DIMM Memory Modules AMD 8 Generation Integrated Northbridge Integrated Northbridge treated as a separate device in simulation AMD 8111 Southbridge Southbridge supporting Hard drives DVD CD ROM drives Floppy drives USB ports CMOS and POST ports AMD 8132 PCI X Controller The AMD 8132 PCI X Controller is a HyperTransport tunnel that provides two PCI X buses and two IOAPICs These PCI X buses may or may not be configured as hot plug capable depending on the platform Emerald Graphics Device Simulated VGA device Matrox G400 Graphics Device Simulated VGA SVGA device Come e Sx S
363. y will require the user to input different domains in the mediator connection string see also Section 5 1 Command Line Arguments on page 39 m option 7 25 4 3 Isolated Client Server simulated network Same process This type of setup isolates the simulator sessions from the real network only allowing visibility to other simulator sessions in the same process A mediator is not required for this type of setup Example MAC 02 00 00 00 00 01 IP Address Static IP address 192 168 0 1 Visibility Can only communicate with BSD s in the same simulator process using multiple machines Mediator String N A Table 7 13 Isolated Client Server Simulator Server Example MAC 02 00 00 00 00 02 IP Address Static IP address 192 168 0 2 130 Chapter 7 Device Configuration User Manual November 2010 Visibility Can only communicate with BSD s in the same simulator process using multiple machines Mediator String N A Table 7 14 Isolated Client Server Simulator Client 1 7 25 5 Visibility Diagram Figure 7 37 depicts the mediator routing packets to and from several simulator sessions in different domains The session running BSD 3 is using an absolute MAC address and therefore is globally visible This session is no different than any other machine running on the external network All simulator sessions connected to any mediator will be able to see this m
364. ystem Regardless of the configuration of the simulated COM port the host COM ports baud rate is configured depending on the BAUD parameter with 8 bit data no parity 1 stop bit BAUD can be one of the following values 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 38400 56000 57600 or 115200 See also Section 11 1 Kernel Debugger on page 161 none Tells the simulator to discard any written data and always return receiver empty on reads This only applies to the Windows version of the simulator and not to the Linux version Appendix A 237 User Manual November 2010 Automation Command Description Use the SetMultiplier automation command to specify the baud rate delay time used to make the serial based communication to Microsoft s kernel debugger in some cases much more stable A SetMultiplier nMultiplier valid nMultiplier value must be in the range of nMultiplier gt 1 and nMultiplier lt 100 For example to delay the baud rate by 1 00th of normal you would enter SetMultiplier 1 The default for nMultiplier is 100 GetMultiplier Returns the current value of nMultplier A 7 12 HyperTransport Technology Configuration 1 simnow sledgeldt usage Automation Command Description Link 01112 011 Enables or disables link 0 1 or 2 For example sledgeldt link O I enables link 0 and sledgeldt link O 0 disables linko LinkStatus 01112 Ret
365. yte in CMOS at address addr to value stored in data GetData Dumps complete CMOS GetRamSize Returns the CMOS RAM size in bytes ClearTo lt value gt Sets entire CMOS to specified value value A 7 6 ACPI 1 simnow gt acpi usage Automation Command Description PowerButton Triggers PowerButton ACPI message SleepButton Triggers SleepButton ACPI message A 7 7 Floppy 1 simnow gt floppy usage Automation Command Description SetFloppy A B 0l1 filename Assigns a floppy image file filename to drive A or BP GetFloppy A B 0l1 Returns the assigned floppy image file of drive A or B EjectFloppy lt A B 011 gt The command will set the Media Ejected flag of drive A or B A 7 8 Debug 1 simnow gt debug usage Automation Command Description Enables the Debugger and opens a debug dialog window if GUI Enable is enabled Disables the Debugger and closes debug dialog window if GUI Disable is enabled Attach Processor Num Attaches debugger to specified processor ExecCmd Command Executes the debug command specified in command see Section 10 2 Debugger Command Reference on page 155 MemDump Dumps 128 bytes of memory DisDump Dumps disassembly RegDump Dumps all CPU registers MsgDump Dumps debug messages WhichProc Re

SimNow User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents